HILTI

Fastening Technology
Manual
Issue 2003
Important notice
1. Construction materials and conditions vary on different sites. If it is suspected that the base mate-
rial has insufficient strength to achieve a suitable fastening, contact the Hilti Technical Advisory
Service.
2. The information and recommendations given herein are based on the principles, formulae and
safety factors set out in the Hilti technical instructions, the operating manuals, the setting instruc-
tions, the installation manuals and other data sheets that are believed to be correct at the time of
writing. The data and values are based on the respective average values obtained from tests
under laboratory or other controlled conditions. It is the users responsibility to use the data given
in the light of conditions on site and taking into account the intended use of the products concer-
ned. The user has to check if the listed prerequisites and criteria conform with the conditions actu-
ally existing on the job-site. Whilst Hilti can give general guidance and advice, the nature of Hilti
products means that the ultimate responsibility for selecting the right product for a particular appli-
cation must lie with the customer.
3. All products must be used, handled and applied strictly in accordance with all current instructions
for use published by Hilti, i.e. technical instructions, operating manuals, setting instructions, instal-
lation manuals and others).
4. All products are supplied and advice is given subject to the Hilti terms of business.
5. Hilti’s policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to alter specifica-
tions, etc. without notice.
6. The given mean ultimate loads and characteristic data in the Fastening Technology Manual reflect
actual test results and are thus valid only for the indicated test conditions. Due to variations in local
base materials, on-site testing is required to determine performance at any specific site.
7. Hilti is not obligated for direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or expenses
in connection with, or by reason of, the use of, or inability to use the products for any purpose.
Implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose are specifically excluded.
Hilti Corporation
FL-9494 Schaan
Principality of Liechtenstein
www.hilti.com
Hilti = registered trademark of the Hilti Corporation, Schaan

Foreword
Dear Customer,
In this new Fastening Technology Manual we have compiled all design

data relevant to anchoring products. It is intended to make users’ work
easier, help them to solve fastening problems in their many forms safely
as well as reliably and to optimise the entire fastening system cost.
Through our world-wide direct sales organisations, contact is made with

more than 70,000 customers every day, ensuring that we keep abreast
of market needs and fastening problems.
International application know-how, highly specialised research and

development,
the latest production plant and equipment as well as an optimised

quality assurance system give our customers the assurance of
receiving top quality and enjoying a maximum of safety with the
products they use.
The Fastening Technology Manual will be a reliable reference work for

you when solving your design and fastening problems. It is verification
that you are working with a partner aware of the demanding
responsibilities of modern fastening technology.
Dr. Thomas Schweisfurth

Head of Business Area Fastening & Protection Systems
N
α
s1
c
6
5 4
3 2
s2
h
1
s2
V
Anchor technology and design 1
Mechanical anchoring systems 2
Adhesive anchoring systems 3
Examples 4
Appendix 1 5
Appendix 2 6
Contents
Anchor technology and design

1. Base materials ...................................................................................................................3
1.1 Concrete ..............................................................................................................................3
1.2 Masonry ...............................................................................................................................4
1.3 Other base materials ...........................................................................................................5
1.4 Why does an anchor hold in base material? .......................................................................6
1.4.1 Failure modes .........................................................................................................7
1.4.1.1 Effect of static loading .............................................................................7
1.4.1.2 Influence of cracks ..................................................................................8
2. Corrosion..........................................................................................................................10
3. Dynamics .........................................................................................................................13
3.1 Dynamic Design for Anchors .............................................................................................13
3.2 Dynamic Set for Shear Resistance Upgrade ....................................................................17
4. Fire ....................................................................................................................................19
5. Approvals .........................................................................................................................23
6. Anchor design..................................................................................................................28
6.1 Safety concept ...................................................................................................................28
6.2 Design methods.................................................................................................................29
6.2.1 New design method ..............................................................................................30
Mechanical anchoring systems

Heavy duty anchors
HDA-T/-TR/-TF/-P/-PR/-PF design anchor..................................................................................35
HSL-3-heavy duty anchor ............................................................................................................46
Medium duty anchors

HSC-A(R)/I(R) safety anchor .......................................................................................................55
HST/-R/-HCR stud anchor ...........................................................................................................65
HSA/HSA-R/HSA-F stud anchor..................................................................................................74
HLC sleeve anchor ......................................................................................................................85
HKD-S/-SR flush anchor..............................................................................................................87
HUS-H screw anchor ...................................................................................................................95
Light duty anchors

HUD-1 universal anchor ............................................................................................................103
HUD-L universal anchor ............................................................................................................106
HGN gas concrete anchor .........................................................................................................109
HLD light duty anchor ................................................................................................................112
HRD-U/-S frame anchor ............................................................................................................114
HPS-1 impact anchor.................................................................................................................118
HUS screw anchor .....................................................................................................................121
HHD-S cavity anchor .................................................................................................................125
DBZ wedge anchor ....................................................................................................................129
HA 8 ring/hook anchor ...............................................................................................................131
HSP/HFP drywall plug ...............................................................................................................133
Light duty anchors (Insulation fasteners)

IDP insulation fastener...............................................................................................................135
IZ expandable insulation fastener..............................................................................................137
IN insulation fastener .................................................................................................................139
IDMS/IDMR metal insulation fastener........................................................................................141
I
Contents
Adhesive anchoring systems

Heavy duty anchors
HVZ adhesive anchor ................................................................................................................145
HIT-TZ injection adhesive anchor..............................................................................................155
HVU with HAS/-R/-HCR/-E/-E-R adhesive anchor ....................................................................165
HVU with HIS-N/-RN adhesive anchor ......................................................................................174
HVU with rebar adhesive anchor ...............................................................................................183
HIT-RE 500 with HAS/-R/-HCR/-E/-E-R adhesive anchor ........................................................190
HIT-RE 500 with HIS-N/-RN adhesive anchor...........................................................................200
HIT-RE 500 with rebar adhesive anchor ...................................................................................210
HVA-UW with HAS-R/-HCR adhesive anchor ...........................................................................219
HVA-UW with HIS-RN adhesive anchor....................................................................................221
Medium duty anchors

HIT-HY 150 with HAS injection mortar anchor ..........................................................................222
HIT-HY 150 with HIS-N/-RN injection mortar anchor ................................................................231
HIT-HY 150 with rebar injection mortar anchor .........................................................................240
HIT-ICE with HAS injection mortar anchor ................................................................................248
HIT-ICE with HIS-N/-RN injection mortar anchor ......................................................................250
HIT-ICE with rebar injection mortar anchor ...............................................................................252
Light duty anchors

HIT-HY 50 with HIT-AN/-IG .......................................................................................................254
HIT-HY 20 with HIT-AN/-IG .......................................................................................................258
Special anchors
HRA, HRC, HRT rail anchor ......................................................................................................261
HWB cladding anchor ................................................................................................................271
Combined loading design .......................................................................................................274
Examples
9.1 Example 1........................................................................................................................277
9.2 Example 2........................................................................................................................281
Appendix 1
10.1 Rebar fastening application .............................................................................................287
10.1.1 Post-fix system advantages................................................................................287
10.1.2 Application examples..........................................................................................287
10.2 Product Information Hilti HIT-HY150 Rebar ....................................................................290
10.2.1 The injection system ...........................................................................................290
10.2.2 Adhesive bond ....................................................................................................290
10.2.3 Installation...........................................................................................................291
10.3 Rebar Fastening Design Concept ...................................................................................293
10.3.1 Scope..................................................................................................................293
10.3.2 Symbols ..............................................................................................................294
10.3.3 Fastening design ................................................................................................297
II
Contents
10.3.3.3 Limit to concrete bond utilisation.........................................................298

10.3.3.4 Basic anchorage length.......................................................................299
10.3.4 Detailing provisions.............................................................................................301
10.3.4.1 Minimum anchorage length .................................................................301
10.3.4.2 Splice length ........................................................................................301
10.3.4.3 Distance between cast-in rebars and new rebars...............................302
10.3.4.4 Poor Bond Conditions .........................................................................303
10.3.4.5 Limit state of cracking..........................................................................303
10.3.4.6 Green concrete....................................................................................304
10.3.5 Transmissible forces...........................................................................................305
10.3.5.1 Level of design value...........................................................................305
10.3.5.2 Level of recommended load ................................................................305
10.4 Examples of applications.................................................................................................306
10.4.1 Wall connection ..................................................................................................306
10.4.2 Wall extension ....................................................................................................307
10.4.3 Installation of an intermediate floor.....................................................................308
10.4.4 Installation of steps between landings................................................................310
10.5 Test reports, Supplementary information ...........................................................311
10.5.1 Relevant reports .................................................................................................311
10.5.2 Test results: Pull-out tests on rebars ..................................................................311
10.5.3 Test results: Full scale beam test .......................................................................313
Appendix 2
11.1 Concrete overlay connection ...........................................................................................315
11.1.1 Application range ................................................................................................315
11.1.2 Advantages of the method..................................................................................315
11.2 Design of interface...........................................................................................................317
11.2.1 Basic considerations...........................................................................................317
11.2.2 Ultimate limit state for shear transfer at the interface.........................................317
11.2.2.1 Principle and set-up of the model........................................................317
11.2.2.2 Design shear resistance at interface, VRd ...........................................318
11.2.2.3 Design shear strength at interface, WRdj ..............................................318
11.2.3 Design shear force acting longitudinally at interface, VSd ...................................322
11.2.3.1 Augmentation of compression zone....................................................322
11.2.3.3 Shear force to be transferred at overlay perimeter .............................322
11.2.3.4 Regions without connectors ................................................................323
11.2.4 Serviceability limit state ......................................................................................323
11.2.5 Additional rules and detailing provisions ............................................................323
11.2.5.1 Mixed surface treatments ....................................................................323
11.2.5.2 Minimum amount of reinforcement at the interface.............................323
11.2.5.3 Layout of connectors ...........................................................................324
III
Contents
11.2.5.4 Anchorage of connectors in the old and the new concrete.................324

11.2.5.5 Minimum reinforcement in overlay ......................................................325
11.2.5.6 Recommendation for overlay placement.............................................325
11.2.5.7 Recommendation for surface treatment specification.........................325
11.3 Examples .........................................................................................................................326
11.3.1 Example: Double-span slab................................................................................326
11.3.2 Example: Double-span beam with new slab ......................................................329
11.3.3 Example: Foundation reinforcement...................................................................330
11.4 Test results ......................................................................................................................331
11.4.1 Transfer of shear across a concrete crack .........................................................331
11.4.2 Laboratory tests by Hilti Corporate Research ....................................................331
11.4.3 Working principle of connectors .........................................................................332
11.4.4 Comparison with international test results..........................................................333
11.5 Notations..........................................................................................................................334
11.6 Reference literature .........................................................................................................335
12. Injection mortar with Hit HY 150 and HAS rod 5.5 with nut or headplate .......................336
12.1 Terms..................................................................................................................336
12.2 Data for calculation .............................................................................................337
12.3 Minimum steel content for Ved.............................................................................338
12.4 Product Information ............................................................................................342
IV
Contents
1
1 1
Anchor technology and design
1. Base materials 3
1.1 Concrete 3
1.2 Masonry 4
1.3 Other base materials 5
1.4 Why does an anchor hold in base material? 6
1.4.1 Failure modes 7
1.4.1.1 Effect of static loading 7
1.4.1.2 Influence of cracks 8
2. Corrosion 10
3. Dynamic 13
3.1 Dynamic Design for Anchors 13
3.2 Dynamic Set for Shear Resistance Upgrade 17
4. Resistance to fire 19
5. Approvals 23
6. Anchor design 28
6.1 Safety concept 28
6.2 Design methods 29
6.2.1 New design method 30
2
Base Materials
1. Base materials
Different anchoring conditions The wide variety of building materials used today provide different
anchoring conditions for anchors. There is hardly a base material in or to
which a fastening cannot be made with a Hilti product. However, the
properties of the base material play a decisive role when selecting a
suitable fastener / anchor and determining the load it can hold.
The main building materials suitable for anchor fastenings have been
described in the following.
1.1 Concrete
A mixture of cement, aggregates and water Concrete is synthetic stone, consisting of a mixture of cement, aggregates
and water, possibly also additives, which is produced when the cement
paste hardens and cures. Concrete has a relatively high compressive
strength, but only low tensile strength. Steel reinforcing bars are cast in
concrete to take up tensile forces. It is then referred to as reinforced
concrete.
Cracking from bending
Stress and strain

in sections with
conditions I and II
σb, D........ calculated compressive stress

σb, Z .......... calculated tensile stress
fct .......... .... concrete tensile strength
3
Base Materials
If the tensile strength of concrete is exceeded, cracks form, which, as a If cracks in the tension zone exist,
rule, cannot be seen. Experience has shown that the crack width does not suitable anchor systems are required.
exceed the figure regarded as admissible, i.e. w ≅ 0.3mm, if the concrete
is under a constant load. If it is subjected predominately to forces of
constraint, individual cracks might be wider if no additional reinforcement
is provided in the concrete to restrict the crack width. If a concrete
component is subjected to a bending load, the cracks have a wedge
1
shape across the component cross-section and they end close to the
neutral axis. It is recommended that anchor systems which have the
follow-up expansion feature and are of the force-controlled type, e.g. HSL-
TZ, HST, HA8, DBZ, or undercut anchor systems, e.g. HDA and HSC, be
used in the tension zone of concrete components. Other types of anchors
can be used if they are set at such a depth that their anchoring section is
positioned in the compression zone.
Anchors are set in both low-strength and high-strength concrete. Generally, Observe curing of concrete when
the range of the cube compressive strength, fck,cube, 150, is between 25 and using expansion anchors.
60 N/mm². Expansion anchors should not be set in concrete which has
not cured for more than seven days. If anchors are loaded immediately
after they have been set, the loading capacity can be assumed to be only
the actual strength of the concrete at that time. If an anchor is set and the
load applied later, the loading capacity can be assumed to be the
concrete strength determined at the time of applying the load.
Cutting through reinforcement when drilling anchor holes must be avoided. Avoid cutting reinforcement.
If this is not possible, the design engineer responsible must be consulted
first.
1.2 Masonry
Masonry is a heterogeneous base material. The hole being drilled for an Different types and shapes
anchor can run into mortar joints or cavities. Owing to the relatively low
strength of masonry, the loads taken up locally cannot be particularly
high. A tremendous variety of types and shapes of masonry bricks are on
the market, e.g. clay bricks, sand-lime bricks or concrete bricks, all of
different shapes and either solid or with cavities. Hilti offers a range of
different fastening solutions for this variety of masonry base material, e.g.
the HPS-1, HRD, HUD, HIT, etc.
If there are doubts when selecting a fastener / anchor, your local Hilti
sales representative will be pleased to provide assistance.
When making a fastening, care must be taken to ensure that a lay of insul- plaster coating is not a base material
ation or plaster is not used as the base material. The specified anchorage for fastenings.
depth (depth of embedment) must be in the actual base material.
4
Base Materials
1.3 Other base materials

Aerated concrete Gas concrete: This is manufactured from fine-grained sand as the
aggregate, lime and/or cement as the binding agent, water and aluminium
as the gas-forming agent. The density is between 0.4 and 0.8 kg/dm³ and
the compressive strength 2 to 6 N/mm². Hilti offers the HGN and HRD-U
anchors for this base material.
Lightweight concrete Lightweight concrete: This is concrete which has a low density, i.e. 1800
kg/m³, and a porosity that reduces the strength of the concrete and thus
the loading capacity of an anchor. Hilti offers the HRD, HUD, HGN, etc
anchor systems for this base material.
Drywall / gypsum panels Drywall (plasterboard/gypsum) panels: These are mostly building compo-
nents without a supporting function, such as wall and ceiling panels, to
which less important, so-called secondary fastenings are made. The Hilti
anchors suitable for this material are the HLD and HHD.
Variety of base materials In addition to the previously named building materials, a large variety of
others, e.g. natural stone, etc, can be encountered in practice. Further-
more, special building components are also made from the previously
mentioned materials which, because of manufacturing method and
configuration, result in base materials with peculiarities that must be given
careful attention, e.g. hollow ceiling floor components, etc.
Descriptions and explanations of each of these would go beyond the

bounds of this manual. Generally though, fastenings can be made to
these materials. In some cases, test reports exist for these special
materials. It is also recommended that the design engineer, company
carrying out the work and Hilti technical staff hold a discussion in each
case.
Jobsite tests In some cases, testing on the jobsite should be arranged to verify the
suitability and the loading capacity of the selected anchor.
5
Base Materials
1.4 Why does an anchor hold in a base material?

There are three basic working principles which make an anchor
hold in a building material:
Friction
1
The tensile load, N, is Friction
transferred to the base
material by friction, R. The
expansion force, Fexp, is
necessary for this to take
place. It is produced, for
example, by driving in an
expansion plug (HKD).
Keying
R The tensile load, N, is in

equilibrium with the
N supporting forces, R, Keying
acting on the base
material, such as with the
R
HDA anchor.
Bonding
An adhesive bond is
produced between the
anchor rod and the hole
wall by a synthetic resin Bonding
adhesive, such as with
the HVA anchor.
Combination of working principles

Many anchors obtain their holding power from a combination of the above Combination of working principles
mentioned working principles.
For example, an anchor exerts an expansion force against wall of its hole
as a result of the displacement of a cone relative to a sleeve. This permits
the longitudinal force to be transferred to the anchor by friction. At the
same time, this expansion force causes permanent local deformation of
the base material, above all in the case of metal anchors. A keying action
results which enables the longitudinal force in the anchor to be transferred
additionally to the base material.
6
Base Materials
Force-controlled and movement- In the case of expansion anchors, a distinction is made between force-con-
controlled expansion anchors trolled and movement-controlled types. The expansion force of force-
controlled expansion anchors is dependent on the tensile force in the
anchor (HSL heavy-duty anchor). This tensile force is produced, and thus
controlled, when a tightening torque is applied to expand the anchor.
In the case of movement-controlled types, expansion takes place over a

distance that is predetermined by the geometry of the anchor in the
expanded state. Thus an expansion force is produced (HKD anchor)
which is governed by the modulus of elasticity of the base material.
Adhesive/resin anchor The synthetic resin of an adhesive anchor infiltrates into the pores of the
base material and, after it has hardened and cured, achieves a local
keying action in addition to the bond.
1.4.1 Failure modes
1.4.1.1 Effects of static loading

Failure patterns The failure patterns of anchor fastenings subjected to a continually in-
creased load can be depicted as follows:
1. 2.
3. 3a. 4.
Causes of failure The weakest point in an anchor fastening determines the cause of failure.
Modes of failure, 1. break-out, 2. anchor pull-away and, 3., 3a., failure of
anchor parts, occur mostly when single anchors that are a suitable
distance from an edge or the next anchor, are subjected to a pure tensile
load. These causes of failure govern the max. loading capacity of
anchors. On the other hand, a small edge distance causes mode of failure
4. edge breaking. The ultimate loads are then smaller than those of the
previously mentioned modes of failure. The tensile strength of the
fastening base material is exceeded in the cases of break-out, edge
breaking and splitting.
Combined load Basically, the same modes of failure take place under a combined load.
The mode of failure 1. break-out, becomes more seldom as the angle
between the direction of the applied load and the anchor axis increases.
7
Base Materials
Generally, a shear load causes a conchoidal (shell-like) area of spall on Shear load
one side of the anchor hole and, subsequently, the anchor parts suffer
bending tension or shear failure. If the distance from an edge is small and
the shear load is towards the free edge of a building component, however,
the edge breaks away.
1
1.4.1.2 Influence of cracks
It is not possible for a reinforced concrete structure to be built which does Very narrow cracks are not defects
not have cracks in it under working conditions. Provided that they do not
exceed a certain width, however, it is not at all necessary to regard cracks
as defects in a structure. With this in mind, the designer of a structure
assumes that cracks will exist in the tension zone of reinforced concrete
components when carrying out the design work (condition II). Tensile
forces from bending are taken up in a composite construction by suitably
sized reinforcement in the form of ribbed steel bars, whereas the
compressive forces from bending are taken up by the concrete
(compression zone). The reinforcement is only utilised efficiently if the
concrete in the tension zone is permitted to be stressed (elongated) to
such an extent that it cracks under the working load. The position of the
tension zone is determined by the static / design system and where the
load is applied to the structure. Normally, the cracks run in one direction
(line or parallel cracks). Only in rare cases, such as with reinforced
concrete slabs stressed in two planes, can cracks also run in two
directions.
Testing and application conditions for anchors are currently being drafted
internationally based on the research results of anchor manufacturers and
universities. These will guarantee the functional reliability and safety of
anchor fastenings made in cracked concrete.
When anchor fastenings are made in non-cracked concrete, equilibrium is Efficient utilisation of reinforcement
established by a tensile stress condition of rotational symmetry around the
anchor axis. If a crack exists, the loadbearing mechanisms are seriously
disrupted because virtually no annular tensile forces can be taken up Loadbearing mechanisms
beyond the edge of the crack. The disruption caused disrupted by the
crack reduces the loadbearing capacity of the anchor system.
Crack plane
a) Non-cracked concrete b) Cracked concrete
8
Base Materials
Reduction factor for cracked concrete The width of a crack in a concrete component has a major influence on
the tensile loading capacity of all fasteners, not only anchors, but also
cast-in items, such as headed studs. A crack width of about 0.3mm is
assumed when designing anchor fastenings. The reduction factor which
can be used for the ultimate tensile loads of anchor fastenings made in
cracked concrete as opposed to non-cracked concrete may be assumed
to be 0.6 to 0.65 for the HSL-TZ or 0.65 to 0.70 for the HSC anchor, for
example. Larger reduction factors for ultimate tensile loads must be
anticipated (used in calculations) in the case of all those anchors which
were set in the past without any consideration of the above-mentioned
influence of cracks. In this respect, the safety factor to use to allow for the
failure of cracked concrete is not the same as the figure given in product
information, i.e. all previous figures in the old anchor manual. This is an
unacceptable situation which is being eliminated through specific testing
with anchors set in cracked concrete, and adding suitable information to
the product description sheets.
Since international testing conditions for anchors are based on the above-
mentioned crack widths, no theoretical relationship between ultimate
tensile loads and different crack widths has been given.
Pretensioning force in anchor bolts / rods The statements made above apply primarily to static loading conditions. If
the loading is dynamic, the clamping force and pretensioning force in an
anchor bolt / rod play a major role. If a crack propagates in a reinforced
concrete component after an anchor has been set, it must be assumed
that the pretensioning force in the anchor will decrease and, as a result,
the clamping force from the fixture (part fastened) will be reduced (lost).
The properties of this fastening for dynamic loading will then have
deteriorated. To ensure that an anchor fastening remains suitable for
dynamic loading even after cracks appear in the concrete, the clamping
Loss of pretensioning force due to cracks force and pretensioning force in the anchor must be upheld. Suitable
measures to achieve this can be sets of springs or similar devices.
9
Corrosion
2. Corrosion
Material recommendations to counteract corrosion
Application General conditions Recommendations
Initial/carcass construction 1
Temporary fastening: Outside and inside applications Galvanised or coated
Forming, site fixtures, scaffolding
Structural fastening: Dry inside rooms, no condensation Galvanised 5-10 microns

Brackets, columns, beams
Damp inside rooms with occasional Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
condensation due to high humidity min. 45 microns
and temperature fluctuations
Frequent and long-lasting A4 (316) steels, possibly hot-dipped

condensation (greenhouses), open galvanised
inside rooms or open halls / sheds
Composite construction Protection due to alkalinity of Galvanised 5-10 microns

concrete
Interior finishing
Drywalls, suspended ceilings, Dry inside rooms, no condensation Galvanised 5-10 microns
windows, doors, railings / fences,
elevators, fire escapes
Facades / roofing
Profiled metal sheets, curtain wall Rural atmosphere Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns
cladding, insulation fastenings, (without emissions) application
facade support framing
Outside Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
application min. 45 microns
Insulating Dacromet / plastic, A4 (316) steels

materials
Town / city Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

atmosphere: application
High SO2 and Nox
contents, chlorides Outside Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
from road salt can application min. 45 microns,
accumulate/ Hilti-HCR if chlorides exist
concentration on parts
not weathered directly Insulating A4 (316) steels
materials
Industrial atmosphere: Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

High SO2 content and application
other corrosive
substances (without Outside A4 (316) steels
halides) application
Insulating A4 (316) steels

materials
Coastal atmosphere: Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

High content of application
chlorides, combined
with industrial Outside Hilti-HCR
atmosphere application
Insulating Hilti-HCR
materials
10
Corrosion
Installations
Conduit installation, cable runs, Dry inside rooms, no condensation Galvanised 5-10 microns
air ducts
Damp inside rooms, poorly ventilated Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
Electrical systems: rooms, cellar / basement shafts, min. 45 microns
Runs, lighting, aerials occasional condensation due to high
humidity and temperature
Industrial equipment: fluctuations
Crane rails, barriers, conveyors,
machine fastening Frequent and long-lasting A4 (316) steels, possibly hot-dipped
condensation (greenhouses), non- galvanised
enclosed inside rooms or open
sheds / buildings
Road and bridge construction
Conduit installation, cable runs, Directly weathered (chlorides are Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
traffic signs, noise-insulating regularly washed off) min. 45 microns, A4 (316) steels,
walls, crash barriers / guard rails, Duplex steel or austenitic steel with
connecting structures approx. 4-5% Mo
Frequently heavy exposure to road Hilti HCR

salt, highly relevant to safety
Tunnel construction
Tunnel foils / sheeting, reinforcing Secondary relevance for safety Duplex steel, poss. A4 (316) steels
mesh, traffic signs, lighting,
tunnel wall cladding / lining, air Highly relevant to safety Hilti-HCR
ducts, ceiling suspensions, etc.
Dock/harbour/port facilities/off-shore rigs
Fastenings to quaysides, dock / Secondary relevance for safety, Hot-dipped galvanised

harbour temporary fastenings
High humidity, chlorides, often a Hilti-HCR

superimposed "industrial
atmosphere" or changes of oil / sea
water
On the platform / rig A4 (316) steels
Industry / chemical industry
Conduit installation, cable runs, Dry inside rooms Galvanised 5-10 microns
connecting structures, lighting
Corrosive inside rooms, e.g. A4 (316) steels, Hilti-HCR
fastenings in laboratories,
galvanising / plating plants etc., very
corrosive vapours
Outside applications, very heavy A4 (316) steels

exposure to SO2 and additional
corrosive substances (only acidic
surroundings)
Power plants
Fastenings relevant to safety Dry inside rooms Galvanised 5-10 microns
Outside applications, very heavy A4 (316) steels

exposure to SO2
11
Corrosion
Smokestacks of waste incineration plants
Fastening of, for example,

service ladders, lightening
conductors
In lower section of stack
In top section of stack, condensation

Hot-dipped galvanised/sherardized
min. 45 microns A4 (316) steels
Hilti-HCR
1
of acids and often high chloride and
other halide concentrations
Sewage / waste water treatment
Conduit installation, cable runs, In the atmosphere, high humidity, Hot-dipped galvanised/sherardized
connecting structures etc. sewage / digester gases etc. min. 45 microns A4 (316) steels
Underwater applications, municipal Hilti-HCR

sewage / waste water, industrial
waste water
Multi-storey car parks
Fastening of, for example, guard Large amounts of chlorides (road Hilti-HCR
rails, handrails, balustrades salt) carried in by vehicles, many wet
and dry cycles
Indoor swimming pools
Fastening of, for example, Fastenings relevant to safety Hilti-HCR

service ladders, handrails,
suspended ceilings
Sports grounds / facilities / stadiums
Fastening of, for example, seats, In rural atmosphere Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized
handrails, fences min. 45 microns
In town / city atmosphere Hot-dipped galvanised / sherardized

min. 45 microns A4 (316) steels
Inaccessible fastenings A4 (316) steels
12
Dynamics
3.1 Dynamic Design for Anchors

Detailed informations are available from your local Hilti partner or in the brochure: Dynamic
Design for Anchors, Hilti AG, 2001 W 2611 0601 20-e
Actions
Common engineering design usually focuses around static loads. This chapter is intended to point out those
cases, where static simplification may cause severe misjudgement and usually under-design of important struc-
tures.
Static loads can be segregated as follows:

Static loads
• Own (dead) weight
• Permanent actions
Loads of non-loadbearing components, e.g. floor covering, screed, or
from constraint (due to temperature change or sinking of supports /
columns)
• Changing actions
working loads (fitting / furnishing , machines, ”normal“ wear)
Snow
Wind
Temperature
Dynamic actions The main difference between static and dynamic loads is the effective-
ness of inertia and damping forces. These forces result from induced
acceleration and must be taken into account when determining section
forces and anchoring forces.
Typical Dynamic Actions Dynamic actions can generally be classified into 3 different groups:
• Fatigue loads
• Seismic loads
• Shock loads
Examples for Fatigue Loads Two main groups of fatigue type loading can be identified:
• Vibration type loading of fasteners with very high recurrence and usu-
ally low amplitude (e.g. ventilators, production machinery, etc.).
• Repeated loading and unloading of structures with high loads and fre-
quent recurrence (cranes, elevators, robots, etc.).
Actions relevant to fatigue Actions causing fatigue have a large number of load cycles which pro-
duce changes in stress in the affected fastening. These stresses result in
a decrease in strength, which is all the greater the larger the change in
stress and the larger the number of load cycles are (fatigue). When
evaluating actions causing fatigue, not only the type of action, but also
the planned or anticipated fastening life expectancy is of major impor-
tance.
Examples for Seismic Loads Generally, all fastenings in structures situated in seismically active areas can
be subject to seismic loading. However, due to cost considerations, usually
only critical fastenings whose failure would result in loss of human life or sig-
nificant weakening of the overall structure are designed for seismic loads.
13
Dynamics
Earthquakes / Ground movement during an earthquake / seismic tremors leads to rela-

seismic actions tive displacement of a building foundation. Owing to the inertia of its
mass, the building cannot or is unable to follow this movement without
deformation. Due to the stiffness of the structure, restoring forces are set
up and vibration is induced. This results in stress and strain for the struc-
ture, the parts fastened and the installations. Earthquake frequencies
often lead to resonance phenomena which cause larger vibration ampli-
1
tudes on the upper floors.
In view of the low ductility of anchors / fasteners, seismic loads generally

have to be taken up by a high loading capacity and very little deformation.
A fastening should be able to withstand design basis earthquakes without
damage. Determining the forces acting on a fastening is difficult and spe-
cialists thus provide them.
Examples of Shock Loading Shock loads are mostly unusual loading situations, even though some-
times they are the only loading case a structure is designed for (e.g.
crash barriers, protection nets, ship or aeroplane impacts and falling
rocks, avalanches and explosions, etc.).
Shock Shock-like phenomena have generally a very short duration and tremen-
dously high forces which, however, generally only occur as individual
peaks. As the probability of such a phenomenon to occur during the life
expectancy of the building components concerned is comparably small,
plastic deformations of fasteners and structural members are usually
permitted.
14
Dynamics
Material Behaviour
...under static loading The behaviour is described essentially by the strength (tensile and com-
pressive) and the elastic-plastic behaviour of the material. These proper-
ties are generally determined by carrying out simple tests with speci-
mens.
...under fatigue impact If a material is subjected to a sustained load that changes with respect to
time, it can fail after a certain number of load cycles even though the
upper limit of the load withstood up to this time is clearly lower than the
ultimate tensile strength under static loading. This loss of strength is re-
ferred to as material fatigue.
The grade and quality of steel has a considerable influence on the alter-
nating strength. In the case of structural and heat-treatable steels, the
final strength (i.e. after 2 million load cycles or more) is approx. 25-35%
of the static strength.
In the non-loaded state, concrete already has micro-cracks in the zone of

contact of the aggregates and the cement paste, which are attributable to
the aggregates hindering shrinkage of the cement paste. The fatigue
strength of concrete is directly dependent on the grade of concrete. Con-
crete strength is reduced to about 55 – 65% of the initial strength after
2'000'000 load cycles.
...under seismic or shock The material strength is not as much influenced as under fatigue impact.
impact Other factors, as inertia, cracks, etc. influence the behaviour much more.
15
Dynamics
Anchor Behavior
Fatigue When a large number of load cycles is involved, i.e. n>10 4, it is usually
the anchor in single fastenings that is critical (due to steel failure). The
concrete can only fail when an anchor is at a reduced anchorage depth
and subjected to tensile loading or an anchor is at a reduced distance
from an edge and exposed to shear loading.
1
Individual anchors in a multiple-anchor fastening can have a different
elastic stiffness and a displacement (slip) behaviour that differs from one
anchor to another, e.g. if an anchor is set in a crack. This leads to a re-
distribution of the forces in the anchors during the appearance of the load
cycles. Stiffer anchors are subjected to higher loads, whereas the loads
in the weaker anchors are reduced. Allowance is made for these two
effects by using a reduction factor for multiple-anchor fastenings.
Earthquakes Anchors (fasteners) subjected to seismic loading can, under circum-

stances, be stressed far beyond their static loading capacity. In view of
this, the respective suitability tests are carried out using a level of action
(loading) that is considerably higher than the working load level. The
behaviour of anchors under seismic action depends on the magnitude of
loading, the direction of loading, the base material and the type of an-
chor. After an earthquake, the loading capacity (ultimate state) of an an-
chor is considerably reduced (to 30 – 80% of the original resistance.)
With any earthquake design of fasteners, concrete cracks resulting from
seismic activity should be taken into consideration.
When designing anchor fastenings, it is important to remember that they

cannot be regarded as something isolated to take up seismic forces, but
that they must be incorporated in the overall context of a design.
Shock Load increase times in the range of milliseconds can be simulated during
tests on servo-hydraulic testing equipment. The following main effects can
then be observed:
• deformation is greater when the breaking load is reached.
• the energy absorbed by an anchor is also much higher.
• breaking loads are of roughly the same magnitude during static load-
ing and shock-loading tests.
In this respect, more recent investigations show that the base material
(cracked or non-cracked concrete), has no direct effect on the load-
bearing behaviour.
Suitability under fatigue Both mechanical and chemical anchors are basically suitable for fasten-
loading ings subjected to fatigue loading. Hilti manufactures the HDA and HVZ
anchors of special grades of steel resistant to fatigue and has also sub-
jected them to suitable tests.
Suitability under seismic Where fastenings subjected to seismic loading are concerned, chemical
loading anchors take preference. There are, however, accompanying require-
ments to be met, such as behaviour in a fire. These restrictions can make
mechanical systems preferable.
Suitability under shock load- To date, mechanical anchor systems have been used primarily for appli-
ing cations in civil defence installations. More recently, adhesive systems
suitable for use in cracked concrete have been developed, e.g. the HVZ
anchor.
16
Dynamic Set for Shear Resistance Upgrade
3.2 Upgrading shear resistance using the Dynamic Set

If a multiple-anchor fastening is loaded towards the edge of a concrete member (shear load), the gap
between anchor shaft and clearance hole has an important role. An uneven shear load distribution within
the anchors in the fastening is the result as the clearance hole is always larger than the anchor diameter
to ensure an easy installation. Design methods take this fact into account by assuming that only the row
of anchors nearest to the concrete edge takes up all the shear load.
row of load-bearing
edge of row of non load-bearing anchors
concrete
concrete failure surface
The second row of anchors can be activated only after a considerable slip of the anchoring plate. This
slip normally takes place after the edge failure of the outside row. The effect of the clearance hole gap
on the internal load distribution increases if the shear load direction changes during the service life. To
make anchors suitable for alternating shear loads, Hilti developed the so called Dynamic Set. This
consists of a special washer, which permits HIT injection adhesive to be dispensed into the clearance
hole, a spherical washer, a nut and a lock nut.
perspective plan view
injection washer spherical washer nut lock nut
By using the dynamic set for static fastenings, the shear resistance is improved significantly. The
unfavourable situation that only one row of anchors takes up all loads no longer exists and the load is
distributed uniformly among all anchors. A series of experiments has verified this assumption. An
example from this test programme, double fastenings with HVZ M10 anchors with and without the
Dynamic Set are shown to compare resulting shear resistance and stiffness.
17
Dynamic Set for Shear Resistance Upgrade
with Dynamic Set (extended Hilti method) injected
slotted hole
without Dynamic Set (ETAG)

standard
clearance hole
1
member edge
The test results show clearly that according to the current practice the second row of anchors takes up the load
only after significant deformation of the plate, when the concrete edge has already failed. The injection and the
Dynamic Set resulted in a continuous load increase until the whole multiple fastening fails.
When carrying out a simple fastening design, it may be assumed if the Dynamic Set is used the overall load
bearing capacity of the multiple fastening is equal to the resistance of the first row of anchors multiplied by the
number of rows in the fastening. If injection with the Dynamic Set is used, the ETAG restrictions on more than 6
anchor fastenings can be overcome.
Example:
Resistance to concrete edge failure of a nine (3x3) anchor plate (no other edges, no eccentricity, member
thickness ok, loading direction towards the edge):
c1
s1 V
s2
0 A c,V
ETAG: VRk,c VRk,c
A 0c,V
A c, V
Hilti (extended Hilti CC Method using the Dynamic Set): V inject. # 3 (V Rk,
0
c
)
Rk, c
A 0c, V
Improvements with Dynamic Set:
Injection washer:
Fills clearance hole and thus guarantees that the
load is uniformly distributed among all anchors.
Spherical washer:
Reduces bending moment acting on anchor shaft
not set at right angles and thus increases the
tensile loading capacity.
Lock nut:
Prevents loosening of the nut and thus lifting of
the anchoring plate away from the concrete in
case of cyclic loading.
18
Fire
4 Resistance to fire
Tested fasteners for passive structural fire prevention ˚C
1000˚
AU U. BRA
IVB fanstalt NDS
Tested according to the international
SS ialprü für
r
standard temperature curve
CH as Ba
F. Amtliche Mat A
M
500˚
e
d
UTZ uwesen AUN
STOFFE,
(ISO 834, DIN 4102 T.2)

D. TU BR
BAU
0˚
SC
HW
1
UT
30 60 90 120 Min
EIG INSTIT
Tested when set in cracked concrete
and exposed to flames without insulating
or protective measures.
F
Anchor / fastener Size Max. loading (kN) for specified fire resistance Report from IBMB /
time (fire resistance time in minutes) Technical
university of
F30 F60 F90 F120 F180 Brunswick, no.
HDA M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 1.00 0.70 3039 / 8151
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.20 1.00
M16 15.00 7.00 4.00 3.00 2.50
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00 3.70
HDA-F M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 1.00 0.70 3039 / 8151
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.20 1.00
M16 15.00 7.00 4.00 3.00 2.50
HDA-R M10 20.00 9.00 4.00 2.00 1.00 3039 / 8151
M12 30.00 12.00 5.00 3.00 2.10
M16 50.00 15.00 7.50 6.00 4.70
HSC-A M8x40, x50 1.50 3177 / 1722-1
M10x40 1.50
M12x60 3.50 2.00
HSC-I M8x40 1.50 3177 / 1722-1
M10x50, x60 2.50
M12x60 2.00
HSC-AR M8x40, x50 1.50 3177 / 1722-1
M10x40 1.50
M12x60 3.50 3.00
HSC-IR M8x40 1.50 3177 / 1722-1
M10x50, x60 2.50
M12x60 3.50 3.00
HSL M8 3.00 1.10 0.60 0.40 3027 / 0274-5
HSL-TZ M10 7.00 2.00 1.30 0.80
M12 10.00 3.50 2.00 1.20
M16 20.00 7.50 4.00 3.00
M20 34.60 14.00 7.00 5.00
M24 45.50 21.00 12.00 8.00
HSL-G-R M8 6.90 6.90 2.00 0.80 3027 / 0274-5
M10 10.40 10.40 4.00 2.00
M12 15.00 15.00 6.00 3.00
M16 25.70 20.00 8.00 6.00
M20 34.60 30.00 20.00 10.00
HST M8 1.50 0.80 0.50 0.40 3245 / 1817-3
M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 0.90
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.20
M16 15.00 5.00 4.00 3.00
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
M24 35.00 12.00 9.50 8.00
The max. loading given here applies only if the fastening maintains proper functioning in a fire. In the case of planning and
design, approvals and directives / guidelines specific to country or technical data in the Hilti fastening technology manual are
decisive.
19
Fire
university of
HST-R M8
M10
M12
12.00
20.00
30.00
5.00
9.00
12.00
1.80
4.00
5.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
3245 / 1817-3
1
M16 40.00 15.00 7.50 6.00
M20 60.00 35.00 15.00 10.00
M24 80.00 50.00 24.00 16.00
HST-HCR M8 12.00 5.00 1.80 1.00 3245 / 1817-3
M10 20.00 9.00 4.00 2.00
M12 30.00 12.00 5.00 3.00
M16 40.00 15.00 7.50 6.00
HSA M6 0.90 0.50 0.30 0.25 3049 / 8151
M8 1.50 0.80 0.50 0.40
M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 1.00
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.20
M16 15.00 7.00 4.00 3.00
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
HSA-R M6 2.60 1.30 0.80 0.60 3049 / 8151
M8 6.00 3.00 1.80 1.20
M10 9.50 4.75 3.00 2.50
M12 14.00 7.00 4.00 3.00
M16 26.00 13.00 7.50 6.00
HKD-S M6 2.00 1.00 0.40 0.30 3027 / 0274-4
HKD-SR M8 3.00 1.10 0.60 0.40
M10 5.00 2.00 1.30 0.80
HKD-E M12 8.50 3.50 2.00 1.20
M16 11.50 7.50 4.00 3.00
M20 18.80 14.00 7.00 5.00
HLC 6,5 (M5) 0.50 0.25 0.20 0.15 3304 / 1255-2
8 (M6) 0.50 0.25 0.20 0.15 3133 / 0856-2 (Mz)
10 (M8) 1.00 0.50 0.40 0.30 (solid sand-lime brick
12 (M10) 1.80 1.00 0.70 0.60 KSV, strength class
16 (M12) 3.00 1.70 1.20 1.00 *12/II)
20 (M16) 4.00 3.75 2.70 2.20
DBZ 6/45 0.80 0.40 0.25 0.15 3794 / 7949-1
6/35 0.80 0.40 0.25 0.15
HUS 7.5 1.20 0.70 0.50 0.40 3950 / 7261

(concrete -H 7.5 1.30 0.80 0.60 0.50
+ solid brick) -A 7.5 1.80 1.20 0.80 0.70
HUS 7,5
(light-weight -H 7.5 1.00 0.60 0.40 0.30
concrete) -A 7.5
HUS-H 10.5 7.00 2.65 1.50 1.00
(concrete) 12.5 9.00 3.30 1.80 1.20
HA8 R1 8 0.35 0.20 0.10 0.05 3245 / 1817-5
20
Fire
university of
HVU-TZ + M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 1.00 3357 / 0550-1
HAS-TZ M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.20
M16 15.00 7.00 4.00 3.00
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
HVU-TZ +HAS-RTZ M10 10.0 4.50 2.70 1.70 3357 / 0550-1
/ HCR-TZ M12 15.00 7.50 4.00 3.00
M16 20.00 11.50 7.50 6.00
M20 35.00 18.00 11.50 9.00
HVU + HAS M8 1.50 0.80 0.50 0.40 3245 / 1817-7
M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 0.90
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.00
M16 15.00 5.00 4.00 3.00
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
M24 35.00 12.00 9.50 8.00
M27 40.00 13.50 11.00 9.00
M30 50.00 17.00 14.00 11.00
M33 60.00 20.00 16.50 13.50
M36 70.00 24.00 19.50 16.00
M39 85.00 29.00 23.50 19.50
HVU + HAS-R M8 2.00 0.80 0.50 0.40 3245 / 1817-7
/ HCR M10 6.00 3.50 1.50 1.00
M12 13.00 9.00 5.00 3.00
M16 20.00 13.50 7.50 6.00
M20 36.00 25.50 15.00 10.00
M24 56.00 38.00 24.00 16.00
M27 65.00 44.00 27.00 18.00
M30 85.00 58.00 36.00 24.00
M33 100.00 68.00 42.00 28.00
M36 120.00 82.00 51.00 34.00
M39 140.00 96.00 60.00 40.00
HVU + HIS-N M8 1.50 0.80 0.50 0.40 3245 / 1817-7
M10 4.50 2.20 1.30 0.90
M12 10.00 3.50 1.80 1.00
M16 15.00 5.00 4.00 3.00
M20 25.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
HVU + HIS-RN M8 10.00 5.00 1.80 1.00 3245 / 1817-7
M10 20.00 9.00 4.00 2.00
M12 30.00 12.00 5.00 3.00
M16 50.00 15.00 7.50 6.00
M20 65.00 35.00 15.00 10.00
Hilti HIT-HY 20 + HIT-AN/ANR M8 1.50 0.50 0.20 3357 / 0550-4
M10 1.50 0.50 0.20
M12 1.50 0.50 0.20
Hilti HIT-HY 50 + M8 1.90 0.70 0.30 0.10 3357 / 0550-3

HIT-AN/ANR M10 2.50 0.80 0.30 0.10
M12 2.50 0.80 0.30 0.10
+ HAS / HAS-R M8 1.40 0.60 0.30
M10 1.40 0.60 0.30
M12 2.50 2.50 1.60 0.90
21
Fire
university of
Hilti HIT-HY 150 + HAS M8
M10
M12
2.70
3.60
6.00
1.10
1.90
3.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
0.40
0.60
1.20
3027 / 0274-6
1
M16 7.00 5.00 3.20 2.00
M20 12.50 10.00 7.00 5.00
M24 16.00 12.50 10.00 8.00
Hilti HIT-HY 150 + HAS-R M8 2.70 1.30 0.50 0.40 3027 / 0274-6
M10 3.60 1.90 1.00 0.60
M12 6.00 4.60 3.20 2.00
M16 7.00 5.00 3.20 2.00
M20 12.50 10.00 8.00 6.50
M24 16.00 12.50 10.00 8.50
Hilti HIT-HY 150 + Rebar Loads dependent on reinforcing bars and concrete coverage / 3162 / 6989
overlay 0.5 – 1.5 x Frec to F180 DIBt approval
Z-21.8 - 1648
Hilti HIT-HY 150 + HIT-TZ M8 1.90 0.50 0.25 0.15

M10 6.00 1.10 0.40 0.20
M12 9.00 2.50 1.20 0.70 3256 / 0321
M16 17.00 6.50 3.70 2.50
M20 20.00 11.50 7.70 6.00
˚C
Tested fasteners for passive structural fire prevention
1200˚
AU U. BRA
IVB fanstalt NDS
Tested according to the german 800˚
SS ialprü für
r
tunnel temperature curve
CH as Ba
F. Amtliche Mat A
M
e
d
UTZ uwesen AUN
STOFFE,
400˚
(ZTV-tunnel, part 1))
D. TU BR
0˚
BAU
SC 1
30 60 90 120 Min
HW UT
EIG INSTIT
Tested when set in cracked concrete
and exposed to flames without insulating
or protective measures.
F
Anchor / fastener Size Max. loading (kN) for specified Report from IBMB /
fire rating/integrity Technical
university of
Brunswick, no.
HVU-TZ+ M10 1.50 Additional report to
HAS-HCR-TZ M12 2.50 3357 / 0550-2
M16 6.00
M20 8.00
HVU+ M8 0.50 Additional report to
HAS-HCR M10 1.50 3245/ 1817-2
M12 1.50
M16 5.00
HST-HCR M8 1.00 Additional report to
M10 1.50 3245 / 1817-3
M12 2.50
M16 6.00
HKD-SR M8 0.50 Additional report to
M10 0.80 3027 / 0274-4
M12 2.50
M16 5.00
M20 6.00
22
Approvals
5. Approvals
Germany
Anchor Description Authority / No. / Languages

type Laboratory Date g e f
HDA-T, Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0009 x x x
HDA-P (Valid until: 06.10.2004) 06.10.1999
HDA-R, Self-undercutting anchor made of stainless steel CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0016 x x
(Valid until: 05.07.2007) 05.07.2002
HDA Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-1696 x x
for unusual actions (loads) 05.01.2001
(Valid until: 28.02.2006)
HDA- Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-1693 x
Dynamic for dynamic loads (Valid until: 30.09.2006) 04.09.2001
HSC Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0027 x x x
(Valid until: 20.09.2007) 20.09.2002
HSC-R Self-undercutting anchor made of stainless steel CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0028 x x x
(Valid until: 20.09.2007) 20.09.2002
HSL-3 Torque controlled expansion anchor of galvanised CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0042 x x
steel 09.01.2003
HST Expansion stud anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin ETA-98/0001 x x x
(Valid until: 18.02.2003) 16.04.2002
HST-R Expansion stud anchor made of stainless steel DIBt, Berlin ETA-98/0002 x x x
(Valid until: 18.02.2003) 16.04.2002
HST-HCR Expansion stud anchor made of highly corrosion DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-1664 x
resistant stainless steel 26.07.1999
HSA Expansion stud anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0001 x x x
(Valid until: 28.09.2005) 15.03.2004
HSA-R Expansion stud anchor made of stainless steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0008 x x x
(Valid until: 01.08.2005) 01.03.2004
HKD-S/-E Deformation controlled expansion anchor made of CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0032 x x x
galvanised steel 17.10.2002
HKD-SR/- Deformation controlled expansion anchor made of CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0033 x x x
ER stainless steel 17.10.2002
DBZ 6 Wedge anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-188 x
(Valid until: 28.02.2007) 01.02.1997
HA 8-R1 Ring anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-88 x
(Valid until: 31.12.2003) 01.12.1998
HUS –H Screw anchor made of carbon steel, deltatone DIBt, Berlin Z-21.1-1712 x
10.5/12.5 coated (Valid until: 30.06.2006) 26.06.2001
HUS,-H/-A Screw anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin Z-21.11-1133 x

7,5 (Valid until: 31.07.2002) 31.07.1997
HRD Frame anchor made of polyamide, screw made of DIBt, Berlin Z-21.2-599 x
galvanised or stainless steel 23.07.1999
23
Approvals

type Laboratory Date g e f sw
HVA-HAS- Adhesive anchor, rod made of galvanised or DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1578 x
TZ/-RTZ
HVZ-
stainless steel
Adhesive anchor, rod made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin
21.12.1998
Z-21.3-1692 x
1
Dynamic (Valid until: 31.10.2006) 16.10.2001
HIT-TZ/- Injection adhesive anchor, rod made of DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1714 x
RTZ galvanised or stainless steel 09.08.2001
M8-M12 (Valid until: 31.08.2006)
HIT-TZ/- Injection adhesive anchor, rod made of DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1720 x

RTZ galvanised or stainless steel 09.08.2001
M16-M20 (Valid until: 31.08.2006)
HVA-HAS/ Adhesive anchor, rod made of galvanised, DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1522 x

-R / -HCR stainless or highly corrosion resistant stainless 17.08.2001
steel (Valid until: 31.08.2006)
HVA-HIS-N/ Adhesive anchor, sleeve made of galvanised or DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1650 x
-RN stainless steel 01.10.1998
HIT-HY 20, Injection adhesive, with HIT-A galvanised or DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-399 x
HIT-HY 50 stainless steel rod or HIT-AN galvanised steel rod 01.08.2000
or HIT-IG galvanised sleeve for hollow brick
HIT-HY 50 Injection adhesive, with HAS M10 and M12 DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1586 x
galvanised or stainless steel rod for lightweight 19.05.1999
concrete
HIT-HY 50 Injection adhesive, with HAS (-E) galvanised, DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1736 x
stainless steel or highly corrosion resistant steel 27.08.2002
rod for solid brick
HIT-HY 150 Injection adhesive for reinforcing bar connections DIBt, Berlin Z-21.8-1648 x
(Valid until: 31.08.2005) 07.02.2000
HIT-C 100 Injection adhesive or stainless steel rod for DIBt, Berlin Z-21.3-1131 x
securing of brick veneer / cladding 02.09.1999
HWB Adhesive anchor made of stainless steel for DIBt, Berlin Z-21.8-1018 x
securing facade panels 02.08.2002
24
Approvals
Switzerland

type Laboratory Date d e f
HST, Stud expansion anchor made of galvanised or DIBt, Berlin ETA-98/0001 x x x
HST-R stainless steel ETA-98/0002
(Valid until: 18.02.2003) 18.02.1998
HSA Stud expansion anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0001 x x x
(Valid until: 15.03.2004) 15.03.2004
HDA-T, Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0009 x x x
HDA-P (Valid until: 06.10.2004) 06.10.1999
HSC-I(R), Safety anchor for shockproof fastenings in civil Bundesamt für BZS D 00-233 x x
HSC-A(R) defence installations Zivilschutz, Bern 18.08.1995
HSL-TZ, Heavy-duty anchor for shockproof fastenings in Bundesamt für BZS D 96-203 x x
-B-TZ, civil defence installations Zivilschutz, Bern 16.04.1996
-G-TZ (Valid until: 28.2.2001)
HST, Stud anchor for shockproof fastenings in civil Bundesamt für BZS D 97-232 x x
HST-R defence installations Zivilschutz, Bern 03.09.1997
HDA-T, Undercut anchor for shockproof fastenings in civil Bundesamt für BZS D 99-212 x x
HDA-P defence installations Zivilschutz, Bern 18.10.1999
HVZ Adhesive anchor for tensile zone
HAS-TZ (Valid until: 31.12.2004) Bundesamt für BZS D 99-252
HAS-RTZ Zivilschutz, Bern
France
type Laboratory Date d e f
HDA-T, Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ATE-99/0009 x x x
HDA-P (Valid until: 06.10.2004) 06.10.1999
HST Stud expansion anchor made of galvanised steel DIBt, Berlin ATE-98/0001 x x x
(Valid until: 18.02.2003) 18.02.1998
HST-R Stud expansion anchor made of stainless steel DIBt, Berlin ATE-98/0002 x x x
(Valid until: 18.02.2003) 13.042000
HSC-I(R), Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised or SOCOTEC, Paris VX 1034/2 x
HSC-A(R) stainless steel 28.02.2000
HSL-3 Torque controlled expansion anchor of galvanised CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0042 x x
steel 09.01.2003
HKD-S/-E Deformation controlled expansion anchor made of CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0032 x x
HKD-SR/- Deformation controlled expansion anchor made of CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0033 x x x
ER stainless steel 17.10.2002
HSA-K/-KR Stud expansion anchor made of galvanised steel SOCOTEC, Paris GX 1450 x
(Valid until: 31.01.2003) 31.01.2000
25
Approvals

HSA Expansion stud anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0001 x x x
HSA-R
Expansion stud anchor made of stainless steel
CSTB, Paris
15.03.2004
ETA-99/0008
01.03.2004
x x x 1
HSC Self-undercutting anchor made of galvanised steel CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0027 x x x
(Valid until: 20.09.2007) 20.09.2002
HSC-R Self-undercutting anchor made of stainless steel CSTB, Paris ETA-02/0028 x x x
(Valid until: 20.09.2007) 20.09.2002
HPS-1 Impact anchor made of Polyamide, nail made of SOCOTEC, Paris CX 5217 x
HUS-H Screw anchor made of carbon steel, deltatone CSTB, Paris Anné à l’ATEX x
10.5/12.5 coated (Valid until: 30.06.2006) No. 1057
HLC Sleeve anchor made of galvanised steel SOCOTEC, Paris EX 4228/2 x

(Valid until: 31.10.2003) 01.11.2000
HVU-HAS/ Adhesive anchor, rod made of galvanised, SOCOTEC, Paris EX 4230 x
-R/-HCR, stainless or highly corrosion resistant stainless 31.12.1999
HVU-HIS-N/ steel, sleeve made of galvanised or stainless steel
-RN (Valid until: 31.12.2002)
HIT-HY 20 Injection adhesive with HIT-A galvanised or SOCOTEC, Paris DX 1453/2 x
stainless steel rod and HIT-IG galvanised sleeve 01.09.2000
for hollow brick
HIT-HY 150 Injection adhesive, rod made of galvanised, SOCOTEC, Paris EX 4229 x
with HAS/ stainless or highly corrosion resistant stainless 31.01.2000
-R/-HCR/- steel, sleeve made of galvanised or stainless steel
E/-EF/-ER, (Valid until: 31.01.2003)
HVA-HIS-N/
-RN
HIT-HY 150 Injection adhesive for reinforcing bar connections SOCOTEC, Paris BX 1032 x
(Valid until: 01.12.2000; 01.12.1997
prolongation until 01.07.2001)
HIT-RE 500 Injection adhesive for reinforcing bar connections SOCOTEC, Paris KX 0839 x
(Valid until: 31.12.2003) 0.1.01.2001
Sweden

type Laboratory date g e f sw
HVU Kemiskt ankare med ankarstång HAS och SITAC 4569/86 x
invändig gängad hylsa HIS-N i betong och 03.09.1998
natursten.
(Gäller t o m: 03.09.2003)
HIT-HY Injekteringsmassa med ankarstång HAS (5.8, A2 SITAC 0089/98 x
och A4,) för montage i betong. 25.08.99
HST Expanderskruv för användning i betong. DIBT, Berlin ETA-98/001 x x x x
HST-R (Gäller t o m: 02.18.2003) ETA-98/002
18.02.1998
HDA-T Hakankare (genomticksmontage) i betong. CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0009 x x x x
HDA-P (Gäller t o m: 06.10.2004) 06.10.1999
HSA Expanderskruv ( elförzinkad). CSTB, Paris ETA-99/0001 x x x x
(Gäller t o m: 15.03.2004) 15.03.1999
26
Approvals
USA
HSL Evaluation report of Hilti HSL and HSL metric ICBO 3987 x
heavy-duty concrete anchors SBCCI 9930
COLA 25290
HIT C-100 Evaluation report of Hilti HIT HY-150 Adhesive ICBO 4016 x
Anchor For Solid Base
Kwik-Bolt II Evaluation report of Hilti Kwik-Bolt II stud-type ICBO 4627 x
expansion concrete anchor SBCCI 9930
COLA 25226
UL Listed
FM Approved
DADE 98-0901.13
HDI Evaluation report of Hilti HDI impact expansion ICBO 2895 x
concrete anchor SBCCI 9930
COLA 23709
UL Listed
FM Approved
HVA Evaluation report of Hilti HVA adhesive anchor ICBO 5369 x
SBCCI 9930
COLA 25363
NSF Approved
HIT-HY 20 Evaluation report of Hilti HIT-HY 20 adhesive ICBO 4815 x

anchor for masonry construction with voids SBCCI 9930
COLA 24564
HIT-HY Evaluation report of Hilti HIT-HY 150 adhesive ICBO 5193 x
150 anchor for solid base material SBCCI 9930
COLA 25257
HSE2421 Evaluation Report of Hilti HSE 2421 Adhesive ICBO 5605 x
Anchor For Solid Base Materials COLA 25408 x
HDA-T Evaluation Report of Hilti HDA ICBO 5608 x
HDA-P
HDI-P Short HDI for Hollow Core Applications ICBO 5264 x
COLA 25350 x
FM Approved x
HCKB Evaluation report of Hilti HCKB ceiling anchor ICBO 5224 x
COLA 25291
HIT-RE- Evaluation report of Hilti HIT-RE-500 adhesive ICBO 6010 x
500 anchor for normal weight concrete
27
Anchor Design
6. Anchor design
6.1 Safety concept
This Fastening Technology Manual uses two different safety concepts:
J J Q
1
Partial safety factor concept, JM, JF Global safety factor concept, Q
The partial safety factor concept is valid for all The global safety factor concept is valid for the
versions of the following anchors: following anchors:
HDA, HSC, HSL-3, HST, HSA, HKD, HLC, IDP, IZ, IN, IDMS, IDMR, HRA, HRC, HRT, HWB
HHD-S, DBZ, HA 8, HUS, HRD, HPS-1, HUD-1,
HUD-L, HGN, HLD, HSP, HVZ, HVA, HVA-UW,
HIT-HY 150,HIT-ICE, HIT-HY 50, HIT-HY 20,
HIT-RE 500
Ru,m mean ultimate Resistance Ru,m mean ultimate Resistance
1 k v 1)
1 k v 1)
Rk characteristic Resistance Rk characteristic Resistance

1

JM
Q
R d design Resistance
J F d R d 1

JF
S actual load Rrec Recommended load Rrec Recommended load
The safety concept, which uses the global safety factor, is being increasingly replaced by the partial safety factor
concept. One important feature of this partial safety factor concept is the strict separation of the
partial safety factors for the applied loads

and the
partial safety factors for the resistance of the fastening to these loads
Partial safety factors for loads are intended to cover uncertainties and scatter where loads are concerned. Partial
safety factors for resistance covers uncertainties and the scatter pertaining to the resistance, i.e. the load
bearing capacity of the fastening.
1)
k, depends on the number of tests,
v, coefficient of variation.
28
Anchor Design
6.2 Design methods

When top-quality medium and heavy-duty fastenings have to be made in concrete, it is often necessary
for them to be sized in accordance with standard engineering practice to make sure that not only the
anchor fastening design is optimally utilised, but also that the required level of safety is guaranteed.
The current international state of the art regarding the design of fastenings [1], the so called concrete
capacity method (CC-Method) was used as the basis for this product information. This design method was
simplified to retain as much as possible of the previous design method, while including as much of the
latest approach as possible.
The main features of the new design method are:
x Differentiation between failure modes: pull-out/concrete or steel failure.

The different failure modes, which occur when the anchor is loaded to failure are treated separately.
x Differentiation of the safety factors based on different failure modes.
How these features are used in the actual fastening design is shown on page 30 and 31.
The benefits of this approach are:

x The new method reflects the actual anchor behaviour in a more accurate fashion. Thus leading to
higher loads in certain applications.
x The differentiation between failure modes allows more flexibility with regard to the steel elements
without having to perform a new design calculation.
x The data given are in conformance with upcoming design codes such as the design method according
to ETAG Annex C or ACI 318 chapter 22 (or see Ref. [1]).
The anchors for which this design method is used are:

HDA, HSL-3, HSC, HKD, HST, HSA, HVZ, HIT-TZ, HVA, HVA-UW, HIT-HY 150, HIT-ICE, HIT-RE 500
The anchors for light-duty (HLC, DBZ, HA8, HHD, HLD, HPS-1, HRD, HUD, HGN, HUS-S, HSP, IN, IDP,
IDMS, IDMR, IZ, HIT-HY 50, HIT-HY 20) as well as the anchors for special applications (HRC, HRT, HRA,
HWB) are used with the anchor fastening being designed, only on a very simple basis. The load values
are based on test results, made in mainly inhomogeneous base materials and under special conditions.
[1] Comité Euro-International du Béton, Design of Fastenings in concrete: Design Guide - Parts 1 to 3,
Bulletin 233, Thomas Telford Publishing, January 1997.
29
Anchor Design
6.2.1 New design method

Tensile resistance:
Three failure modes can appear in this load direction, namely pull-out failure, concrete failure and failure
of the steel element. The following chart shows the flow of required calculations:
Pull-out failure Concrete failure Steel failure

1
0 0 NRd,s , design tensile
NRd,p basic value of design NRd,c basic value of design
resistance resistance resistance of steel
fB,N concrete strength fB,N concrete strength

influencing factor influencing factor
fT anchorage depth fT anchorage depth

influencing factor influencing factor
Final design resistance fA,N anchor spacing

against pull-out failure: influencing factor
0
NRd,p NRd ,p f B,N f T
fR,N edge distance

influencing factor
Final design resistance against

concrete failure:
0
NRd,c NRd ,c fB,N fT fA,N fR,N
Final design tensile resistance:

NRd ^
min NRd,p ; NRd,c ; NRd,s `
Safety check:
NSd d NRd
NSd design value of applied

tensile loads
30
Anchor Design
Shear resistance:
A distinction is made between two failure modes with this type (direction) of loading, namely concrete
edge failure, i. e. breaking away of the concrete component edge and the shear failure of the steel
element. The following chart shows the flow of required calculations:
Concrete edge failure Steel failure
0 VRd,s , design tensile resistance of steel

VRd,c basic value of design resistance
fB, V concrete strength influencing

factor
fAR, V anchor spacing and edge

distance influence factor
fE, V influencing factor for direction of

loading
Final design resistance to concrete

failure:
0
VRd,c VRd,c fB, V f AR, V fE, V
Rec. load:
VRd min^ VRd,c ; VRd,s `
Safety check:
VSd d VRd
VSd design value of applied shear

loads
31
Anchor Design
Combined load:
If there are combinations of tensile and shear loads, i. e. loads under an angle D with respect to the
anchor axis, the design check is given by:
FSd D d FRd D
1
The design action, FSd, at an angle D is given by:
2 2 Sd Sd
FSd N Sd VSd
§V ·
D arctan ¨¨ Sd ¸¸
© NSd ¹ Sd
Where
NSd = tensile component

VSd = shear component
The design resistance (loading capacity), FRd ,at an angle D is given by:
2
§ § cos D ·1.5 § sin D ·1.5 · 3
¨¨ ¸ ¨ ¸ ¸
FRd ¨¨ ¨ N ¸ ¨ V ¸ ¸¸
© © Rd ¹ © Rd ¹
¹
Where
NRd = design resistance for pure tension

VRd = design resistance for pure shear
as calculated previously
32
33
Contents
2
Mechanical anchoring systems
Heavy duty anchors
HDA-T/-TR/-TF/-P/-PR/-PF
HSL-3 heavy duty anchor
35
46
2
Medium duty anchors
HSC-A(R)/I(R) safety anchor 55
HST/-R/-HCR stud anchor 65
HSA/HSA-R/HSA-F stud anchor 74
HLC sleeve anchor 85
HKD-S/-SR/-E/-ER flush anchor 87
HUS-H screw anchor 95
Light duty anchors
HUD-1 universal anchor 103
HUD-L universal anchor 106
HGN gas concrete anchor 109
HLD light duty anchor 112
HRD-U/-S frame anchor 114
HPS-1 impact anchor 118
HUS screw anchor 121
HHD-S cavity anchor 125
DBZ wedge anchor 129
HA 8 ring/hook anchor 131
HSP/HFP drywall plug 133
Light duty anchors (Insulation fasteners)
IDP insulation fastener 135
IZ expandable insulation fastener 137
IN insulation fastener 139
IDMS/IDMR metal insulation fastener 141
34
HDA design anchor
Features:
- keying hold
- complete system
- low expansion force (thus small edge distance / HDA-P/-PR/-PF anchor for pre-setting
spacing)
- automatic undercutting (without special undercutting
tool)
- setting mark on anchor for control (easy and safe)
HDA-T/-TR/-TF anchor for through-fastening
- suitable for tension zone
- performance of a headed stud
- test reports: fire resistance, fatigue, shock, seismic
- completely removable
- HDA-T/-TR/-TF: through-fastening Concrete Tension zone Fatigue Shock Seismic
- HDA-P/-PR/-PF: pre-setting
Material:
HDA-T/-P: - cold-formed steel, grade 8.8, galvanised min. 5Pm
- stainless steel, A4-80 grade; 1.4401, 1.4571, 1.4404 Close edge Performance of Fire resistance
HDA-TR/-PR distance/ a headed stud (F 180)
Hilti Anchor Nuclear power
programme plant approval
(SS 316, SS 316 Ti) spacing
- carbon steel, sherardised 53 Pm

HDA-TF/-PF
according to ASTM A153 CL.C draft DIN EN 13811
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HDA-P/-PF
All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 41– 45.
x concrete: as specified in the table
x no edge distance, spacing and other influences
x correct setting (See setting operations page 39)
x steel failure
non-cracked concrete cracked concrete
Mean ultimate resistance, Ru,m [kN]: concrete # C20/25

1) 1)
Anchor size M10 M12 M16 M20 M10 M12 M16 M20
Tensile NRum,s 48.5 70.5 130.9 204.1 48.5 70.5 130.9 204.1
Shear VRum,s 28.4 38.5 74.5 111.1 26.4 37.3 77.7 105.6
Characteristic resistance, Rk [kN]: concrete # C20/25

1) 1)
Tensile NRk,s 46.0 67.0 126.0 199.6 25.0 35.0 75.0 95.1
Shear VRk,s 22.0 30.0 62.0 98.0 22.0 30.0 62.0 98.0
Following values according to the:
Concrete Capacity Method
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete fck,cube = 25 N/mm2

1) 1)
Tensile NRd 30.7 44.7 84.0 127.6 16.7 23.3 50.0 63.4
Shear VRd 17.6 24.0 49.6 78.4 17.6 24.0 49.6 78.4
Recommended load, Lrec [kN]:

1) 1)
Tensile NRec 21.9 31.9 60.0 91.1 11.9 16.7 35.7 45.3
Shear VRec 12.6 17.1 35.4 56.0 12.6 17.1 35.4 56.0
1) M20 version is only available galvanised 5 Pm.
35
HDA design anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HDA-T/-TF

All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 41-45.
x for M10 – M12: tfix = 10mm
for M16: tfix = 14mm
x steel failure

Anchor size M10 M12 M16 M20
1)
M10 M12 M16 M20
1)
2
Tensile NRum,s 48.5 70.5 130.9 204,1 48.5 70.5 130.9 204,1
Shear VRum,s 74.8 93.9 165.7 275,3 71.8 88.3 153.2 257,3

1) 1)
Tensile NRk,s 46.0 67.0 126.0 199.6 25.0 35.0 75.0 95.1
Shear VRk,s 65.0 80.0 140.0 210.0 65.0 80.0 140.0 210.0

1) 1)
Tensile NRd 30.7 44.7 84.0 127.6 16.7 23.3 50.0 63.4
Shear VRd 43.3 53.3 93.3 140.0 43.3 53.3 93.3 140.0
Recommended load, Lrec [kN]: concrete fck,cube = 25 N/mm2

1) 1)
Tensile NRec 21.9 31.9 60,0 91.1 11.9 16.7 35.7 45.3
Shear VRec 30.9 38.1 66.6 100.0 30.9 38.1 66.6 100.0
1)
M20 version is only available galvanised 5 Pm.
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HDA-PR

All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 41 – 45.
x for M10 – M12: tfix = 10mm;
x steel failure

Anchor size M10 M12 M16 M10 M12 M16
Tensile NRum,s 49.1 68.7 127.9 49.1 68.7 127.9
Shear VRum,s 28.4 38.5 74.5 26.4 37.3 77.7
36
HDA design anchor

Tensile NRk,s 46.0 67.0 126.0 25.0 35.0 75.0
Shear VRk,s 23.0 34.0 63.0 23.0 34.0 63.0

Tensile NRd 28.8 41.9 78.8 16.7 23.3 50.0
Shear VRd 17.3 25.6 47.4 17.3 25.6 47.4

Tensile NRec 20.5 29.9 56.3 11.9 16.7 35.7
Shear VRec 12.4 18.3 33.9 12.4 18.3 33.9
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HDA-TR

All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 41– 45.
x for M10 – M12: tfix = 10mm
x correct setting (See setting operations page 39.)
x steel failure

Tensile NRum.s 49.1 68.7 127.9 49.1 68.7 127.9
Shear VRum.s 74.8 93.9 165.7 71.8 88.3 153.2
Characteristic resistance. Rk [kN]: concrete # C20/25

Tensile NRk.s 46.0 67.0 126.0 25.0 35.0 75.0
Shear VRk.s 71.0 87.0 152.0 71.0 87.0 152.0
Design resistance. Rd [kN]: concrete fck.cube = 25 N/mm2

Tensile NRd 28.8 41.9 78.8 16.7 23.3 50.0
Shear VRd 53.4 65.4 114.6 53.4 65.4 114.6
Recommended load. Lrec [kN]: concrete fck.cube = 25 N/mm2

Tensile NRec 20.5 29.9 56.3 11.9 16.7 35.7
Shear VRec 38.1 46.7 81.8 38.1 46.7 81.8
37
HDA design anchor
Setting details
l l
Marking
f
d
d
h ef t fix h ef t fix
hmin hmin
HDA-T/-TR/-TF HDA-P/-PR/-PF
Anchor size
20- 22- 22- 30- 30- 37- 37-
M10x100/20 M12x125/30 M12x125/50 M16x190/40 M16x190/60 M20x250/50 M20x250/100
2
HDA-T/-TR/-TF. HDA-P/-PR/-PF:
Head marking I L N R S V X
l [mm] Total anchor length 150 190 210 275 295 360 410
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base 170 190 190 270 270 380 380
material
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 100 125 125 190 190 250 250
Fixture (fastenable) min. 10 10 10 15 15 20 20
t fix [mm]
thickness for HDA-T- max. 20 30 50 40 60 50 100
Fixture (fastenable)
t fix [mm] max. 20 30 50 40 60 50 100
thickness for HDA-P-
HDA-T- 21 23 23 32 32 40 40
df [mm] Clearance hole
HDA-P- 12 14 14 18 18 22 22
dw [mm] Washer diameter 27.5 33.5 33.5 45.5 45.5 50 50
Sw [mm] Width across flats 17 19 19 24 24 30 30
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 50 80 80 120 120 300 300
Nominal of drill bit 20 22 30 30 30 37 37
d0 [mm]
Hilti stop drill bits have to be used
Installation equipment
Drilling system:
Anchor size 20-M10x100/20 22-M12x125/30 22-M12x125/50 30-M16x190/40 30-M16x190/60

for galvanised: for sheradised for stainless: For all material types
Drilling system for anchor setting as TE24/25/35 TE 35 TE 24/25/35 TE75, TE76
given or equivalent Max. hammering power
See instructions first gear
for use
1)
Single impact energy [J] 3.7 – 4.7 3.8 3.7 – 4.7 7.0 – 9.0
1)
Speed under load [1/min] 250 - 500 620 250 -620 150 - 350
Anchor size 37-M20x250/50 37-M20x250/100

For all material types
Drilling system for anchor setting as
given or equivalent TE76
Max. hammering power
1)
Single impact energy [J] 7.0 – 8.3
1)
Speed under load [1/min] 280
1)
The load capacity of anchors could be decreased by using hammer drills with a different impact energy and speed. The Hilti Corporation
accepts no liability in case of contravention.
The TE hammer drills have to be used in order to assure a safe fastening.
38
HDA design anchor
Setting system:
Anchor size 20-M10x100/20 22-M12x125/30 22-M12x125/50 30-M16x190/40 30-M16x190/60

Stop drill bit for HDA-T/-TR/-TF TE- C-HDA-B 20x120 C-HDA-B 22x155 C-HDA-B 22x175 Y-HDA-B 30x230 Y-HDA-B 30x250
Stop drill bit for HDA-P/-PR/-PF TE- C-HDA-B 20x100 C-HDA-B 22x125 C-HDA-B 22x125 Y-HDA-B 30x190 Y-HDA-B 30x190
Setting tool TE- C-HDA-ST 20-M10 C-HDA-ST 22-M12 C-HDA-ST 22-M12 Y-HDA-ST 30-M16 Y-HDA-ST 30-M16
Anchor size 37-M20x250/50 37-M20x250/100

Stop drill bit for HDA-T TE- Y-HDA-B 37x300 Y-HDA-B 37x350
Stop drill bit for HDA-P TE- Y-HDA-B 37x250 Y-HDA-B 37x250
Setting tool TE- Y-HDA-ST 37-M20 Y-HDA-ST 37-M20
Stop drill bit (See table above.) Setting tool (See table above.)
Setting operations
HDA-T/-TR/-TF

Drill hole with stop drill bit.

Blow out dust and fragments.

Expand anchor with setting tool in a

hammer drill.

1. Check setting: Setting mark on setting 2. Check setting: Setting mark on anchor Secure part being fastened
tool must be flush with surface of part rod must be visible!
fastened.
HDA-P/-PR/-PF

Drill hole with stop drill bit.

Blow out dust and fragments. Expand anchor with setting tool in a

hammer drill.

2. Check setting: Setting mark on anchor Secure part being fastened.
1. Check setting: Setting mark on setting
tool must be flush with concrete surface. rod must be visible.
39
HDA design anchor
Mechanical properties of anchor bolt

2)
HDA-P/-PF
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 58 84.3 157 245
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile strength 800 800 800 800
2
f yk [N/mm ] Yield strength 640 640 640 640
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 62.3 109.2 277.5 540.9
1)
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending moment 34.2 59.9 152.2 296.7
2)
2
HDA-T/-TF
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 58 84.3 157 245
2
2
f yk [N/mm ] Yield strength 640 640 640 640
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 610 810 2170 3760
1)
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending moment 334 445 1200 2070
Anchor size M10 M12 M16

HDA-PR
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 58.0 84.3 157
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile strength 800 800 800
2
f yk [N/mm ] Yield strength 600 600 600
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 62.3 109.2 277.5
1)
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending moment 32.2 56.4 142.9
Anchor size M10 M12 M16

HDA-TR
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 58.0 84.3 157
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile strength 800 800 800
2
f yk [N/mm ] Yield strength 600 600 600
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 610 810 2170
1)
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending moment 315 420 1120
1) The recommended bending moment of the HDA anchor bolt is calculated from Mrec MRd, s / J F 1.2 Wel fuk / J Ms J F , where the
partial safety factor for bolts of grade 8.8 is JMs 1.25 . for A4-80 equal to 1.33 and the partial safety factor for action is taken as
JF 1.4 .
2) M20 version is only available galvanised 5 Pm.
40
HDA design anchor
Detailed design method - Hilti CC

(The Hilti CC-Method is a simplified Version of ETAG Annex C)
N rec,p/c/s
TENSION
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor is s
c
the lower of:
h
NRd,p : concrete pull-out resistance
(only in cracked concrete)
NRd,c : concrete cone resistance
NRd,s : steel resistance
NRd,p : Pull-out resistance (only for cracked concrete)
o
NRd,p NRd,p fB
N0Rd,p1) : Design pull-out resistance
x Concrete compressive strength, fck,cube(150) = 25 N/mm2

2)
0
N Rd,p [kN] for cracked concrete 16.7 23.3 50.0 63.4
1)
The initial value of the tensile design load to resist pull out is calculated from N°Rd,p=N°Rk,p/JMc, where the partial safety factor
for concrete is JMc=1.5 . The load values apply to a constant load. The displacement is smaller then d95% d 3 mm
after 1000 crack opening and closing cycles (w = 0.3 mm).
2)
NRd,c : Concrete cone resistance
o
NRd,c NRd,c f B f A,N f R,N
N0Rd,c: Design concrete cone resistance

x Concrete compressive strength. fck.cube(150) = 25 N/mm2
2)
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] for cracked concrete w = 0.3mm 27.7 38.7 72.4 109.4
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] for non-cracked concrete 38.7 54.1 101.4 153.1
1)
The value of the tensile design load to resist concrete cone is calculated from N°Rd,c=N°Rk,c/JMc, where the partial safety
factor for concrete is JMc=1.5.
2)
41
HDA design anchor
fB : Influence of concrete strength

Concrete strength Cylinder compressive Cube compressive
designation strength strength
(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²]
fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1 fB
C25/30 25 30 1.1 25
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C40/50 40 50 1.41 25 N/mm2 d fck.cube d 60 N/mm2
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Concrete cylinder: Concrete cube:
height 30cm. 15cm side length 15cm
diameter
2
Concrete test specimen geometry
f A ,N : Influence of anchor spacing fR ,N : Influence of edge distance

Anchor spacing. Anchor size Edge distance. Anchor size
s [mm] M10 M12 M16 M20 c [mm] M10 M12 M16 M20
100 0.67 80 0.66
125 0.71 0.67 100 0.76 0.66
150 0.75 0.70 120 0.86 0.74
190 0.82 0.75 0.67 140 0.96 0.82
200 0.83 0.77 0.68 150 1.00 0.87 0.66
250 0.92 0.83 0.72 0.67 160 0.90 0.68
300 1.00 0.90 0.76 0.70 180 0.98 0.73
350 0.97 0.81 0.73 187 1.00 0.75
375 1.00 0.83 0.75 200 0.79 0.66
400 0.85 0.77 220 0.84 0.70
450 0.89 0.80 240 0.89 0.74
500 0.94 0.83 260 0.94 0.78
550 0.98 0.87 280 0.99 0.82
570 1.00 0.88 285 1.00 0.83
600 0.90 300 0.86
650 0.93 350 0.96
750 1.00 375 1.00
s c
f A,N 0 .5 fR,N 0.27 0.49
6 h ef h ef
Limits: s min d s d s cr,N Limits: c min d c d c cr,N Note: If more than 3 edges
are smaller than ccr,N
s min h ef c min 0.8 h ef consult your Hilti
Technical Advisory
s cr,N 3 h ef c cr,N 1.5 h ef Service
NRd,s : Steel design tensile resistance

2)
HDA-T/-P/-TF/-PF
1)
NRd,s [kN] 30.7 44.7 84.0 130.7
HDA-PR/-TR
1)
NRd,s [kN] 28.8 41.9 78.8
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in tension is calculated using NRd,s= As*fuk/JMs,N. The partial safety factor. JMs,.N . for steel of grade
8.8 is 1.5; for grade A4-80 it is 1.6.
2)
42
HDA design anchor
NRd : System design tensile resistance
NRd = lower of NRd,p , NRd,c and NRd,s
Combined loading: Only if tensile load and shear load applied (See page 274 and examples pages 277-284).
Detailed design method – Hilti CC

c2 >
1 .5 V rec,c/s
c
s
SHEAR c c2 >
1 .5
c
The design shear resistance of a single h>
1 .5
c
anchor is the lower of:
VRd,c : concrete edge resistance
VRd,s : steel resistance Note: If the conditions regarding h and c2 are not met.
consult your Hilti technical advisory service.
VRd,c : Concrete edge design resistance
The lowest concrete edge resistance must be calculated. All nearby edges must be checked (not only the edge
in the direction of shear). Shear direction is accounted for by the factor fE,V.
o
VRd,c VRd,c f B f E,V f AR,V
V0Rd.c : Concrete edge design resistance
x Concrete compressive strength fck,cube(150) = 25 N/mm2

x at a minimum edge distance c min
2)
V0Rd,c1) [kN] for cracked concrete w = 0.3 mm 6.1 9.2 18.6 30.2
V0Rd,c1) [kN] for non-cracked concrete 8.5 12.8 26.1 42.4
cmin [mm] cracked and non-cracked concrete 80 100 150 200
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in shear is calculated from the characteristic anchor shear resistance V°Rk,c , divided by
V°Rd,c= V°Rk,c/JMc,V, where the partial safety factor, JMc,V, is 1.5.
2)
43
HDA design anchor

fB Limits:
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1 25 N/mm2 d fck,cube d 60 N/mm2
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 fck,cube
C40/50 40 50 1.41 fB
25
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Height 30cm. 15cm side length 15cm
diameter
2
fE.V : Influence of shear load direction
Angle E [°] Formulae: V ... applied shear force

fE.V
0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55° E
60 1.1 1
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2
fAR.V : Influence of spacing and edge

distance
Formula for single anchor fastening
influenced only by edge c 2,1
s n-1
c c
f AR,V s3
c min c min s2
results s1
Formula for two-anchor fastening valid for s < 3c tabulated c 2,2
below c
3c s c
f AR,V
6c min c min h >1,5 c
General formula for n anchors (edge distance plus n-1 spacing)

only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c and c2 > 1.5c Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
44
HDA design anchor
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
These results are for a two-.
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
Anchor fastening.
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
For fastening made with more
10.0 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
than 2 anchors, use the
10.5 6.74 7.12 7.50
general formulae for n
11.0 7.28 7.67
anchors the page before.
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
VRd,s1) : Steel design shear resistance
2)
HDA-T/-TF 43.3 53.3 93.3 140.0
HDA-P/-PF 17.6 24.0 49.6 78.4
HDA-PR 17.3 25.6 47.4 -
for tfix[mm] 10d <15 10d <15 15d <20
VRd,s [kN] 53.4 65.4 114.3
for tfix[mm] 15d <20 15d <25 20d <30
HDA-TR -
56.4 70.7 118.8
for tfix[mm] - 25d <25 20d <30
- 82.0 127.8
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated from VRd,s= VRk,s/JMs,V. The partial safety factor JMs,V for HDA-T is equal to 1.5, 1.25 for HDA-P/-
PF and 1.33 for HDA-PR/HDA-TR.
2)
VRd : System design shear resistance

VRd = lower of VRd,c and VRd,s
45
Features:
- suitable for the tension zone
- high loading capacity
- force-controlled expansion
- reliable pull-down of part fastened
- no rotation in hole when tightening bolt HSL-3
Bolt Material:
- grade 8.8 acc. DIN EN ISO 898-1
galvanised to min. 5 microns
Versions:
HSL-3 - bolt HSL-3-G
HSL-3-G - nut
HSL-3-B - safety cap (automatic torque control)
HSL-3-SK - countersunk head
HSL-3-SH - socket head
HSL-3-B
2
Concrete
Tensile Fire Hilti Anchor
Close edge
distance/
HSL-3-SK
zone resistance Programme
spacing
Fatigue Shock HSL-3-SH
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSL-3/HSL-3-SH*

All data on this page applies to For detailed design method, see pages 50 – 54.
x no edge distance and spacing influence
x steel failure
Anchor size M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
Tensile NRu,m 28.4 37.7 53.4 71.3 100.6 133.1 20.3 26.9 38.1 50.9 71.8 95.0
Shear VRu,m 43.0 63.5 88.9 128.6 160.6 239.7 43.0 63.5 88.9 128.6 160.6 239.7
Tensile NRk 23.4 29.5 36.1 50.4 70.4 92.6 16.7 21.1 25.8 36.0 50.3 66.1
Shear VRk 31.1 49.2 71.7 101.1 141.9 177.4 31.1 49.2 71.7 101.1 141.9 177.4
* HSL-3-SH is only available up to M12
46
Tensile NRd 15.6 19.7 24.1 33.6 46.9 61.7 6.7 10.7 17.2 24.0 33.5 44.1
Shear VRd 24.9 39.4 57.4 80.9 113.5 141.9 24.9 39.4 57.4 80.9 113.5 141.9
Tensile NRec 11.1 14.0 17.2 24.0 33.5 44.1 4.8 7.6 12.3 17.1 24.0 31.5
Shear VRec 17.8 28.1 41.0 57.8 81.1 101.4 17.8 28.1 41.0 57.8 81.1 101.4
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSL-3 G

All data on this section applies to
x steel failure
x For detailed design method, see pages 50 – 54.
Anchor size M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Tensile NRk 23.4 29.5 36.1 50.4 70.4 16.7 21.1 25.8 36.0 50.3
Shear VRk 14.6 23.2 33.7 62.8 98.0 14.6 23.2 33.7 62.8 98.0
Following values according the:
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete fck,cube= 25 N/mm2
Tensile NRd 15.6 19.7 24.1 33.6 46.9 6.7 10.7 17.2 24.0 33.5
Shear VRd 11.7 18.6 27.0 50.2 78.4 11.7 18.6 27.0 50.2 78.4
Recommended load Lrec [kN]: fck,cube= 25 N/mm2
Tensile NRec 11.1 14.0 17.2 24.0 33.5 4.8 7.6 12.3 17.1 24.0
Shear VRec 8.4 13.3 19.3 35.9 56.0 8.4 13.3 19.3 35.9 56.0
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE35, TE55, TE76), hammer, torque
wrench, blow out pump.
47
Setting details
HSL-3
Anchor size M8/ tfix M10/ tfix M12/ tfix M16/ tfix M20/ tfix M24/ tfix
tfix [mm] 1)
Fastenable thickness (small/medium/large) 5/20/40 5/20/40 5/25/50 10/25/50 10/30/60 10/30/60
d0 [mm] Nominal diameter of drill hole 12 15 18 24 28 32
[mm] Diameter of drill bit d 12.5 d 15.5 d 18.5 d 24.55 d 28.55 d 32.7
h1 [mm] Depth of drill hole 80 90 105 125 155 180
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 60 70 80 100 125 150
2)
l [mm] Anchor length
tfix small 83 95 111 138 163 185
[mm]
tfix medium
tfix large
Head height and washer
98
118
7.5
110
130
10
131
156
11
153
178
14
183
213
17
205
235
19
2
dw [mm] Washer diameter 20 25 30 40 45 50
hmin [mm] Min. base material thickness 120 140 160 200 250 300
df [mm] Clearance hole 14 17 20 26 31 35
SW [mm] Width across 13 17 19 24 30 36
Tinst [Nm] Torque moment 25 50 80 120 200 250
HSL-3-SH
Anchor size M8/ tfix M10/ tfix M12/ tfix
tfix [mm] 1)
Fastenable thickness (small/medium/large) 5 20 25
d0 [mm] Nominal diameter of drill hole 12 15 18
[mm] Diameter of drill bit d 12,5 d 15,5 d 18,5
h1 [mm] Depth of drill hole 85 95 110 1)
Other tfix possible
2)
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 60 70 80 Other anchor length possible
2) according to other tfix
l [mm] Anchor length 88 120 142
[mm] Head height and washer 10 13 15
dw [mm] Washer diameter 20 25 30
hmin [mm] Min. base material thickness 120 140 160
df [mm] Clearance hole 14 17 20
SW [mm] Width across 6 8 10
Tinst [Nm] Torque moment 20 35 60
HSL-3-G
M8/ tfix M10/ tfix M12/ tfix M16/ tfix M20/ tfix
Anchor size
1)
tfix [mm] Fastenable thickness (small/medium/large/ 100 mm) 5/20/40/ 5/20/40/ 5/25/50/ 10/25/50/ 10/30/60/1
100 100 100 100 00
d0 [mm] Nominal diameter of drill hole 12 15 18 24 28
[mm] Diameter of drill bit d 12,5 d 15,5 d 18,5 d 24,55 d 28,55
h1 [mm] Depth of drill hole 80 90 105 125 155
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 60 70 80 100 125
2)
tfix small 87 100 119 148 170
tfix medium 102 115 139 163 190
tfix large 122 135 164 188 220
tfix = 100 mm 182 195 214 238 260
48
HSL-3-G
M8/ tfix M10/ tfix M12/ tfix M16/ tfix M20/ tfix
Anchor size
[mm] Head height and washer 8 11 13 17 20

dw [mm] Washer diameter 20 25 30 40 45
hmin [mm] Min. base material thickness 120 140 160 200 250
df [mm] Clearance hole (through setting) 14 17 20 26 31
df [mm] Clearance hole (only threaded rod carries the load) 9 12 14 18 22
SW [mm] Width across 13 17 19 24 30
Tinst [Nm] Torque moment 20 35 60 80 160
HSL-3-B
Anchor size M12/ tfix M16/ tfix M20/ tfix M24/ tfix
1)
tfix [mm] ( small / medium / large) 5/25/50 10/25/50 10/30/60 10/30/60
d0 [mm] Nominal diameter of drill hole 18 24 28 32

[mm] Diameter of drill bit d 18.5 d 24.55 d 28.55 d 32.7
h1 [mm] Depth of drill hole 105 125 155 180
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 80 100 125 150
2)
tfix small 117 144 169 191
tfix medium 137 159 189 211
tfix large 162 184 219 241
[mm] Head height and washer 16.5 19.5 22.5 24.5
dw [mm] Washer diameter 30 40 45 50
hmin [mm] Min. base material thickness 160 200 250 300
df [mm] Clearance hole 20 26 31 35
SW [mm] Width across 24 30 36 41
Tinst [Nm] Torque moment - - - -
Tins
hef tfix
h1
hmin
49
Setting operations
1 2 3 4
Drill hole. Blow out dust and fragments. Install anchor. Apply tightening torque
(for HSL-3-B: no torque wrench is
needed)
Anchor mechanical properties

2
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile strength 800 800 800 800 830 830
2
fyk [N/mm ] Yield strength 8.8 640 640 640 640 640 640
2
As [mm ] Stressed crossed-section 36.6 58.0 84.3 157.0 245.0 353.0
2
W [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 30 60 105 266 519 898
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending moment without sleeve 12.5 24.9 43.7 111.0 216.4 374.2

Nrec,c/s
TENSION s
c
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor
h
is the lower of,

NRd,p : Pull-out resistance

Pull-out failure mode is only determinating for the anchor sizes M8 and M10 in
cracked concrete
o
NRd,p NRd,p fB

Anchor size M8 M10
N0Rd,p1) [kN] cracked concrete 6.7 10.7

1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by NRd,p =N /JMp, where the partial
Rk,p
safety factor JMc,N is equal to 1.8 for M8 and 1.5 for M10.
50
o
NRd,c NRd,c f B f A,N fR,N
N0Rd,c : Design cone resistance

Anchor size HSL-3, HSL-3-SH, HSL-3-G M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] non-cracked concrete 15.6 19.7 24.1 33.6 46.9 61.7
N0Rd,c1) [kN] cracked concrete 11.1 14.1 17.2 24.0 33.5 44.1
hef [mm] effective embedment depth 60 70 80 100 125 150
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c= N Rk,c/JMc,N, where the partial
safety factor JMc,N is equal to 1.5.
fB: Influence of concrete strength

designation strength strength fck,cube
fB
fck,cube [N/mm²] fB
C20/25 20 25 1.0 25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C40/50 40 50 1.41 25 N/mm2 d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm2
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
height 30cm, 15cm side length 15cm
diameter
fAN: Influence of anchor spacing

Anchor HSL-3, HSL-3-SH, HSL-3-G s
spacing
f AN 0. 5
6 h ef
s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
60 0.67
70 0.69 0.67
Limits:
80 0.72 0.69 0.67 s min d s d s cr,N
90 0.75 0.71 0.69
100 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.67 s cr,N 3 h ef
110 0.81 0.76 0.73 0.68
120 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.70
130 0.86 0.81 0.77 0.72 0.67
140 0.89 0.83 0.79 0.73 0.69
150 0.92 0.86 0.81 0.75 0.70 0.67
175 0.99 0.92 0.86 0.79 0.73 0.69
200 0.98 0.92 0.83 0.77 0.72
225 0.97 0.88 0.80 0.75
250 0.92 0.83 0.78
275 0.96 0.87 0.81
300 1.00 0.90 0.83
325 0.93 0.86
350 0.97 0.89
375 1.00 0.92
400 0.94
425 0.97
450 1.00
51
fRN: Influence of edge distance

for M8, M10, M12, M16, M24
Edge distance HSL-3, HSL-3-SH, HSL-3-G c
fRN 0.25 0.5
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 h ef
60 0.75
70 0.83 0.75 for M20
80 0.92 0.82 0.75
90 1.00 0.89 0.81 1.56
100 0.96 0.88 0.75
fRN 1.35 c
105 1.00 0.91 0.78
hef
120 1.00 0.85
140 0.95 Limits for all:
150 1.00 0.52 0.75 cmin c ccr,N
175 0.83 0.83 ccr,N = 1.5hef
200 0.92
2
225 1.00 Note: If more than 3 edges
are smaller than ccr,N
consult your Hilti
Technical Advisory
Service
Minimum thickness of concrete member, minimum spacing and minimum edge distance of anchors in cracked
and uncracked concrete
Anchor size HSL-3, HSL-3-SH, HSL-3-G M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
smin [mm] 60 70 80 100 125 150

Minimum spacing
for c t [mm] 100 100 160 240 300 300
cmin [mm] 60 70 80 100 150 150

Minimum edge distance
for s t [mm] 100 160 240 240 300 300
Minimum thickness hmin [mm] 120 140 160 200 250 300

Anchor size HSL-3, HSL3-SH, HSL-3G M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
NRd,s1) [kN] 19.5 30.9 44.9 83.7 130.7 188.3
1)
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance NRd,s by NRd,s= NRk,s/JMs, where the partial
safety factor JMs is 1.5.


SHEAR c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
The design shear resistance of a single anchor c c2 >
1.5
is the lower of, c
h>
1.5
VRd,c : concrete edge resistance c
VRd,s : steel resistance
Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are
not met, consult your Hilti technical
52

The lowest concrete edge resistance must be calculated. All nearby edges must be checked, (not only the
edge in the direction of shear). Shear direction is accounted for by the factor fE,V.
o
V0Rd,c : Concrete edge design resistance

Anchor size HSL-3, HSL3-SH, HSL-3G M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
V0Rd,c [kN] non-cracked concrete 4.7 6.5 8.6 9.8 27.5 29.7
V0Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 3.3 4.6 6.1 13.7 19.7 21.2
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 60 70 80 100 150 150
smin [mm] min. spacing distance 100 160 240 240 300 300
1) o o o
The shear design resistance is calculated from the shear characteristic resistance V Rk,c by V Rd,c= V Rk,c/JMc,V, where the partial
safety factor JMc,V is equal to 1.5.

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
fE,V : Influence of shear load direction

Angle E [°] fE,V Formulae:
V ... applied shear force
0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

distance
c 2,1
influenced only by edge s n-1
c c s3
f AR,V s2
c min c min s1
results
c 2,2 c
Formula for two-anchor fastening valid for s < 3c
tabulated
below
3c s c
f AR,V h >1,5 c
6c min c min
53

only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c and c2 > 1.5c
3c s1 s 2 ... s n1 c
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
Note : It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
0.83
0.92
1.00
1.02
1.11
1.20
1.30
1.22
1.32
1.42
1.52
1.43
1.54
1.64
1.75
1.65
1.77
1.88
1.99
1.89
2.00
2.12
2.24
2.13
2.25
2.37
2.50
2.38
2.50
2.63
2.76
2.63
2.77
2.90
3.04
2.90
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.18
3.32
3.46
3.61
3.46
3.61
3.76
3.91
3.75
3.90
4.06
4.21
4.05
4.21
4.36
4.52
4.35
4.52
4.68
4.84
4.67
4.83
5.00
5.17
2
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
8.5 These results are for a two-. 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
9.0 Anchor fastening. 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 For fastening made with more 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 than 2 anchors, use the 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 general formulae for n 7.28 7.67
11.5 anchors at the top of the page. 7.83
12.0 8.00
VRd,s : Steel design shear resistance

HSL-3 24.9 39.4 57.4 80.9 113.5 141.9
VRd,s [kN] HSL-3-SH 24.9 39.4 57.4 - - -
HSL-3-G 11.7 18.6 27.0 50.2 78.4 -
The shear design resistance is calculated from the shear characteristic resistance VRd,s by VRd,s= VRk,s/JMs, where the partial
safety factor JMs is 1.25.

54
HSC safety anchor
Features - complete system

- keying hold
- shallow anchorage depth
- low expansion force (thus small edge distance /
spacing HSC-A(R)
- automatic undercutting (without special undercutting
- mark on anchor for setting control (easy and safe)
- anchorage depth mark on sleeve
- suitable for tensile zone
HSC-I(R)
Material:
HSC-A/-I - grade 8.8, EN ISO 898-1
HSC-AR/-IR - expansion sleeve
- stainless steel ;A4-70; 1.4401; 1.4571
Tension Close edge
Concrete Shock
- DIN 17440 (A4), X5 CrNiMo 17122 zone distance/spacing
A4
316
Fire Hilti Anchor Corrosion
resistance program resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSC-A

All data on this page applies to x steel failure
x concrete: as specified in the table For detailed design method, see page 60-64.
x correct setting (see setting operations page 59)

Anchor size M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60 M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60
Tensile NRu,m 16.6 23.3 16.6 30.6 13.3 18.6 13.3 24.5
Shear VRu,m 19.0 19.0 30.2 43.8 19.0 19.0 30.2 43.8

Tensile NRk 12.8 17.8 12.8 23.4 9.1 12.7 9.1 16.7
Shear VRk 14.6 14.6 23.2 33.7 14.6 14.6 23.2 33.7

Tensile NRd 8.5 11.9 8.5 15.6 6.1 8.5 6.1 11.1
Shear VRd 11.7 11.7 18.6 27.0 11.7 11.7 18.6 27.0

Tensile NRec 6.1 8.5 6.1 11.1 4.3 6.0 4.3 8.0
Shear VRec 8.3 8.3 13.3 19.3 8.3 8.3 13.3 19.3
55
HSC safety anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSC-I

x steel failure

Anchor size
Tensile NRu,m
Shear VRu,m
M6x40
16.6
10.4
M8x40
16.6
15.9
M10x50 M10x60
23.3
19.8
30.6
19.8
M12x60
30.6
23.4
M6x40
13.3
10.4
M8x40
13.3
15.9
M10x50
18.6
19.8
M10x60
24.5
19.8
M12x60
24.5
23.4
2
Anchor size M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60 M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60
Tensile NRk 12.8 12.8 17.8 23.4 23.4 9.1 9.1 12.7 16.7 16.7
Shear VRk 8.0 12.2 15.2 15.2 18.2 8.0 12.2 15.2 15.2 18.2

Tensile NRd 8.5 8.5 11.9 15.6 15.6 6.1 6.1 8.5 11.1 11.1
Shear VRd 6.4 9.8 12.2 12.2 14.6 6.4 9.8 12.2 12.2 14.6

Tensile NRec 6.1 6.1 8.5 11.1 11.1 4.3 4.3 6.0 8.0 8.0
Shear VRec 4.6 7.0 8.7 8.7 10.4 4.6 7.0 8.7 8.7 10.4
56
HSC safety anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSC-AR

x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 16.6 23.3 16.6 30.6 13.3 18.6 13.3 24.5
Shear VRu,m 16.6 16.6 26.4 38.4 16.6 16.6 26.4 38.4

Tensile NRk 12.8 17.8 12.8 23.4 9.1 12.7 9.1 16.7
Shear VRk 12.8 12.8 20.3 29.5 12.8 12.8 20.3 29.5

Tensile NRd 8.5 11.9 8.5 15.6 6.1 8.5 6.1 11.1
Shear VRd 8.2 8.2 13.0 18.9 8.2 8.2 13.0 18.9

Tensile NRec 6.1 8.5 6.1 11.1 4.3 6.0 4.3 8.0
Shear VRec 5.9 5.9 9.3 13.5 5.9 5.9 9.3 13.5
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSC-IR

x concrete: as specified in the table x steel failure
x no edge distance and spacing influence For detailed design method, see pages 60-64.
x correct setting (see setting operations page 59 )

Tensile NRu,m 14.8 16.6 23.3 30.6 30.6 13.3 13.3 18.6 24.5 24.5
Shear VRu,m 9.1 13.9 17.3 17.3 20.8 9.1 13.9 17.3 17.3 20.8
Tensile NRk 12.8 12.8 17.8 23.4 23.4 9.1 9.1 12.7 16.7 16.7
Shear VRk 7.0 10.7 13.3 13.3 16.0 7.0 10.7 13.3 13.3 16.0
57
HSC safety anchor
Tensile NRd 8.5 8.5 11.9 15.6 15.6 6.1 6.1 8.5 11.1 11.1
Shear VRd 4.5 6.9 8.5 8.5 10.3 4.5 4.5 8.5 8.5 10.3
Tensile NRec 6.1 6.1 8.5 11.1 11.1 4.3 4.3 6.0 8.0 8.0
Shear VRec
Setting details
3.2 4.9 6.1 6.1 7.4 3.2 4.9 6.1 6.1 7.4
2
s
hef tfix
h1 hef
h1
HSC-A/-AR HSC-I/-IR
Anchor size HSC-A (R) HSC-I (R)

M 10x40
M 12x60
M 10x50
M 10x60
M 12/60
M 8x40
M 8x50
M 6x40
M 8x40
Setting Details
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 14 16 18 14 16 18 20

h1 [mm] Hole depth 46 56 46.5 68 46 46.5 56 68 68.5
hef [mm] Effective anchorage depth 40 50 40 60 40 50 60
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 15 20 -
smin/smax [mm] Screwing depth - 6/16 8/22 10/28 12/30
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 10 10 20 30 10 20 30 30
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 10 13 17 19
df [mm] Clearance hole 9 12 14 7 9 12 14
h [mm] Min. base material thickness 100 100 100 130 100 110 130 130
14x 16x 18x 18x

Drill bit TE-C B- 14x40 14x50 16x40 18x60 20x60
40 40 50 60
Setting tool TE-C MW - 14 16 18 14 16 18 20
58
HSC safety anchor
A rotary hammer (TE 25); a blow-out pump,
a TE-C B- stop drill bit (See table above.),
a TE-C MW- setting tool: (See table above.) and a torque wrench.
TE-C B- TE-C MW-
Setting operations
Drill hole with stop drill bit. Blow out dust and fragments. Insert type A anchor into hole. Check setting
of type A anchor.
Check setting
of type I anchor.
Insert type I anchor into hole. Set with setting tool . Secure part being fastened.

I(R) M10x50
I(R) M10x60
I(R) M12x60
A(R) M8x40
A(R) M8x50
I(R) M6x40
I(R) M8x40
M10x40
M12x60
A(R)
A(R)
Anchor size HSC- Material
galv.
800
fuk [N/mm ]
2
Nominal tensile strength steel
A4 600 700 600 700
galv.
640
fyk [N/mm ]
2
Yield strength steel
A4 355 450 355 450 350 450 350
2 Stressed cross-section of galv.

As,I [mm ] 22.0 - 28.3 - - 34.6 - 40.8
internal thread (stud) steel
2 Stressed cross-section of
As,A [mm ] A4 20.1 36.6 58.0 36.6 58.0 84.3
external thread (stud or bolt)
2
W [mm ] Section modulus 12.7 31.2 62.3 31.2 62.3 109.2
galv.
9.6 24 48 24 48 84
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending moment
1) steel
A4 7.1 16.7 33.3 16.7 33.3 59.0
1)
The design bending moment is calculated from MRd,s= MRk,s/JMs where the partial safety factor is 1.25 for galvanised steel and 1.56 for
stainless steel.
59
HSC safety anchor

TENSION N rec,p/c/s
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor
is the lower of, s
c
h

x Pull-out failure mode not determinating
2
o
NRd,c NRd,c f B f AN f RN

Anchor size HSC-A/-AR M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60

N0Rd,c1) [kN] non-cracked concrete 8.5 11.9 8.5 15.6
N0Rd,c1) [kN] cracked concrete 6.1 8.5 6.1 11.1
hef [mm] effective embedment depth 40 50 40 60
Anchor size HSC-I/-IR M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60

N0Rd,c1) [kN] non-cracked concrete 8.5 8.5 11.9 15.6 15.6
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 6.1 6.1 8.5 11.1 11.1
hef [mm] effective embedment depth 40 40 50 60 60
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c= N Rk,c/JMc,N, where the partial
fB :Influence of concrete strength

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
60
HSC safety anchor
fAN :Influence of anchor spacing

spacing HSC-A/AR s
f AN 0. 5
s [mm] M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60 6 h ef
40 0.67 0.67
50 0.71 0.67 0.71 Limits:
60 0.75 0.70 0.75 0.67 s min d s d s cr,N
80 0.83 0.77 0.83 0.72
s cr,N 3 h ef
100 0.92 0.83 0.92 0.78
120 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.83
140 0.97 0.89
160 0.94
180 1.00
smin 40 50 40 60
for c > 40 50 40 60
spacing HSC-I/IR
s [mm] M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60
40 0.67 0.67
50 0.71 0.71 0.67
60 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.67 0.67
80 0.83 0.83 0.77 0.72 0.72
100 0.92 0.92 0.83 0.78 0.78
120 1.00 1.00 0.90 0.83 0.83
140 0.97 0.89 0.89
160 0.94 0.94
180 1.00 1.00
smin 40 40 50 60 60
for c > 40 40 50 60 60
fRN :Influence of edge distance

Edge Distance HSC-A/AR c
c [mm] M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60 fRN 0.25 0.5
h ef
40 0.75 0.75
50 0.88 0.75 0.88 Limits:
60 1.00 0.85 1.00 0.75 c min d c d c cr,N
70 0.95 0.83
c cr,N 1.5 h ef
75 1.00 0.88
80 0.92
Note:
90 1.00
If more than 3 edges are smaller than
cmin 40 50 40 60 ccr,N consult the Hilti Technical Advisory
for s > 40 50 40 60 Service
Edge Distance HSC-I/IR

c [mm] M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60
40 0.75 0.75
50 0.88 0.88 0.75
60 1.00 1.00 0.85 0.75 0.75
70 0.95 0.83 0.83
75 1.00 0.88 0.88
80 0.92 0.92
90 1.00 1.00
cmin 40 40 50 60 60
for s > 40 40 50 60 60
61
HSC safety anchor

1) HSC-A 19.5 19.5 30.9 44.9
NRd,s [kN]
HSC-AR 13.7 13.7 21.7 31.5

HSC-I 10.7 16.3 20.2 20.2 24.3
NRd,s1) [kN]
HSC-IR 7.5 11.4 14.2 14.2 17.1
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , using NRd,s=
NRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety factor JMs is 1.5 for galvanised steel and 1.87 for stainless steel.
NRd = lower of NRd,c and NRd,s 2

Combined loading: Only if tensile load and shear load applied (See page 266 and examples pages 269 - 276).

(The Hilti CC-Method is a simplified Version of ETAG Annex C) c2 > V rec,c/s
1 .5
c
s
c c2 >
SHEAR 1.5
c
h>
1 .5
The design shear resistance of a single anchor c
is the lower of:
Note: If the conditions regarding h and c2 are not met,
VRd,s : steel resistance consult your Hilti technical advisory service.

o

Anchor HSC-A/A-R M8x40 M8x50 M10x40 M12x60
V0Rd,c [kN] non-cracked concrete 2.4 3.6 2.5 5.3
V0Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 1.7 2.6 1.8 3.8
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 40 50 40 60
Anchor HSC-I/I-R M6x40 M8x40 M10x50 M10x60 M12x60

V0Rd,c [kN] non-cracked concrete 2.4 2.5 3.8 5.3 5.4
V0Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 1.7 1.8 2.7 3.8 3.9
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 40 40 50 60 60
1) o o o
The shear design resistance is calculated from the shear characteristic resistance V Rk,c by V Rd,c =V Rk,c /JMc,V, where the partial
62
HSC safety anchor

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2
fAR,V : Influence of spacing and edge distance

SHEAR
influenced only by edge
c 2,1
c c s n-1
f AR,V
c min c min results s3
tabulated s2
Formula for anchor pair valid for s < 3c s1
below
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c
General formula for n anchors (edge plus n-1 spacing)
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to

f AR ,V
3nc min c min the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
63
HSC safety anchor
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0
7.5
8.0
3.67 3.98
4.11
4.29
4.43
4.57
4.62
4.76
4.91
4.95
5.10
5.25
5.29
5.44
5.59
5.63
5.79
5.95
5.98
6.14
6.30
6.33
6.50
6.67
2
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
12.0 8.00

HSC-A 11.7 11.7 18.6 27.0
VRd,s1) [kN]
HSC-AR 8.2 8.2 13.0 18.9

HSC-I 6.4 9.8 12.2 12.2 14.6
VRd,s1) [kN]
HSC-IR 4.5 6.9 8.5 8.5 10.3
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, VRk,s ,
using VRd,s= VRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety factor JMs is 1.25 for galvanised steel and
1.56 for stainless steel.
64
HST stud anchor
Features:
- force- controlled expansion
HST / HST-R / HST-HCR
- suitable for tension zone
- suitable for shock loading
A4
- fire prevention assessment 316
- pre-assembled with nut and washer o save time
Close
- cold formed Tension edge Corrosion
Concrete Shock
zone distance/ resistance
Material: spacing
HST: - carbon steel, zinc plated to min. 5 Pm

HCR
HST-R: - stainless steel; A4; 1.4401; EN 10088 highMo
HST-HCR: - stainless steel; 1.4529 High

Fire Hilti Anchor
corrosion
resistance programme
resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HST

All data on this page applies to For detailed design method, see pages 69 - 73.
x steel failure
Tensile NRu,m 16.6 22.3 35.2 48.7 76.0 86.1 10.3 11.6 21.9 31.1 44.9 60.2
Shear VRu,m 23.0 26.5 44.2 72.2 119.1 125.0 22.8 24.4 47.5 67.6 107.4 116.4
Tensile NRk 12.0 16.0 20.0 35.0 50.0 60.0 5.0 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.0 40.0
Shear VRk 13.0 20.0 30.0 50.0 55.0 94.0 13.0 20.0 30.0 50.0 55.0 94.0
Tensile NRd 6.7 10.7 13.3 23.3 33.3 40.0 2.8 6.0 8.0 13.3 20.0 26.7
Shear VRd 8.7 16.0 24.0 40.0 41.4 62.7 8.7 16.0 24.0 40.0 41.4 62.7
Tensile NRec 4.8 7.6 9.5 16.7 23.8 28.6 2.0 4.3 5.7 9.5 14.3 19.0
Shear VRec 6.2 11.4 17.1 28.6 29.6 44.8 6.2 11.4 17.1 28.6 29.6 44.8
65
HST stud anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HST-R

x steel failure
Anchor size
Tensile NRu,m
Shear VRu,m
M8
18.1
22.8
M10
26.7
31.9
M12
35.1
50.3
M16
49.8
84.0
M20
77.4
136.0
M24
79.1
151.4
M8
12.7
20.6
M10
18.4
31.9
M12
20.1
45.5
M16
36.0
84.0
M20
55.1
106.6
M24
70.5
151.4
2
Tensile NRk 12.0 15.0 22.0 34.0 50.0 66.0 5.0 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.0 40.0
Shear VRk 14.0 22.0 32.0 51.0 80.0 115.0 14.0 22.0 32.0 51.0 80.0 115.0
Tensile NRd 6.7 8.3 12.2 18.9 27.8 36.7 2.8 5.0 6.7 11.1 16.7 22.2
Shear VRd 7.5 11.7 17.0 27.4 43.0 61.8 7.5 11.7 17.0 27.4 43.0 61.8
Tensile NRec 4.8 6.0 8.7 13.5 19.8 26.2 2.0 3.6 4.8 7.9 11.9 15.9
Shear VRec 5.4 8.4 12.1 19.6 30.7 44.1 5.4 8.4 12.1 19.6 30.7 44.1
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HST-HCR

x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 15.2 22.7 32.4 45.5 13.8 16.2 21.5 32.4
Shear VRu,m 14.0 21.6 32.4 59.4 14.0 21.6 32.4 59.4
66
HST stud anchor

Tensile NRk 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.0 5.0 9.0 12.0 20.0
Shear VRk 13.0 20.0 30.0 55.0 13.0 20.0 30.0 55.0

Tensile NRd 5.0 6.7 11.1 16.7 2.8 5.0 6.7 11.1
Shear VRd 8.3 12.8 19.2 35.3 8.3 12.8 19.2 35.3

Tensile NRec 3.6 4.8 7.9 11.9 2.0 3.6 4.8 7.9
Shear VRec 5.9 9.1 13.7 25.2 5.9 9.1 13.7 25.2
Setting details
Marking
df
Tinst
d0
h ef t fix
h1
hmin
Anchor size
M10x110
M10x130
M12x115
M12x145
M12x185
M12x215
M12x235
M12x255
M16x140
M16x165
M16x215
M16x255
M16x295
M8x115
M10x90
M8x75
M8x95
Setting Details
do [mm] Nominal dia. of drill bit 8 10 12 16
I [mm] Anchor length 75 95 115 90 110 130 115 145 185 215 235 255 140 165 215 255 295
HST 25 45 65 30 50 70 45 75 115 145 165 180 55 80 130 170 180
IG [mm] Thread length HST-R 25 45 65 30 50 70 45 75 115 145 40 40 40 40 40
HST-HCR 25 25 25 30 30 30 35 35 35 35 35 35 40 40 40 40 40
HST 110
Tinst [Nm] Rec. tighten- 25 45 60
ing torque HST-R 125
HST-HCR 15 45 60 125
SW [mm] Width across nut flats 13 17 19 24
df [mm] Clearance hole diameter 9 12 14 18
h1 [mm] Min. depth of drill hole 65 80 95 115
hef [mm] Effective embed. depth 46 60 68 82
tfix [mm] Max. fastenable thickness 10 30 50 10 30 50 20 50 90 120 140 160 25 50 100 140 180
hmin [mm] Min. concrete thickness 100 120 140 160
Drill bit TE-CX-8 TE-CX-10 TE-CX-12 TE-C-16 or TE-Y-16
67
HST stud anchor
Anchor size
M20x170
M20x200
M20x270
M24x200
M24x230
Setting Details
do [mm] Nominal dia. of drill bit 20 24

I [mm] Anchor length 170 200 270 200 230
HST 65 95 60 60 60
IG [mm] Thread length
HST -R 45 45 55 55
Tinst [Nm] Rec. tightening torque 240 300
SW [mm] Width across nut flats 30 36
df [mm] Clearance hole diameter 22 26
h1 [mm] Min. depth of drill hole 140 170
hef [mm] Effective embed. depth 101 125
tfix [mm] Max. fastenable thickness 30 60 130 30 60
hmin
Drill bit
[mm] Min. concrete thickness 200
TE-C-S 20
TE-Y 20
TE-C-S 24
TE-Y 24
250
2
HST-HCR is available up to M16. For HST-R the following lengths are not available: M12x235, M12x255, M20x270
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55, TE 76), drill bit, blow-out
pump, torque wrench, appropriate size hexagon drive socket for correct setting.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Blow out dust and fragments. Install anchor. Apply tightening torque.

HST 800 800 800 680 550 530
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile strength HST-R 700 700 700 650 700 700
HST-HCR 700 700 700 700 - -
HST 640 640 640 480 400 450
2
fyk [N/mm ] min. Yield strength HST-R 500 500 500 500 500 500
HST-HCR 450 450 450 450 - -
2
As [mm ] Stressed cross-section in taper 24.2 41.3 57.4 105.7 167.4 240.5
2
As [mm ] Stressed cross-section in thread 36.6 58 84.3 157 245 353
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 31.2 62.3 109 277 541 935
HST 24.0 47.8 83.7 159.6 259.7 475.7
1)
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending moment HST-R 18.7 37.4 65.4 166.2 324.6 561
HST-HCR 16.8 33.5 58.7 161.1 - -
1)
The design bending moment is calculated from MRd,s = 1.2Welfuk/JMs where the partial safety factor JMs varies with anchor type and size.
68
HST stud anchor

TENSION N rec,p/c/s
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor s

is the lower of, c
h
o
NRd,p NRd,p fB
N0Rd,p : Design pull-out resistance

HST 6.7 10.7 13.3 23.3 33.3 40.0
N0Rd,p1) [kN] non-cracked concrete HST-R 6.7 8.3 12.2 18.9 27.8 36.7
HST-HCR 5.0 6.7 11.1 16.7 - -
N0Rd,p1) [kN] cracked concrete HST 2.8 6.0 8.0 13.3 20.0 26.7
HST-R, HST-HCR 2.8 5.0 6.7 11.1 16.7 22.2
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by N Rd,p =N Rk,p/JMc,N, where the partial safety
factor JMc,N varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant approval).
o

HST 8.7 15.6 18.8 24.9 34.1 47.0
N0Rd,c1) [kN] non-cracked concrete
HST-R, HST-HCR 8.7 13.0 15.7 20.8 28.4 39.1
0 1) HST 6.2 11.2 13.5 17.8 24.4 33.5
N Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete
HST-R, HST-HCR 6.2 9.3 11.2 14.9 20.3 28.0
hef [mm] effective embedment depth 46 60 68 82 101 125
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c =N Rk,c /JMc,N, where the partial safety
factor JMc,N varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant approval).
69
HST stud anchor

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
fAN :Influence of anchor spacing

2
Anchor spacing HST anchor size s
f AN 0. 5
s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 6 h ef
50 0.68
70 0.75 0.70 0.67
Limits:
90 0.83 0.76 0.72 0.68
110 0.90 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.68 s min d s d s cr,N
130 0.97 0.87 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.67 smin varies with edge distance, see
150 1.00 0.93 0.87 0.80 0.75 0.70 foot of table
170 0.99 0.92 0.85 0.78 0.73
190 1.00 0.97 0.89 0.81 0.75 scr,N 3 hef
210 1.00 0.93 0.85 0.78
230 0.97 0.88 0.81
250 1.00 0.91 0.83
270 0.95 0.86
290 0.98 0.89
310 1.00 0.91
330 0.94
350 0.97
380 1.00
smin 50 55 60 70 100 125
for c t 90 80 85 110 225 255
smin 115 115 145 150 270 295
for c t 55 55 55 85 140 170
fRN :Influence of edge distance

Edge distance HST anchor size
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 c
55 0.85 fRN 0.25 0.5
60 0.90 h ef
70 1.00 0.85
80 0.94 0.84
Limits:
90 1.00 0.91
100 0.99 c min d c d c cr,N
110 1.00 0.92 cmin varies with spacing, see
120 0.98 foot of table
130 1.00
140 0.94 c cr,N 1.5 hef
150 0.99
160 1.00 Note:
170 0.93 If more than 3 edges are smaller than
180 0.97 ccr,N consult the Hilti Technical Advisory
190 1.00 Service
cmin 55 55 55 85 140 170
for s t 115 115 145 150 270 295
cmin 90 80 85 110 225 255
for s t 50 55 60 70 100 125
70
HST stud anchor

HST 12.8 21.3 28.7 50.0 46.9 90.1
NRd,s1) [kN] HST-R 8.0 13.8 19.1 30.9 48.9 70.0
HST-HCR 9.1 15.0 21.4 39.6 - -
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , using
NRd,s= NRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety factor JMs varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant
approval)

c2 >
1 .5 V rec,c/s
c
s
SHEAR c c2 >
1.5
c
h>
The design shear resistance of a single anchor 1 .5
c
is the lower of,

o

V0Rd,c1) [kN] non-cracked concrete 3.4 3.8 4.2 9.1 21.6 31.6
0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 2.4 2.8 3.0 6.5 15.4 22.6
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 55 55 55 85 140 170
for st [mm] min. spacing distance 115 115 145 150 270 295
1) o o o
71
HST stud anchor

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
2

0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

SHEAR
c 2,1
c c s n-1
f AR,V
c min c min results s3
tabulated s2
Formula for anchor pair valid for s < 3c s1
below
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c

f AR ,V
3nc min c min the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
72
HST stud anchor
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 These results are for a two-. 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 For fastening made with more 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 than 2 anchors, use the 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 general formulae for n 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 anchors at the top of the page. 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00

HST 8.7 16.0 24.0 40.0 41.4 62.7
VRd,s [kN] HST-R 7.5 11.7 17.0 27.4 43.0 61.8
HST-HCR 8.3 12.8 19.2 35.3 - -
1)
using VRd,s= VRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety factor JMs varies with anchor type and size
(as per relevant approval).
73
HSA stud anchor
Features:
- long thread HSA / HSA-R / HSA-F
- head marking for identification after setting
- firestop assessment
- pre-assembled with nut and washer o time saving
A4
- cold formed
316
Material:
HSA: - carbon steel, zinc plated to min. 5 Pm Small edge Corrosion
Fire Hilti Anchor
Concrete distance / resistance
HSA-R: - stainless steel, A4 grade; 1.4401 resistance programme
spacing
- carbon steel, hot dipped galvanised 45 Pm
HSA-F:
according to ISO 1461
2
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSA
x steel failure
non-cracked concrete
Standard anchorage depth Reduced anchorage depth
Tensile, NRu,m 12.5 20.1 20.6 39.7 62.5 100.1 9.2 12.8 18.3 19.8 38.3 44.4
Shear, VRu,m 8.4 15.5 22.4 35.1 63.3 84.2 10.6 16.7 23.4 35.1 62.6 84.2
Tensile, NRk 6.0 12.0 12.0 25.0 35.0 50.0 4.0 9.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 30.0
Shear, VRk 5.0 10.0 16.0 23.0 39.0 61.0 5.0 10.0 16.0 23.0 39.0 61.0
Following values according to the
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete, fck,cube = 25 N/mm2
Tensile, NRd 3.3 6.7 6.7 11.9 23.3 33.3 1.9 6.0 6.7 7.6 13.3 20.0
Shear, VRd 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5
Recommended load, Lrec [kN]: concrete, fck,cube = 25 N/mm2
Tensile, NRec 2.4 4.8 4.8 8.5 16.6 23.8 1.4 4.3 4.8 5.4 9.5 14.3
Shear, VRec 2.6 4.6 7.1 10.1 18.9 29.6 2.4 4.6 7.1 10.1 18.9 29.6
74
HSA stud anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSA-R

All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 79 - 84.
x steel failure
Tensile, NRu,m 11.2 17.2 20.1 33.6 52.3 69.0 9.2 12.8 18.3 19.8 30.0 43.0
Shear, VRu,m 8.7 20.0 24.0 35.4 62.2 97.0 9.5 14.3 24.6 27.5 62.2 97.0
Tensile, NRk 6.0 12.0 12.0 25.0 38.7 44.1 7.2 7.5 12.0 18.0 23.0 33.0
Shear, VRk 6.0 11.0 17.0 25.0 51.8 80.9 6.0 11.0 17.0 25.0 51.8 80.9
Tensile, NRd 3.3 6.7 5.7 11.9 21.5 24.5 1.9 4.2 5.7 8.6 12.8 18.5
Shear, VRd 4.0 7.3 11.3 16.7 31.4 49.0 4.0 7.3 11.3 16.7 31.4 49.0
Tensile, Nrec 2.4 4.8 4.1 8.5 15.4 17.5 1.4 3.0 4.1 6.1 9.1 13.2
Shear, Vrec 2.8 5.2 8.1 11.9 22.4 35.0 2.8 5.2 8.1 11.9 22.4 35.0
75
HSA stud anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSA-F

All data on this page applies to For detailed design method, see pages 79 - 84.
x steel failure
Anchor size
Tensile, NRu,m
M6 M8 M10
Standard anchorage depth
11.1 18.3 25.3
M12
38.3
M16
45.6
M20
64.4
M6
10.4
M8 M10 M12 M16
Reduced anchorage depth
14.2 20.8 26.8 39.8
M20
54.1
2
Shear, VRu,m 8.4 15.5 22.4 35.1 63.3 84.2 10.6 16.7 23.4 35.1 62.6 84.2
Tensile, NRk 6.0 12.0 12.0 25.0 35.0 50.0 4.0 9.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 30.0
Shear, VRk 5.0 10.0 16.0 23.0 39.0 61.0 5.0 10.0 16.0 23.0 39.0 61.0
Tensile, NRd 3.3 6.7 6.7 11.9 23.3 33.3 1.9 6.0 6.7 7.6 13.3 20.0
Shear, VRd 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5
Tensile, NRec 2.4 4.8 4.8 8.5 16.6 23.8 1.4 4.3 4.8 5.4 9.5 14.3
Shear, VRec 2.6 4.6 7.1 10.1 18.9 29.6 2.4 4.6 7.1 10.1 18.9 29.6
76
HSA stud anchor
Setting details
HSA standard anchorage depth HSA reduced anchorage depth
first mark: blue ring second mark: thread end
Marking
Head marking
df
d0
Tinst
h ef t fix
h1
hmin
Anchor size
M10x108
M10x120
M10x140
M6x100
M8x115
M8x137
M10x68
M10x90
M6x50
M6x65
M6x85
M8x57
M8x75
M8x92
Setting Details
HSA-R available: OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
HSA-F available: OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
do [mm] Nominal dia. of drill bit 6 8 10
I [mm] Anchor length 50 65 85 100 57 75 92 115 137 68 90 108 120 140
Head Marking (letter code) A C D E B C E G H C E F G I
IG [mm] Thread length 15 30 50 65 20 35 52 75 97 25 42 60 72 92
Tinst [Nm] Torque moment* 5 15 30
SW [mm] Width across nut flats 10 13 17
df [mm] Clearance hole diameter 7 9 12
h1 [mm] min. depth of drill hole - 55 - 65 - 70
embedment
standard
hef [mm] effective embed. depth - 40 - 48 - 50

hnom [mm] min. embedment depth - 47 - 55 - 59
tfix [mm] max. fastenable thickness - 10 30 45 - 10 27 50 72 - 20 37 50 70
hmin [mm] min. concrete thickness - 100 - 100 - 100
h1 [mm] min. depth of drill hole 45 50 60
embedment
reduced
hef [mm] effective embed. depth 30 35 42

hnom [mm] min. embedment depth 37 42 51
tfix [mm] max. fastenable thickness 5 20 40 55 5 23 40 63 85 5 25 45 57 77
hmin [mm] min. concrete thickness 100 100 100
Required drill bit TE-CX-6 TE-CX-8 TE-CX-10
77
HSA stud anchor
Anchor size
M12x100
M12x120
M12x150
M12x180
M12x220
M12x240
M12x300
M16x100
M16x120
M16x140
M16x190
M16x240
M20x125
M20x170
M12x80
Setting Details
HSA-R available: OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
HSA-F available: OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
do [mm] Nominal dia. of drill bit 12 16 20
I [mm] Anchor length 80 100 120 150 180 220 240 300 100 120 140 190 240 125 170
Head Marking (letter code) D E G I L O P S E G I L P G K
IG [mm] Thread length 30 45 65 95 125 165 180 180 35 50 70 120 1) 170 45 85
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque* 50 100 200
SW [mm] Width across nut flats 19 24 30
df [mm] Clearance hole diameter 14 18 22
h1 [mm] min. depth of drill hole - 95 - 115 - 130
2
embedment
standard
hef [mm] effective embed. depth - 70 - 84 - 103

hnom [mm] min. embedment depth - 80 - 95 - 115
tfix [mm] max. fastenable thickness - 5 25 55 85 125 145 205 - 5 25 75 125 - 30
hmin [mm] min. concrete thickness - 140 - 170 - 210
h1 [mm] min. depth of drill hole 70 90 105
embedment
reduced
hef [mm] effective embed. depth 50 64 78

hnom [mm] min. embedment depth 60 75 90
tfix [mm] max. fastenable thickness 5 25 45 75 105 145 165 225 5 25 45 95 145 10 55
hmin [mm] min. concrete thickness 100 130 160
TEC-S 20
Required drill bit TE-CX-12 TE-C-16 or TE-Y-16
TE-Y 20
* please note that the torque moment is the same for standard and reduced embedment
1) thread length of HSA-R: 80 mm
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55, TE 76), drill bit, blow-out
pump, torque wrench and hexagon drive socket appropriately sized for correct setting.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Blow out dust and fragments. Install anchor. Apply tightening torque.
Mechanical properties of the anchor bolt
Anchor size HSA M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

2
As [mm ] Stressed cross-section in thread 20.1 36.6 58.0 84.3 157.0 245.0
2
fuk [N/ mm ] Nominal tensile strength in thread 680 680 680 680 680 550
2
As,i [mm ] Stressed cross-section in taper transition 13.1 25.1 43.6 61.5 114.0 182.7
2
fuk [N/ mm ] Nominal tensile strength of taper transition 750 700 700 700 700 550
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 12.7 31.2 62.3 109 277 541
1)
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending moment 7.6 18.7 37.4 71.9 182.8 291.6
78
HSA stud anchor
Anchor size HSA-R M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

2
2
fuk [N/ mm ] Nominal tensile strength of thread 800 700 700 700 650 700
2
2
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 12.7 31.2 62.3 109 277.0 540.0
1)
Anchor size HSA-F M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

2
2
fuk [N/ mm ] Nominal tensile strength of thread 680 680 680 680 680 550
2
2
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 12.7 31.2 62.3 109 277 541
1)
1) The design bending moment is calculated from MRd,s = 1.2·Wel·fuk/JMs where the partial safety factor JMs varies with anchor types and sizes.

(The Hilti CC method is a simplified version of ETAG Annex C.) N rec,p/c/s
TENSION
s
c
The tensile design resistance of a single
h
anchor is the lower of

o
NRd,p NRd,p,sta. / red. f B
N0Rd,p,sta./red.: Design pull-out resistance

0
N Rd,p,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 3.3 6.7 6.7 11.9 23.3 33.3
0
N Rd,p,red. [kN] Reduced anchorage depth 1.9 6.0 6.7 7.6 13.3 20.0

0
0

0
0
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by N =N
Rd,p /JMc,N where the partial
Rk,p
safety factor varies JMp varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant approval).
79
HSA stud anchor
o
NRd,c NRd,c,sta. / red. f T fBN f AN,sta. / red. fRN,sta. / red.
N0Rd,c,sta./red.: Design cone resistance

x concrete compressive strength, fck,cube(150) = 25 N/mm2
0
N Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 7.1 9.3 9.9 14.1 25.9 35.1
0
N Rd,c,red. [kN] Reduced anchorage depth 3.9 7.0 7.6 8.5 17.2 23.1
Anchor size
N
0
Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth
HSA-R M6
7.1
M8
7.7
M10
8.2
M12
11.7
M16
25.9
M20
35.1
2
0

0
N Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 7.1 9.3 9.9 14.1 25.9 35.1
0
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c =NRk,c /JMc,N where the partial
safety factor varies JMc varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant approval).
fT : Influence of anchorage depth

1 .5
§ h act. ·
fT ¨ ¸ Limits: hef,red. d hact. d hef,sta.
¨h ¸
© ef,red. ¹
fBN : Influence of concrete strength
fBN 1 .0
fAN,sta. : Influence of anchor spacing on standard anchorage depth

Anchor spacing, HSA, HSA-R, HSA-F
s [mm] M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
40 0.67
50 0.71 0.67
55 0.73 0.69 0.68
75 0.81 0.76 0.75 0.67
90 0.88 0.81 0.80 0.71 0.68 s
105 0.94 0.86 0.85 0.75 0.71 0.67 f AN,sta. 0.5
120 1.00 0.92 0.90 0.79 0.74 0.69 6 h ef ,sta.
130 0.95 0.93 0.81 0.76 0.71
144 1.00 0.98 0.84 0.79 0.73
150 1.00 0.86 0.80 0.74 Limits:
180 0.93 0.86 0.79
s min d s d s cr,N
210 1.00 0.92 0.84
230 0.96 0.87 s cr,N 3 h ef,sta.
252 1.00 0.91
280 0.95
300 0.99
309 1.00
80
HSA stud anchor
fAN,red. : Influence of anchor spacing on reduced anchorage depth

Anchor spacing, HSA, HSA-R, HSA-F
s [mm] M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
35 0.68 0.67
55 0.78 0.76 0.72
75 0.89 0.86 0.80 s
90 0.96 0.93 0.86 fAN,red. 0.5
100 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.83 0.76 0.71 6 hef red.
105 1.00 0.92 0.85 0.77 0.72
120 0.98 0.90 0.81 0.76
126 1.00 0.92 0.83 0.77 Limits:
140 0.97 0.86 0.80 s min d s d s cr,N
150 1.00 0.89 0.82
180 0.97 0.88 s cr,N 3 h ef,sta
192 1.00 0.91
200 0.93
210 0.95
230 0.99
234 1.00
fRN,sta.: Influence of edge distance on standard anchorage depth

Edge distance, HSA, HSA-R, HSA-F
c [mm] M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
c
50 0.87 fRN,sta. 0.22 0.52
60 1.00 0.87 h ef ,sta.
65 0.92 0.90
72 1.00 0.97
75 1.00 Limits:
90 0.89 c min d c d c cr,N
105 1.00 0.87
120 0.96
c cr,N 1.5 h ef ,sta.
125 0.99 0.85 Note:
144 0.93 If more than 3 edges are smaller than ccr,
150 0.98 consult the Hilti technical advisory
154 1.00 service.
fRN,red. : Influence of edge distance on reduced anchorage depth
fR,N=1.0
Anchor size HSA, HSA-R, HSA-F M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

Standard effective smin [mm] Min. spacing 40 50 55 75 90 105
anchorage depth, hef,sta. cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 50 60 65 90 105 125
Reduced effective smin [mm] Min. spacing 35 35 55 100 100 100
anchorage depth, hef,red. cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 40 45 65 100 100 115
NRd,s [kN] HSA 5.4 9.2 17.2 24.5 43.7 63.8
NRd,s [kN] HSA-R 6.9 12.5 21.8 30.6 43.8 62.8
NRd,s [kN] HSA-F 5.4 9.2 17.2 24.5 43.7 63.8

1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , using NRd,s= NRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety
factor varies JMs varies with anchor type and size (as per relevant approval).
81
HSA stud anchor

(The Hilti CC method is a simplified version of ETAG Annex C.)
c2 >
1 .5
c
s
V rec,c/s 2
c c2 >
1.5
c
h>
1 .5
SHEAR c
The design shear resistance of a single anchor

is the lower of
Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are not met,
VRd,c : concrete edge resistance consult your Hilti technical advisory service.

The lowest concrete edge resistance must be calculated. All near edges must be checked, (not only the edge in
the direction of shear). The direction of shear is accounted for by the factor fE,V.
o
VRd,c VRd,c,sta. / red. f B f E,V f AR,V
V0Rd,c,sta./red. : Concrete edge design resistance

x at minimum edge distance c min
V0Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 2.6 3.8 4.8 8.8 12.5 18.2
V0Rd,c,red. [kN] Reduced anchorage depth 2.2 2.4 4.6 9.6 11.0 15.1

V0Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 2.6 3.8 4.8 8.8 12.5 18.2

0
V Rd,c,sta. [kN] Standard anchorage depth 2.6 3.8 4.8 8.8 12.5 18.2
1) o o o
82
HSA stud anchor

designation strength, strength,
fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²] fB
C20/25 20 25 1 25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
Limits:
C35/45 35 45 1.34
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55

diameter
fE,V : Influence of shear loading direction

Angle, E [°] fE,V Formulae:
0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2
fAR,V : Influence of edge distance and spacing

Formula for single-anchor fastening
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min
results s3
tabulated s2
Formula for two-anchor fastening valid
for s < 3c below s1
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c
General formula for n-anchor fastening (edge plus n-1 spacing) Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c and c2 > 1.5c. the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load.
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
83
HSA stud anchor
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0
7.5
8.0
3.67 3.98
4.11
4.29
4.43
4.57
4.62
4.76
4.91
4.95
5.10
5.25
5.29
5.44
5.59
5.63
5.79
5.95
5.98
6.14
6.30
6.33
6.50
6.67
2
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
11.0 anchors the page before. 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
VRd,s [KN] HSA 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5
VRd,s [KN] HSA-R 4.0 7.3 11.3 16.7 31.4 49.0
VRd,s [KN] HSA-F 3.6 6.5 9.9 14.2 26.5 41.5

1)
using VRd,s= VRk,s /JMs, where the partial safety factor varies JMs varies with anchor type and
size (as per relevant approval).
VRd = lower of VRd,c,sta./red. and VRd,s
84
HLC sleeve anchor
Features:
- for concrete and solid masonry
- no rotation in hole when tightening bolt HLC
- reliable pull-down of part fastened
Material:
- grade 6.8
HLC:
- steel galvanised to min. 5 microns Concrete Fire resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HLC, HLC-H, HLC-F, HLC-T, HLC-E
All data on this page applies to
x concrete, fcc t 20 N/mm2
x non-cracked concrete
Characteristic resistance, Rk [kN]:
Base material 6.5 8 10 12 16 20
2
NRk 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0
concrete, fcc t 20 N/mm
VRk 4.0 9.0 16.0 26.0 31.5 37.5
Design resistance, Rd [kN]:
Base material 6.5 8 10 12 16 20
2
NRd 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 4.2 5.6
VRd 1.1 2.5 4.5 7.3 8.8 10.5
1)
Base material 6.5 8 10 12 16 20
2
NRec 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
VRec 0.8 1.8 3.2 5.2 6.3 7.5
1)
The recommended resistance (Nrec and Vrec) for HLC-E is 0.5 kN.
Note: To apply the right tightening torque (setting operations see following page) to the HLC-F, we recommend
a hexagon socket wrench and for the HLC-T as well as HLC-E a screwdriver.
85
HLC sleeve anchor
Setting details
l
lc
dh
do
Tinst
hnom tfix
h1
h
Anchor size
2
10x100/68
12x100/62
16x100/52
16x140/92
20x115/60
20x150/95
6.5x40/20
6.5x60/40
10x50/18
10x60/28
10x80/48
12x55/17
12x75/37
16x60/12
20x80/25
6.5x25/5
8x40/12
8x55/27
8x70/42
8x85/57
Setting details 10x40/8
d [mm] Thread diameter M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16

d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter ¼” 8 10 12 16 20
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 30 40 47 56 72 85
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 20 28 32 38 48 55
[mm] Fixture (fastenable)
tfix 5 20 40 12 27 42 57 8 18 28 48 68 17 37 62 12 52 92 25 60 95
thickness
l [mm] Anchor length 30 45 65 46 61 76 91 48 58 68 88 108 65 85 110 72 112 152 95 130 165
lc [mm] Length under washer 25 40 60 40 55 70 85 40 50 60 80 100 55 75 100 60 100 140 80 115 150
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 5 8 25 40 50 80

Width across HLC 15
Sw [mm] 8 10 13 19 24
nut flats HLC-H 17
dh [mm] Clearance hole 7 9 11 13 17 21
[mm] Min. base material
h 60 70 80 90 100 120
thickness
TE-CX- TE-CX- TE-CX- TE-C-
Drill bit TE-CX-8/17 TE-CX-10/17
¼”/6” 12/17 16/17 20/22S
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M or TE35), a drill bit (see table above), a
hammer and a torque wrench.
Setting operations
Blow out dust and

Drill hole with drill bit. Install the anchor. Apply torque.
fragments.
86
HKD push-in anchor
Features:
- internal thread and small depth of embedment
- anchor flush with surface
- movement-controlled expansion
Material: HKD-S / HKD-SR*
HKD-S/-E: - galvanised >5 Pm
HKD-SR/-ER: - stainless steel : 1.4401, EN 10088
HKD-E/-ER*
A4
316
*
approved for suspended ceilings Concrete
Corrosion Fire Hilti Anchor
resistance resistance Programme
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HKD-S /-E

x steel failure
Tensile NRu,m 10.6 10.8 16.6 10.8 16.6 23.3 34.5 47.1
Shear VRu,m 6.5 9.1 9.1 9.6 10.4 18.3 28.5 45.1
Characteristic Resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete # C20/25
Tensile NRk 8.3 8.3 9.0 8.3 12.8 17.8 26.4 36.1
Shear VRk 5.0 7.0 7.0 7.4 8.0 14.1 21.9 34.7
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete fck,cube= 25 N/mm
Tensile NRd 4.6 4.6 5.0 4.6 7.1 9.9 17.6 24.1
Shear VRd 3.0 5.5 5.5 5.9 6.4 11.3 17.5 27.8
Recommended load Lrec [kN]: fck,cube= 25 N/mm
Tensile NRec 3.3 3.3 3.6 3.3 5.1 7.1 12.6 17.2
Shear VRec 2.1 3.9 3.9 4.2 4.6 8.1 12.5 19.9
Bolt: 5.6, EN ISO 898-1

Min. length of thread engagement = bolt thread size + 2mm
87
HKD push-in anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HKD-SR /-ER

x steel failure
Anchor size
Tensile NRu,m
Shear VRu,m
M8x30
10.8
10.9
M10x40
16.6
13.7
M12x50
23.3
24.3
M16x65
34.5
41.7
M20x80
47.1
66.3
2
Characteristic Resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete # C20/25
Anchor size M8x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80

Tensile NRk 8.3 12.8 17.8 26.4 36.1
Shear VRk 8.4 10.5 18.7 32.1 51.0
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: concrete fck,cube= 25 N/mm

Tensile NRd 4.6 7.1 9.9 17.6 24.1
Shear VRd 5.5 6.9 12.3 21.1 33.6
Recommended load Lrec [kN]: fck,cube= 25 N/mm

Tensile NRec 3.3 5.1 7.1 12.6 17.2
Shear VRec 3.9 4.9 8.8 15.1 24.0
Bolt: A 4-70, EN ISO 356

Min. length of thread engagement =1bolt thread size + 2mm
88
HKD push-in anchor
Setting details d0
ls
df
hef tfix
h1
HKD-E/-S
Anchor size
M6x30 M8x30 M8x40 M10x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80
Setting details
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 8 10 10 12 12 15 20 25
h0 [mm] Hole depth 32 33 43 33 43 54 70 85
hef [mm] Min. anchorage depth
30 30 40 30 40 50 65 80
smin/max [mm] Screwing depth 8/11 10/13 10/13 12/12 12/16 14/22 18/28 23/34
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 4 8 8 15 15 35 60 120
df [mm] Clearance hole 7 9 9 12 12 14 18 22
Min. base material
h [mm] 100 100 100 100 100 100 130 160
thickness
TE-CX- TE-C- TE-C-
TE-
TE-CX-12/17 15/17 20/22S 25/27S
Drill bit CX- TE-CX-10/17
TE-TX-12/22 TE-TX- TE-Y- TE-Y-
8/17
15/22 20/32S 25/32S
A rotary hammer (TE2, TE6,TE6-A, TE 15, TE 15-C, TE 18-M, TE 35, TE 55, TE 76-ATC,TE 76); a blow out
pump;
Manual setting tool HSD-G (M6 – M20);
Mechanical setting tool HSD-M (M6 – M20);
Setting operations
OK
Drill hole. Blow out dust and Install the anchor. Push in until marking is visible.
fragments.
89
HKD push-in anchor
Anchor mechanical properties
2 Nominal tensile HKD-S/-E 560 560 510 510 460 460

fuk [N/mm ]
strength HKD-SR/-ER 540 540 540 540 540 540
2
HKD-S/-E 440 440 410 410 375 375
fyk [N/mm ] Yield strength
HKD-SR/-ER 355 355 355 355 355 355
1)
2 Stressed cross- 28.8
As [mm ] 20.9 26.1 58.7 102.8 163.8
section 31.6
2)
1)
hnom = 30 mm
2)
hnom = 40 mm

2
TENSION N rec,p/c/s
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor s

c
is the lower of, h

Pull-out failure mode is not determinating, except for HKD-E/-S M8x30
o
x NRd,p NRd,p fB
Anchor size HKD-E/-S M8x30

0 1)
N Rd,p [kN] 5.0
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by N Rd,p =N /JMp, where the partial
Rk,p
o

Anchor size HKD-E/HKD-S M6x30 M8x30 M8x40 M10x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80
N0Rd,c1) [kN] 4.6 4.6 7.1 4.6 7.1 9.9 17.6 24.1
hef [mm] 30 30 40 30 40 50 65 80
Anchor size HKD-ER/HKD-SR M8x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80

0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] 4.6 7.1 9.9 17.6 24.1
hef [mm] 30 40 50 65 80
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by N Rd,c= N Rk,c/JMc,N, where the partial
safety factor JMc,N is equal to 1.8 for M6 to M12 and 1.5 for M16 to M20.
90
HKD push-in anchor

Concrete strength Cylinder compressive Cube compressive fck,cube
designation strength strength fB
fB
(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] 25
C20/25 20 25 1.0
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22 Limits:
C40/50 40 50 1.41
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
fAN: Influence of anchor spacing

s
Anchor spacing HKD-S/SR/-E/-ER
f AN 0. 5
6 h ef
s [mm] M6x30 M8x30 M8x40 M10x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80
60 0.83 0.83 0.83
80 0.94 0.94 0.83 0.94 0.83 Limits:
90 1.00 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.88 s min d s d s cr,N
100 0.92 0.92
110 0.96 0.96 s cr,N 3 h ef
120 1.00 1.00
130 0.93 0.83
140 0.97 0.86
150 1.00 0.88
160 0.91 0.83
175 0.95 0.86
190 0.99 0.90
205 0.93
220 0.96
235 0.99
fRN: Influence of edge distance
fRN=1
1) 49.0
NRd,s [kN] steel 4.6 4.0 7.3 7.3 11.6 11.6 16.9 31.4
NRd,s1) [kN] steel 5.6 5.1 9.2 9.2 12.4 13.4 21.1 37.2 59.1
NRd,s1) [kN] steel 5.8 6.7 11.4 11.4 12.4 13.4 23.7 37.2 59.1
NRd,s1) [kN] steel 8.8 8.8 11.4 11.4 12.4 13.4 23.7 37.2 59.1

NRd,s1) [kN] 9.1 11.5 20.4 35.1 55.7
1)
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance NRd,s by NRd,s= NRk,s/JMs, where the partial
safety factor JMs varies with anchor types and sizes.
91
HKD push-in anchor
c2 >
1 .5 V rec,c/s
c
s
SHEAR c c2 >
1.5
c
h>
The design shear resistance of a single anchor 1.5
c
is the lower of,
2

o

Anchor size HKD-E/-S M6x30 M8x30 M8x40 M10x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80
V0Rd,c1) [kN] 8.3 8.9 14.5 9.4 15.4 24.0 40.7 62.0
cmin [mm] 105 105 140 105 140 175 227 280
Anchor size HKD-RE/-RS M8x30 M10x40 M12x50 M16x65 M20x80

V0Rd,c1) [kN] 8.9 14.5 24.0 40.7 62.0
cmin [mm] 105 140 175 227 280
1) o o o
The shear design resistance is calculated from the shear characteristic resistance V Rk,c by V Rd,c= V Rk,c/JMc,V, where the partial

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
92
HKD push-in anchor

0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

distance
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min
results s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening valid for s < 3c tabulated s2
below s1
3c s c c 2,2 c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c
Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
3c s1 s 2 ... s n1 c the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
11.0 7.28 7.67
anchors at the top of the page.
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
93
HKD push-in anchor
VRd,s1) [kN] steel 4.6 2.4 4.4 4.4 5.9 6.4 10.1 17.5 27.8
VRd,s1) [kN] steel 5.6 3.0 5.5 5.5 5.9 6.4 11.3 17.5 27.8
VRd,s1) [kN] steel 5.8 4.0 5.5 5.5 5.9 6.4 11.3 17.5 27.8
VRd,s1) [kN] steel 8.8 4.2 5.5 5.5 5.9 6.4 11.3 17.5 27.8

VRd,s1) [kN] 5.5 6.9 12.3 21.1 33.6
1)
The shear design resistance is calculated from the shear characteristic resistance VRd,s by VRd,s= VRk,s/JMs, where the partial
2
safety factor JMs varies with anchor types and sizes.

94
HUS-H screw anchor
Features:
- Quick and easy setting operation
- Low expansion force in base material
- Through-fastening
- Simple and secure handling HUS-H
- Forged-on washer and hexagon head with no
protruding thread
- Two setting depths
- Removable
Material: Close edge
Fire Hilti Anchor
Concrete Tension zone distance/
Steel 1.5525, DIN EN 10263-4, Deltatone coating Close edge resistance
spacing
programme
Fire Hilti Anchor
Concrete Tension zone distance/
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor)

All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 98 - 102.
x steel failure

10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
Anchor size
hnom=60mm hnom=50mm hnom=70mm hnom=60mm hnom=60mm hnom=50mm hnom=70mm hnom=60mm
Tensile NRum,s 17.0 12.6 22.2 18.0 12.2 7.6 17.3 12.3
Shear VRum,s 19.9 19.9 27.1 27.1 19.9 19.9 27.1 27.1

10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
Anchor size
Tensile NRk 11.3 8.4 14.8 12.0 6.3 3.9 8.9 6.4
Shear VRk 15.4 15.4 21.6 21.6 15.4 15.4 21.6 21.6

10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
Anchor size
Tensile NRd 6.3 4.7 8.2 6.7 3.5 2.2 4.9 3.6
Shear VRd 10.3 10.3 14.4 14.4 10.3 10.3 14.4 14.4

10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
Anchor size
Tensile NRec 4.5 3.3 5.9 4.8 2.5 1.5 3.5 2.5
Shear VRec 7.3 7.3 10.3 10.3 7.3 7.3 10.3 10.3
95
HUS-H screw anchor
Setting details
lS
Ødf
Ød0
Tinst
2
h ef t fix
h nom
h0
h min
HUS-H
Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5

hnom = 60 mm hnom = 50 mm hnom = 70 mm hnom = 60 mm
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 8 8 10 10
h0 [mm] Min. hole depth 70 60 80 70
hnom [mm] Min. depth of embedment 60 50 70 60
h ef [mm] Effective depth of embedment 55 45 65 55

hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 110 100 130 110
ls [mm] Length of screw anchor 65 d l s d 150 55 d l s d 150 75 d l s d 160 65 d l s d 160
t fix [mm] Max. fastenable thickness ls – 60 ls – 50 ls – 70 ls – 60
df [mm] Clearance hole 12 12 14 14
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 35 35 45 45
SW [mm] Width across flats 13 13 15 15
96
HUS-H screw anchor
Setting tools
Anchor size 10.5 (hnom = 60mm) 10.5 (hnom = 50 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 70 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 60 mm)
Recommended drill bits TE-CX 8/17 TE-CX 8/17 TE-CX 10/22 TE-CX 10/17
Recommended hammer drills TE 1, TE 5, TE6, TE 6 A, TE 15 TE 5, TE6, TE 6 A, TE 15
Recommended socket wrench inserts S-NSD 13 ½ , S-NSD 13 ½ L S-NSD 15 ½ , S-NSD 15 ½ L
Recommended impact screw driver SI 100 (45 Nm – 100 Nm)
Short socket wrench insert
Long socket wrench insert with magnet Tangential impact screw driver
Setting operations
Drill hole Blow out dust and fragments Drive in screw anchor
Mechanical properties
Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
hnom = 60 mm hnom = 50 mm hnom = 70 mm hnom = 60 mm
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 38.5 38.5 54.1 54.1
2
2
f yk [N/mm ] Nominal yield strength 900 900 900 900
3
Wel [mm ] Elastic moment of resistance 33.7 33.7 56.1 56.1
Mrec [Nm] Recommended bending

1)
19.2 19.2 32.1 32.1
moment
1)
The recommended bending moment is calculated from Mrec MRd,s / J F 1.2 Wel fuk / J Ms JF , where the partial safety factor
J Ms 1.5 and the partial safety factor for action J F 1.4 .
97
HUS-H screw anchor

N rec,p/c/s
TENSION
s
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor is the lower of: c
h
NRd,p : Concrete pull-out resistance

2
o
NRd,p NRd,p fB

Concrete compressive strength, fck,cube(150) = 25 N/mm2
Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
hnom=60mm hnom=50mm hnom=70mm hnom=60mm
0 1)
N Rd,p [kN] for cracked concrete 3.5 2.2 4.9 3.6
0 1)
N Rd,p [kN] for non-cracked concrete 6.3 4.7 8.2 6.7
1)
The value of the pull-out design resistance is calculated from N°Rd,p=N°Rk,p/JMc, where the partial safety factor for concrete is JMc=1.8.
o
NRd,c NRd,c fB fA,N

Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] for cracked concrete 5.0 3.7 7.6 5.9
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] for non-cracked concrete 7.1 5.3 10.6 8.2
1)
The value of the tensile design load to resist concrete cone is calculated from N°Rd,c=N°Rk,c/JMc, where the partial safety factor for concrete
is JMc=2.06 for 10.5 and JMc=1.8 for 12.5.
98
HUS-H screw anchor

fB 0,4
fck,cube [N/mm²] § fck,cube ·
C20/25 20 25 1 fB ¨ ¸
C25/30 25 30 1.08 ¨ 25 ¸
© ¹
C30/37 30 37 1.17
C35/45 35 45 1.27
C40/50 40 50 1.32 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.37 25 N/mm2 d fck,cube d 60 N/mm2
C50/60 50 60 1.42
diameter
fA,N : Influence of anchor spacing,

Anchor HUS anchor size
spacing
s [mm] 10.5 (hnom = 60 mm) 10.5 (hnom = 50 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 70 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 60 mm)
55 0.72 0.77
60 0.74 0.80
65 0.76 0.82 0.72 0.76
70 0.78 0.85 0.74 0.78 s
f A,N 0 .5
75 0.80 0.87 0.76 0.80 4.5 h ef
80 0.82 0.90 0.77 0.82
85 0.84 0.92 0.79 0.84 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
90 0.86 0.94 0.81 0.86 scr,N 2.25 hef
95 0.88 0.97 0.82 0.88
100 0.90 0.99 0.84 0.90
105 0.92 0.86 0.92
110 0.94 0.88 0.94
115 0.96 0.89 0.96
120 0.98 0.91 0.98
125 0.93
130 0.94
135 0.96
140 0.98
Minimum edge distance

Minimum edge HUS anchor size
distance 10.5 (hnom = 60 mm) 10.5 (hnom = 50 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 70 mm) 12.5 (hnom = 60 mm)
cmin [mm] 55 55 65 65
Note: cmin # ccr,N therefore no influence of edge distance for c min d c d c cr,N
99
HUS-H screw anchor
Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5

0 1)
N Rd,s [kN] for cracked concrete 27.5 27.5 38.6 38.6
0 1)
N Rd,s [kN] for non-cracked concrete 27.5 27.5 38.6 38.6
1)
The value of the steel design tensile resistance is calculated from N°Rd,s=N°Rk,s/JMs, where the partial safety factor for steel is JMs=1.4.
NRd = lower of NRd,p NRd,c and NRd,s

2
SHEAR c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
The design shear resistance of a single anchor is c c2 >
1.5
c
the lower of: h>
1 .5
VRd,c : concrete edge resistance c

The lowest concrete edge resistance must be calculated. All nearby edges must be checked, (not only the edge
in the direction of shear). Shear direction is accounted for by the factor fE,V.
o

Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5
0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] for cracked concrete 2.8 2.6 3.8 3.7
0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] for non-cracked concrete 3.8 3.7 5.4 5.2
1)
The value of the concrete edge design resistance is calculated from V°Rd,p=V°Rk,p/JMc, where the partial safety factor for concrete is
JMc=1.5.
100
HUS-H screw anchor

fB
fck,cube [N/mm²] 0,4
C20/25 20 25 1
§ fck,cube ·
fB ¨ ¸
C25/30 25 30 1.08 ¨ 25 ¸
C30/37 30 37 1.17 © ¹
C35/45 35 45 1.27
C40/50 40 50 1.32 Limits:
C50/60 50 60 1.42
diameter
Angle E [°] Formulae: V ... applied shear force

fE,V
0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55° E
60 1.1 1
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min
results s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening valid for s < 3c tabulated s2
below s1
3c s c c 2,2 c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c
only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c

f AR ,V he free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
3nc min c min
101
HUS-H screw anchor
c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0
7.5
8.0
3.67 3.98
4.11
4.29
4.43
4.57
4.62
4.76
4.91
4.95
5.10
5.25
5.29
5.44
5.59
5.63
5.79
5.95
5.98
6.14
6.30
6.33
6.50
6.67
2
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
11.5 anchors the page before. 7.83
12.0 8.00
Anchor size 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5

0 1)
V Rd,s [kN] for cracked concrete 10.3 10.3 14.4 14.4
0 1)
V Rd,s [kN] for non-cracked concrete 10.3 10.3 14.4 14.4
1)
The value of the steel design shear load calculated from V°Rd,s=V°Rk,s/JMs, where the partial safety
factor for steel is JMs=1.5.

102
HUD-1 universal anchor
Features:
- base material: concrete, solid brick, hollow brick,
gas (aerated) concrete, gypsum panel
- high holding power
- suitable for through-fastening with screw
- resistance to turning in hole and premature
expansion
- low screw driving torque permits rapid setting HUD-1
- resistant to temperature, impact and chemicals
- optimal screw guidance
Material:
- PA 6 polyamide, contains no heavy metals
- contains no cadmium or lead
- contains no halogens or silicones
- in-place temperature range:
from –40 °C to +80 °C
- temperature when setting: from –10 °C to +40 °C
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HUD-1

x concrete, fcc = 30 N/mm2
x different kinds of base material
Anchor size HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1
Base material 5x25 6x30 8x40 10x50 12x60 14x70

Particle Particle Particle Particle
Wood- Wood- Wood- Wood- Wood- Wood-
board board board board
screw screw screw screw screw screw
screw screw screw screw
2 NRk 1.5 0.5 2.75 1.75 4.25 2.5 7.0 - 10.0 15.0
Concrete, fcc = 30 N/mm
VRk 2.0 - 4.5 - 6.25 - 11.0 - 15.0 28.0
1) NRk 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.3 0.75 0.5 1.0 - 1.25 1.5
Aerated concrete PB 2
VRk 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.4 - - - - -
NRk 0.5 0.3 0.75 0.5 1.5 1.0 2.0 - 2.5 3.0
Aerated concrete, PB 4
VRk 0.65 - 0.9 - 1.5 - - - - -
5)
NRk 0.85 0.3 1.75 0.75 3.0 1.75 4.0 - 5.0 5.0
Solid brick, Mz 20 – 1.8 – 1 NF
VRk 1.2 - 1.5 - 2.2 - - - - -
5)
Sand–lime solid block, NRk 1.25 0.75 2.5 1.5 4.25 2.0 5.0 - 7.5 7.5
KS12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRk 1.25 - 2.8 - 3.7 - 6.6 - - -
1) NRk 0.4 0.25 0.5 0.4 1.0 0.6 1.25 - 1.4 1.6
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 x 5DF
VRk 1.15 - 1.75 - - - - - - -
1)
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 x 5DF NRk 0.4 0.25 0.75 0.5 1.25 0.75 1.5 - 1.75 2.0
15 mm plastered, DIN 18550 VRk 1.15 - 1.75 - - - - - - -
3)
2) NRk 0.2 0.3 0.25 0.4 0.3 0.5 - 0.75 - -
Gypsum panel , 12.5 mm
VRk 0.45 - 0.7 - - - - - - -
3) 3) 4)
2) NRk 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 -
Gypsum panel 2x12.5 mm
VRk 0.45 - 0.7 - - - - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRk 0.45 - 0.60 - 0.90 - - - - -
12.5 mm VRk 0.72 - 0.96 - 1.44 - - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRk 0.45 - 1.20 - 1.80 - 2.10 - - -
2x12.5 mm VRk 0.72 - 1.92 - 2.88 - 3.36 - - -
103

2 NRd 0.42 0.14 0.77 0.5 1.2 0.7 2.0 - 2.8 4.2
VRd 0.6 - 1.3 - 1.75 - 3.1 - 4.2 7.8
1) NRd 0.08 0.06 0.14 0.08 0.21 0.14 0.28 - 0.35 0.42
VRd 0.06 - 0.07 - 0.11 - - - - -
NRd 0.14 0.08 0.21 0.14 0.4 0.3 0.6 - 0.7 0.8
Aerated concrete, PB4
VRd 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - - - - -
5)
NRd 0.24 0.08 0.5 0.21 0.84 0.5 1.1 - 1.4 1.4
2
VRd 0.34 - 0.4 - 0.62 - - - - -
5)
Sand–lime solid block, NRd 0.35 0.21 0.7 0.42 1.2 0.56 1.4 - 2.1 2.1
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRd 0.35 - 0.8 - 1.0 - 1.8 - - -
1) NRd 0.11 0.07 0.14 0.11 0.3 0.17 0.35 - 0.4 0.5
VRd 0.3 - 0.5 - - - - - - -
1)
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 x 5DF NRd 0.11 0.07 0.2 0.14 0.35 0.21 0.4 - 0.5 0.6
15 mm plastered, DIN 18550 VRd 0.32 - 0.5 - - - - - - -
3)
2) NRd 0.06 0.08 0.07 0.11 0.08 0.14 - 0.21 - -
VRd 0.13 - 0.2 - - - - - - -
3) 3) 4)
2) NRd 0.08 0.08 0.11 0.11 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.42 -
Gypsum panel , 2 x12.5 mm
VRd 0.13 0.2 - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRd 0.21 - 0.28 - 0.42 - - - - -
12.5 mm VRd 0.33 - 0.45 - 0.67 - - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRd 0.21 - 0.56 - 0.84 - 0.98 - - -
2x12.5 mm VRd 0.33 - 0.90 - 1.34 - 1.57 - - -
Recommended Load, Lrec [kN]:

2 NRec 0.3 0.1 0.55 0.35 0.85 0.5 1.4 - 2.0 3.0
VRec 0.4 - 0.9 - 1.25 - 2.2 - 3.0 5.6
1) NRec 0.06 0.04 0.1 0.06 0.15 0.1 0.2 - 0.25 0.3
VRec 0.04 - 0.05 - 0.08 - - - - -
NRec 0.1 0.06 0.15 0.1 0.3 0.2 0.4 - 0.5 0.6
VRec 0.13 - 0.18 - 0.3 - - - - -
5)
NRec 0.17 0.06 0.35 0.15 0.6 0.35 0.8 - 1.0 1.0
VRec 0.24 - 0.3 - 0.44 - - - - -
5)
Sand–lime solid block, NRec 0.25 0.15 0.5 0.3 0.85 0.4 1.0 - 1.5 1.5
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2 DF VRec 0.25 - 0.56 - 0.74 - 1.32 - - -
1) NRec 0.08 0.05 0.1 0.08 0.2 0.12 0.25 - 0.28 0.32
VRec 0.23 - 0.35 - - - - - - -
1)
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 x 5DF NRec 0.08 0.05 0.15 0.1 0.25 0.15 0.3 - 0.35 0.4
15 mm plastered DIN 18550 VRec 0.23 - 0.35 - - - - - - -
3)
2) NRec 0.04 0.06 0.05 0.08 0.06 0.1 - 0.15 - -
VRec 0.09 - 0.14 - - - - - - -
3) 3) 4)
2) NRec 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.1 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.3 -
Gypsum panel , 2 x12.5 mm
VRec 0.09 - 0.14 - - - - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRec 0.15 - 0.20 - 0.30 - - - - -
12.5 mm VRec 0.24 - 0.32 - 0.48 - - - - -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRec 0.15 - 0.40 - 0.60 - 0.70 - - -
2x12.5 mm VRec 0.24 - 0.64 - 0.96 - 1.12 - - -
104
1)
Drilling (TE-CX, TE-C) without hammering
2)
Drilling: Twist drill
3)
Only with screw 6 mm diameter
4)
5)
Setting details
5mm + ld
do
ld tfix
h1
Anchor size HUD –1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1 HUD-1

Setting details 5x25 6x30 8x40 10x50 12x60 14x70
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 5 6 8 10 12 14

h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 35 40 55 65 80 90
ld [mm] Anchor length 25 30 40 50 60 70
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness depends on screw lengths
Recommended woodscrew type SK/RK SK/RK SK/RK SK/RK/6K SK/RK/6K 6K
d [mm] Woodscrew diameter 3.5 - 4 4.5 - 5 5–6 7-8 8 - 10 10 - 12
Screw length ld + tfix + 5 mm
Drill bit TE-CX-5/12 TE-CX-6/12 TE-CX-8/17 TE-CX-10/17 TE-CX-12/17 TE-CX-14/17
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C or TE18-M), a drill bit (See table above.) and
a screwdriver (SF 100, SF 120, SD45 or SU25).
Setting operations

Drill hole with drill bit. Install anchor. Drive screw into anchor.
105
HUD-L universal anchor
Features:
aerated concrete, gypsum panel
- special length to cope with thick hollow brick /
masonry
- suitable for through-fastening with screw HUD-L
- resistance to turning in hole and premature
expansion
- low screw driving torque permits rapid setting
- resistant to temperature, impact and chemicals
- optimised screw guidance
Material:
2
- PA 6 polyamide, contains no heavy metals
- contains no halogens and silicones
from –40 °C to +80 °C
- Temperature when setting: from –10 °C to +40 °C
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HUD-L

• concrete: fcc = 30 N/mm2
• different kinds of base material
• no edge distance and spacing influence
Anchor size HUD-L 6x50 HUD-L 8x60 HUD-L 10x70

Base material Woodscrew 5 mm Woodscrew 6 mm Woodscrew 8 mm
1) 2 NRk 4.5 6.5 9.0

Concrete , f cc = 30 N/mm
VRk 5.0 7.5 12.5
2) NRk 0.6 1.25 2.0

VRk 1.0 1.75 3.5
NRk 1.2 2.5 3.5
VRk - - -
NRk 2.5 4.0 7.0
VRk - - -
Sand–lime solid block, NRk 2.75 4.5 7.5
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2PDF VRk - - -
Sand–lime hollow block, NRk 1.25 1.5 2.0
KSL 12 – 1.4 – 2DF VRk - - -
2) NRk 0.75 1.0 1.5

Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF
VRk 2.0 3.5 6.5
2)
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF NRk 0.75 1.0 1.5
15 mm plastered, DIN 18550 VRk 2.0 3.5 6.5
3)
2)
Gypsum panel , 2x12.5 mm NRk 0.5 0.75 0.6
DIN 18180 VRk 0.75 1.75 -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRk 1.50 1.80 2.10
2x12.5mm VRk 2.40 2.90 3.36
106

1) 2 NRd 1.3 1.8 2.5
Concrete , fcc = 30 N/mm
VRd 1.4 2.1 3.5
2) NRd 0.17 0.35 056
VRd 0.3 0.5 1.0
NRd 0.34 0.7 1.0
VRd - - -
NRd 0.7 1.1 2.0
Solid brick Mz 20 – 1.8 – 1 NF
VRd - - -
Sand–lime solid block NRd 0.77 1.3 2.1
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRd - - -
Sand–lime hollow block NRd 0.35 0.4 0.56
KSL 12 – 1.4 – 2DF VRd - - -
2) NRd 0.2 0.3 0.4
Hollow brick HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF
VRd 0.56 1.0 1.8
2)
Hollow brick HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF NRd 0.2 0.3 0.4
15 mm plastered, DIN 18550 VRd 0.56 1.0 1.8
2) 3)
Gypsum panel , 2x12.5 mm NRd 0.14 0.2 0.17
DIN 18180 VRd 0.2 0.5 -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRd 0.7 0.84 0.98
2x12.5mm VRd 1.12 1.34 1.57

1) 2 NRec 0.9 1.3 1.8
Concrete , f,cc = 30 N/mm
VRec 1.0 1.5 2.5
2) NRec 0.12 0.25 0.4
VRec 0.2 0.35 0.7
NRec 0.24 0.5 0.7
VRec - - -
NRec 0.5 0.8 1.4
VRec - - -
Sand–lime solid block, NRec 0.55 0.9 1.5
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRec - - -
Sand–lime hollow block, NRec 0.25 0.3 0.4
KSL 12 – 1.4 – 2DF VRec - - -
2) NRec 0.15 0.2 0.3
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF
VRec 0.4 0.7 1.3
2)
Hollow brick, HlzB 12-1.0 - 5DF NRec 0.15 0.2 0.3
15 mm plastered, DIN 18550 VRec 0.4 0.7 1.3
2) 3)
Gypsum panel , 2x12.5 mm NRec 0.1 0.15 0.12
DIN 18180 VRec 0.15 0.35 -
Fibre reinforced gypsum panel NRd 0.50 0.60 0.70
2x12.5mm VRd 0.80 0.96 1.12
1)
Clean the hole
2)
Drilling without hammering
3)
Suitable for fitting hexagonal screws by hand
107
Setting details
h1
ld

do

t fix
5 mm + ld + tfix
Setting details
Anchor size
HUD-L 6x50 HUD-L 8x60 HUD-L 10x70 2
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 6 8 10
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 70 80 90
ld [mm] Anchor length 50 60 70
Recommended woodscrew diameter common woodscrews and particle board screws
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness depends on screw length
d [mm] Woodscrew diameter 4.5 - 5 5-6 7-8

Req. length of screw
ld [mm] engagement in base 55 65 75
material
Drill bit TE-CX-6/17 TE-CX-8/17 TE-CX-10/22
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C or TE18-M), a drill bit (See table above.) and a
screwdriver (SF 100, SF 120, SD45 or SU25).
Setting operations
Put part being fastened in place

Drill hole with drill bit. Install anchor.
and drive screw into anchor.
Put part being fastened in place and

Drill hole with drill bit. Drive screw into anchor.
install anchor.
108
HGN gas concrete anchor
Features:
- base material: lightweight concrete, gypsum panel,
aerated concrete and other lightweight building
materials
- through-fastening possible
- universal in application
HGN
- good keying thanks to large fins
Material:
- PA 6 polyamide, containing no heavy metals
- containing no cadmium or lead
- free of halogens and silicones
from –40 °C to +80 °C
Basic loading data (for a single-anchor fastening): HGN

• different kinds of base material
Mean ultimate resistance, Ru,m [kN]:
Anchor size HGN HGN HGN
Base material 10x100 12 14

NRu,m 2.9 2.9 4.3
PB 2 (G 2)
VRu,m 5.9 3.9 4.6
NRu,m 5.4 4.4 6.0
PB 4 (G4)
VRu,m 10.3 6.8 8.0
NRu,m - 10.4 12.4
PB 6 (G6)
VRu,m - 9.8 11.0
NRu,m 3.5 3.5 4.5
P 3.3 (GB 3.3)
VRu,m 7.0 4.7 5.5
NRu,m - 6.5 7.9
P 4.4 (GB 4.4)
VRu,m - 6.8 8.0
NRu,m - 3.7 5.0
Gypsum panel
VRu,m - 5.0 5.9
NRu,m - 3.1 4.2
Pumice concrete
VRu,m - 4.3 5.1
The compressive strengths of the base materials used to determine the data were as follows:
PB 2 = 2.5 N/mm2, > 0.3 kg/dm3
PB 4 = 5.0 N/mm2, > 0.5 kg/dm3
PB 6 = 7.5 N/mm2, > 0.6 kg/dm3
P 3.3 = 3.5 N/mm2, > 0.5 kg/dm3
P 4.4 = 5.0 N/mm2, > 0.6 kg/dm3
gypsum = 7.8 N/mm2

pumice concrete = 4.7 N/mm2
109

NRd 0.63 0.7 0.9
PB 2 (G 2)
VRd 1.1 0.8 1.0
NRd 1.2 1.0 1.4
PB 4 (G4)
VRd 2.0 1.3 1.75
NRd - 2.2 2.8
PB 6 (G6)
VRd - 2.0 2.24
NRd 0.8 0.9 1.1
P 3.3 (GB 3.3)
P 4.4 (GB 4.4)

VRd
NRd
VRd
1.3
-
-
1.0
1.4
1.3
1.1
1.7
1.75
2
NRd - 0.7 0.8
gypsum panel
VRd - 0.8 1.0
NRd - 0.5 0.7
pumice concrete
VRd - 0.8 1.1

NRec 0.45 0.5 0.65
PB 2 (G 2)
VRec 0.8 0.6 0.7
NRec 0.85 0.75 1.0
PB 4 (G4)
VRec 1.4 0.95 1.25
NRec - 1.6 2.0
PB 6 (G6)
VRec - 1.4 1.6
NRec 0.6 0.65 0.8
P 3.3 (GB 3.3)
VRec 0.9 0.7 0.8
NRec - 1.0 1.2
P 4.4 (GB 4.4)
VRec - 0.95 1.25
NRec - 0.5 0.55
gypsum panel
VRec - 0.55 0.7
NRec - 0.35 0.5
pumice concrete
VRec - 0.6 0.8
If there is a sustained tensile load at temperatures above 40 °C, the recommended load should be reduced.
110
Setting details
do d
l=hnom
tfix
h1
Anchor size
HGN 10x100 HGN 12 HGN 14*
Setting details
d0 [mm] Drill bit and anchor diameter 10 12 14
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 115 95 110
ls [mm] Required screw length l + tfix + 5 l + tfix + 5 l + tfix + 5
d [mm] Required screw shank diameter 7 (6-8) 8-10 10-(12)
Drill bit TE-CX-10/17, TE-CX-10/22 TE-CX-12/22 TE-CX-14/22
* Recommendation: HGN 14 with 12 mm diameter screw

PB 4 (G4), PB 6 (G 6): Hole of 15mm diameter.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M), hammer, drill bit (See table above.) and
a screwdriver (SF 100, SF 120, SD45, SU25).
Setting operations
Blow out dust and

Drill hole with drill bit. Install / tap in anchor Part fastened Drive screw into anchor.
fragments.
111
HLD light-duty anchor
Features:
- base material: virtually all existing building
materials, especially panels and similar
- universal/versatile in thin-walled and solid base
materials, even if they are of low strength
- bridges a large range of wall/panel thickness
- safe against rotation in hole
- excellent screw guidance
- simple setting HLD
- setting check through noticeable increase in
resistance when the screw has been driven home
Material:
- polyamide PA 6, containing no heavy metals
2
- without cadmium and lead
- free of halogens and silicones
from –40 °C to +80 °C
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HLD

x concrete: fcc = 15 N/mm2
x table values are for tensile and shear load

Anchor working Size of anchor
Base Material 1)
Principle HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4
2
Concrete: fcc = 15 N/mm C 1.25 2.0 2.5
Gypsum panel B 0.4 0.4 0.4
Fibre reinforced gypsum
A 0.30 - -
panel 12.5mm
A - 0.60 -
panel 2x12.5mm
Asbestos cement A 0.6 0.6 0.6
Hollow brick, fired A/B 0.75 0.75 0.75
Sand-lime solid block
C 1.25 2.0 2.5
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF
Woodwool panel A - 0.25 0.25
1)
See setting details page 97.

Base Material
principle HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4
2
A 0.14 - -
panel 12.5mm
A - 0.28 -
panel 2x12.5mm
C 0.35 0.56 0.7
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF
112
HLD light-duty anchor

Base Material
principle HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4
2
A 0.1 - -
panel 12.5mm
A - 0.2 -
panel 2x12.5mm
C 0.25 0.4 0.5
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF
At temperatures above 40 °C, the recommended load should be reduced for sustained tensile loading.
Setting details
C
A B
h1
do
do
tfix
h tfix tfix
ls
Anchor size
HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4 HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4 HLD 2 HLD 3 HLD 4
Setting details
1)
d 0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 9 - 10 9
h1 [mm] Hole depth - - - - - - 50 56 66
ls [mm] Screw length 33 + tfix 40 + tfix 49 + tfix 33 + tfix 40 + tfix 49 + tfix 40 + tfix 46 + tfix 56 + tfix
d [mm] Screw diameter 4–5 5-6
h [mm] Wall/panel thickness 4 – 12 15 – 19 24 – 28 12 – 16 19 – 23 28 – 32 from 35 from 42 from 50

1)
Drill bit TE-CX-10/17, TE-CX-9/22 TE-CX-9/22
Anchor working principle A B C

1)
Use a 9 mm twist drill for gypsum panel and woodwool panels, but a 10 mm drill bit for concrete.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2; TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M) and a screwdriver (SF100, SF120, SD45,
SU25).
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Install the HLD anchor. Drive in the screw.
113
HRD-U/-S frame anchor
Features:
gas (Gas (aerated)) concrete
- ready-to-use anchor (anchor body and matching screw)
HRD-U10
- suitable for through-fastening (HRD-U10, HRD-S10)
- tap-in stops eliminate premature expansion
- low tightening torque
Material: HRD-U14
- PA 6 / 6.6 Polyamide, contains no heavy metals
- in-place temperature range: HRD-S10
from –40 °C to +80 °C
Screw:
Galvanised:
- with hexagon, hex + integrated washer and

2
countersunk head
- 5 microns, yellow chromated, 6.8, ISO 898 T1
Hot-dip - with hexagon and hex + integrated washer, 45 microns,
galvanised: grey,
Stainless steel: - with hexagon, countersunk head, A4
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HRD-U10, HRD-U14, HRD-S10

• concrete, fcc ≥ 20 N/mm2
• different kinds of base materials
• min. component thickness (See table below.)
Anchor size HRD-U 10 HRD-U 14 HRD-S 10

Base material
2 NRk 9.0 11.5 7.0
Concrete, fck,cube = 20 N/mm
VRk 10.0 12.5 9.0
NRk 4.0 6.0 3.0
Solid brick, Mz 12
VRk 5.0 6.25 4.0
NRk 6.0 8.0 4.0
Solid brick, Mz 20
VRk 6.0 6.25 5.0
Sand-lime solid brick, NRk 7.5 8.5 6.0
KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRk 6.0 7.5 5.0
Hollow sand-lime brick, NRk 4.0 5.0 2.0
KSL 6 (U 10) KSL 12 (U14) VRk 5.0 6.25 2.5
NRk 1.25 1.5 1.25
Hollow lightweight concrete block, (D) KHbl 1-4
VRk 1.25 1.5 1.25
NRk 1.25 2.5 1.25
Solid lightweight concrete block, (D) V 2
VRk 1.25 1.5 1.25
1) NRk 1.5 1.5 1.0
Aerated concrete , PB 2
VRk 2.5 3.0 1.75
NRk 3.0 3.0 1.75
VRk 4.0 5.0 2.5
NRk 4.0 4.0 2.5
VRk 5.0 6.25 3.25
Min. component thickness (cm)
Concrete 12.0 10.0
Other base materials 11.5
114
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: Recommended load, L rec [kN]:
Anchor size HRD-U 10 HRD-U 14 HRD-S 10 Anchor HRD-U 10 HRD-U 14 HRD-S 10

Base material size
2 NRd 2.5 3.2 2.0 NRec 1.8 2.3 1.4

VRd 2.8 3.5 2.5 VRec 2.0 2.5 1.8
NRd 1.1 1.7 0.8 NRec 0.8 1.2 0.6
Solid brick, Mz 12
VRd 1.4 1.75 1.1 VRec 1.0 1.25 0.8
NRd 1.7 2.2 1.1 NRec 1.2 1.6 0.8
Solid brick, Mz 20
VRd 1.7 1.75 1.4 VRec 1.2 1.25 1.0
Sand-lime solid brick, NRd 2.1 2.4 1.7 NRec 1.5 1.7 1.2
KS12 – 1.6 – 2DF VRd 1.7 2.1 1.4 VRec 1.2 1.5 1.0
Hollow sand-lime brick, NRd 1.1 1.4 0.6 NRec 0.8 1.0 0.4
KSL 6 (U 10) KSL 12 (U14) VRd 1.4 1.75 0.7 VRec 1.0 1.25 0.5
Hollow lightweight concrete NRd 0.35 0.4 0.35 NRec 0.25 0.3 0.25
block, (D) KHbl 1-4 VRd 0.35 0.4 0.35 VRec 0.25 0.3 0.25
Solid lightweight concrete NRd 0.35 0.7 0.35 NRec 0.25 0.5 0.25
block, (D) V 2 VRd 0.35 0.4 0.35 VRec 0.25 0.3 0.25
1) NRd 0.4 0.4 0.3 NRec 0.3 0.3 0.2

Aerated concrete , PB 2
VRd 0.7 0.8 0.5 VRec 0.5 0.6 0.35
NRd 0.8 0.8 0.5 NRec 0.6 0.6 0.35
VRd 1.1 1.4 0.7 VRec 0.8 1.0 0.5
NRd 1.1 1.1 0.7 NRec 0.8 0.8 0.5
VRd 1.4 1.75 0.9 VRec 1.0 1.25 0.65
1)
Holes must be produced by rotary drilling only. At temperatures above 40 °C, the recommended figure should be reduced if there is a
sustained tensile load.
Permissible bending moments, Md [Nm]:
Anchor HRD-U 10 HRD-U 14 HRD-S 10

Tensile load NRec = 0 kN NRec = 1.6 kN NRec = 0 kN NRec = 2.3 kN NRec = 0 kN NRec = 1.4 kN
Galvanised screw 10.1 8.8 24.8 22.4 10.1 9.0
Stainless-steel screw 9.5 8.2 23.3 18.2 9.5 8.4
The permissible bending moments for the screws under loads between the two limits given in the table may be
interpolated.
Anchor spacing, smin, and edge distance, cmin (cm):
HRD-U 10 HRD-U 14 HRD-S 10

Base material
Spacing Edge Spacing Edge Spacing Edge
2
Concrete, fcc = 20 N/mm 10 10 10 7 10 5
Solid brick, Mz 12 10 10 25 10 10 10
Sand-lime solid brick, KS 12 – 1.6 – 2DF 10 10 25 10 10 10
Hollow sand-lime brick, KSL 6 (U 10) KSL 12 (U14) 25 10 25 10 15 10
Hollow lightweight concrete block, (D) KHbl 1-4 25 10 25 10 15 10
Solid lightweight concrete block, (D) V 2 25 10 25 10 15 10
Aerated concrete, PB 2 10 10 15 15 10 10
115
Setting details
HRD-S10 HRD-U10 HRD-U14
l l
l
do
do
do
T40 T40 T40

hnom
hnom hnom
h1 tfix
h1 tfix h1 tfix
Setting details
Anchor size
x80/10 x100/30 x120/50

HRD-U 10
x140/70 x160/90 x180/110 x200/130 x230/160

2
d0 [mm] Drill bit and anchor diameter 10
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 80
hnom [mm] Min. anchorage depth 70
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 160
l [mm] Anchor length 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 230
1)
Tinst [Nm] Max. tightening torque 18 / 5
TE-CX- TE-CX-
Drill bit size TE-CX-10/22 TE-CX-10/27
10/17 10/47
Anchor size HRD-U 14
Setting details x80/10 x110/40 x140/70 x160/90 x180/110 x200/130 x230/160 x270/200 x310/240 x350/280
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 10 40 70 90 110 130 160 200 240 280
l [mm] Anchor length 80 110 140 160 180 200 230 270 310 350
1)
TE-CX-
Drill bit size TE-CX-14/22 TE-CX-14/27 TE-CX-14/47
14/17
Anchor size HRD-S 10
Setting details x60/10 x80/30 x100/50 x120/70 x140/90 x160/110 x180/130

tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 10 30 50 70 90 110 130
l [mm] Anchor length 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

1)
TE-CX-
Drill bit size TE-CX-10/22 TE-CX-10/27
10/17
1) st nd
1 value: solid base material / 2 value: hollow base material
Anchor holes in masonry or gas (aerated) concrete may only be drilled with a rotary action (without hammering). Holes in the part to be
fastened should be max. 0.5 mm larger than the anchor diameter.
116
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M or TE35), a drill bit (See table above.), a
hammer and a screwdriver (SF 100, SF 120, SD45 or SU25).
Setting operations

Drill hole with drill bit. Blow out dust and fragments. Install anchor. Drive screw into anchor.

117
HPS-1 impact anchor
Features:
- base material: concrete and solid or hollow brick
- ready-to-use anchor for through-fastening
- bridging of gaps due to collapsible section HPS-1
- impact expansion by hammer or screwdriver
- wide product programme
- removable and adjustable with a screwdriver
Material:
- PA 6.6 polyamide, contains no heavy metals
Drive screw:
from –40 °C to +80 °C
- steel galvanised to 5 microns
2
- stainless steel, A2 grade
- copper
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HPS-1

• concrete, fcc = 20 - 45 N/mm2
• different kinds of bricks
• aerated concrete
Anchor size
HPS-1 5/0 - HPS-1 6/0 – HPS-1 6/30 - HPS-1 8/0 - HPS-1 8/60 –
Base material HPS-1 5/15 HPS-1 6/25 HPS-1 6/40 HPS-1 8/40 HPS-1 8/100
2
NRu,m 1.0 1.75 1.75 2.5 2.5
Concrete, fcc= 20 – 45 N/mm
VRu,m 2.3 3.4 2.2 5.6 3.0
NRu,m 1.0 1.75 1.75 2.5 2.5
VRu,m 2.3 3.4 2.2 5.6 3.0
Sand-lime solid block, NRu,m 1.0 1.75 1.75 2.5 2.5

KS 12 – 1.6 – 2 DF VRu,m 2.3 3.5 1.8 3.5 2.2
NRu,m - - - - -
VRu,m 0.8 1.0 0.7 1.7 0.9
The ultimate loads were determined in holes drilled with drill bits of the minimum diameter.
118
HPS-1 impact anchor
Anchor size HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1

HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1
5/5- 6/0- 6/30- 8/10- 8/60-
Base material 4/0 5/0 8/0
5/15 6/25 6/40 8/40 8/100
2
NRd 0.07 0.14 0.21 0.35 0.35 0.42 0.56 0.56
VRd 0.21 0.42 0.49 0.77 0.49 0.70 1.26 0.70
NRd 0.07 0.14 0.21 0.35 0.35 0.42 0.56 0.56
Engineering brick, 12 hole, class B
VRd 0.21 0.42 0.49 0.77 0.49 0.70 1.26 0.70
NRd 0.07 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.42 0.42
Perforated brick, 3 hole cammon
VRd 0.21 0.42 0.49 0.77 0.49 0.7 1.26 0.77
NRd - - 0.11 0.21 0.21 0.28 0.35 0.35
Themalite block, 7 N lightweight
VRd - - 0.21 0.35 0.21 0.56 0.56 0.35
Themalite block, NRd - - 0.07 0.11 0.11 - 0.17 0.17
½ N lightweight VRd - - 0.14 0.21 0.14 - 0.35 0.21
1) NRd - - 0.11 0.14 0.14 - 0.21 0.21
Aerated concrete, PB 4, PB 6
VRd - - 0.14 0.17 0.14 - 0.42 0.28
NRd 0.07 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.49 0.49
Extruded brick, Boral 10
VRd 0.21 0.35 0.42 0.56 0.35 0.7 1.26 0.77
Anchor size HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1

HPS-1 HPS-1 HPS-1
5/5- 6/0- 6/30- 8/10- 8/60-
Base material 4/0 5/0 8/0
5/15 6/25 6/40 8/40 8/100
2
NRec 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.4
VRec 0.15 0.3 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.5 0.9 0.5
NRec 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.4
Engineering brick, 12 hole, class B
VRec 0.15 0.3 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.5 0.9 0.5
NRec 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.3
Perforated brick, 3 hole cammon
VRec 0.15 0.3 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.5 0.9 0.55
NRec - - 0.08 0.15 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.25
Themalite block ,7 N, lightweight
VRec - - 0.15 0.25 0.15 0.4 0.4 0.25
Themalite block, NRec - - 0.05 0.08 0.08 - 0.12 0.12
½ N lightweight VRec - - 0.1 0.15 0.1 - 0.25 0.15
1) NRec - - 0.08 0.1 0.1 - 0.15 0.15
Aerated concrete, PB 4, PB 6
VRec - - 0.1 0.12 0.1 - 0.3 0.2
NRec 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.35 0.35
Extruded brick, Boral 10
VRec 0.15 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.25 0.5 0.9 0.55
1)
Hole drilled with TE-CX drill bit, without hammering action.
If at temperatures above 40 °C loads are sustained, recommended loads should be reduced.
Setting details
l
~ 2mm
do dn
hnom tfix
h1
119
HPS-1 impact anchor
Anchor size HPS-1

4/0 5/0 5/5 5/10 5/15 6/0 6/5 6/10 6/15 6/25 6/30 6/40
Setting details
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

h0 [mm] Hole depth 25 25 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Fixture
tfix [mm] (fastenable) 2 2 5 10 15 2 5 10 15 25 30 40
thickness
l [mm] Anchor length 21.5 22 27 32 37 27 32 37 42 52 57 67
dn [mm] Head diameter 7 7.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
2
Drill bit TE-C-4/9.5 TE-CX-5/12 TE-CX-6/12
Anchor size HPS-1

8/0 8/10 8/20 8/30 8/40 8/60 8/80 8/100
Setting details
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

h0 [mm] Hole depth 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Fixture
tfix [mm] (fastenable) 2 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
thickness
l [mm] Anchor length 32.5 42.5 52.5 62.5 72.5 92.5 112.5 132.5
dn [mm] Head diameter 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Drill bit TE-CX-8/17
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2; TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C or TE18-M), a hammer, a Pozi cross-recess
screwdriver, size 2 or 1, or a screwdriver with Pozi cross-recess bit, size 2 or 1.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit Install anchor. Hammer in anchor.

Drill hole with drill bit. Install anchor. Drive in anchor.
120
HUS screw anchor
Features:
- base material: concrete, gas (aerated) concrete,
sand-lime blocks, hollow bricks,
HUS
- removable
- stand-off fastening
- small edge distances and spacing
HUS-S
- easy to drive using tangential impact screwdriver
Material:
- grade 10.9, 19MnB4, zinc plated to 5 microns,
- yellow chromated HUS-H
Small edge
HUS-A
Concrete Fire resistance IFT assessment
distance/ spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HUS, HUS-S, HUS-H, HUS-A
• concrete: C20/25
• sand-lime blocks, aerated concrete, hollow bricks
Base material Tensile load, NRk [kN] Shear load ,VRk [kN], for edge distance
≥ 60 mm ≥ 30 mm
Concrete, C20/25 5.0 8.0 2.5
KS sand-lime block 5.0 5.5 2.0
1)
Hlz 0.8/12 hollow brick 0.5 2.0 1.0
2)
PB2/PB4 aerated concrete 1.0 1.5 0.5
PB6 aerated concrete 1.0 3.0 1.0
Base material Tensile load, NRd [kN] Shear load, VRd [kN], for edge distance
≥ 60 mm ≥ 30 mm
Concrete, C20/25 1.4 2.2 0.7
1)
Hlz 0.8/12 hollow brick 0.14 0.6 0.3
2)
1)
The holes must be drilled using rotary action only (no hammering action).
2)
Holes must not be drilled in PB2/PB4 gas (aerated) concrete (not permitted).
Note:
Data is available on request for fastenings in other base materials or when other drill bits are used. Alternatively,
on-site tests must be carried out.
When tightening the screw anchor in soft base materials and in perforated brick, care must be taken not to apply
too much torque. If the screw anchor is overtightened, the fastening may become unusable.
121
HUS screw anchor
Base material Tensile load, Nrec [kN] Shear load, Vrec [kN], for edge distance
≥ 60 mm ≥ 30 mm
Concrete, C20/25 1.0 1.6 0.5
1)
Hlz 0.8/12 hollow brick 0.1 0.4 0.2
2)
1)
The holes must be drilled using rotary action only (no hammering action).
2)
Holes must not be drilled in PB2/PB4 gas (aerated) concrete (not permitted).
Setting details
2
h0 h0
dh dh
d0 d0
hnom tfix hnom tfix

l l
HUS HUS-S
h0
h0
dh
dG
d0 d0
hnom tfix
l hnom lG
l
HUS-H HUS-A
122
HUS screw anchor
Anchor size Aerated concrete

Concrete Solid brick Hollow brick
Setting details PB2/PB4 PB6
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 6 6 6 - 6
1), 2)
h0 [mm] Hole depth 40 50 70 - 60
2)
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 30 40 60 60 60
tfix [mm] Fixture thickness l - hnom
HUS-A M8 18
lG [mm] Length of metric thread
HUS-A M10 21
Stand-off fastening 6.2

dh [mm] Through hole
Tighten component against base material 8 – 8.5
HUS 35 - 220
HUS-S 100 - 220

HUS-H 35 - 120
HUS-A 65.5 – 91.5

TE-CX-6/17
Drill bit TE-CX-6/17 TKI-S-6/20 -
TKI-S-6/20
HUS: S-B TXI 40 bit; HUS-S: S-B TXI 30 bit;
Accessories
HUS-H: S-NSD 13 L socket or S-B TXI 40 bit; HUS-A: S-NS 13 3/8 L socket
1)
When a hole is drilled in a downward direction, we recommend that the drilling depth is increased by 10 mm
as the drilling dust and fragments are difficult to blow out and additional dust and fragments are created when
the screw anchor is driven in.
2)
If a layer of plaster exists, the drilling depth, setting depth and screw anchor length must be increased by the
thickness of the plaster layer.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15-C or TE18-M), a screwdriver (TKI 2500, TCI 12), a drill bit
and a bit (See table above.) and a blow-out bump.
Setting operations
HUS:
Install anchor with an electric

Drill hole with drill bit. Blow out dust and fragments.
screwdriver.
HUS-S:

screwdriver.
123
HUS screw anchor
Setting operations
HUS-H:

screwdriver.
HUS-A:
2
screwdriver.
124
HHD-S cavity anchor
Features:
- base material: particle / chip board, drywall
panel, hollow blocks
- max. holding power in thin-walled base material
owing to optimised keying hold
- easy, rapid and controlled setting
HHD-S
- prefitted screw in all sizes
Material:
2
HHD-S cavity anchor: - fu = 270 N/mm
Screw: - ISO 8457
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HHD-S

x pre-setting
x through-fastening
Anchor size
M4/12x38 M4/19x45 M5/12x52 M5/25x65
Base material
NRk VRk NRk VRk NRk VRk NRk VRk
Particle / chip board 10 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.6 1.5
Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.6 1.5
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.6 1.5
Drywall panel 2x12.5 [mm] 1.2 3.0
Gypsum fibreboard 10 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.9 1.8
Gypsum fibreboard 12.5 [mm] 0.9 1.8 1.5 3.0
Gypsum fibreboard 2x12.5 [mm] 2.7 3.3
Hollow brick 20 [mm] 0.3 0.9
Anchor size
M6/12x52 M6/24x65 M8/12x54 M8/24x66
Base material
NRk VRk NRk VRk NRk VRk NRk VRk

Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.6 1.5
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.6 1.5 0.6 1.5
Drywall panel 2x12.5 [mm] 0.9 2.7 1.2 3.0
Gypsum fibreboard 2x12.5 [mm] 2.4 5.4 2.7 5.1
Hollow brick 20 [mm]
125
HHD-S cavity anchor
Anchor size
M4/12x38 M4/19x45 M5/12x52 M5/25x65
Base material
NRd VRd NRd VRd NRd VRd NRd VRd
Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.7
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.7
1.25 1.5
2
Gypsum fibreboard 2x12.5 [mm]
Anchor size
M6/12x52 M6/24x65 M8/12x54 M8/24x66
Base material
NRd VRd NRd VRd NRd VRd NRd VRd

Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.7
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.7
Anchor size
M4/12x38 M4/19x45 M5/12x52 M5/25x65
Base material
NRec VRec NRec VRec NRec VRec NRec VRec
Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5
Gypsum fibreboard 2x12.5 [mm] 0.9 1.1
126
HHD-S cavity anchor
Anchor size
M6/12x52 M6/24x65 M8/12x54 M8/24x66
Base material
NRec VRec NRec VRec NRec VRec NRec VRec
Drywall panel 10 [mm] 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5
Drywall panel 12.5 [mm] 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5
Setting details
ls
d0
h tfix
Anchor size
M 4/4 M 4/6 M 4/12 M 4/19 M 5/8 M 5/12 M 5/25
Setting details
ls [mm] Min. screw length 25 39 45 52 45 58 71
h [mm] Anchor neck length 4 6 12.5 19 8 12.5 25
Min./Max.panel
hmin/max [mm] 3/4 6/7 10/13 18/20 6/8 11/13 23/25
thickness
max. fastenable
tfix [mm] 15 25 25 25 25 30 30
thickness
d [mm] Screw diameter M4 M4 M4 M4 M5 M5 M5
Drill bit TE-CX 8/22 TE-CX 10/22
Anchor size
M 6/9 M 6/12 M 6/24 M 6/40 M 8/12 M 8/24 M 8/40
Setting details
ls [mm] Min. screw length 45 58 71 88 60 72 90
h [mm] Anchor neck length 9 12.5 25 40 12.5 25 40
Min./Max. panel
hmin/max [mm] 7/9 11/13 23/25 38/40 11/13 23/25 38/40
thickness
max. fastenable
tfix [mm] 20 30 30 30 30 30 35
thickness
d [mm] Screw diameter M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
Drill bit TE-CX 12/22
127
HHD-S cavity anchor
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C or TE18-M) or a cordless screwdriver (SF 100 or
SF120), a drill bit (See previous page.) and the HHD-SZ2 setting tool.
Setting operations1)
Pre-setting:
Drill hole with drill bit.

Put anchor into setting Install anchor with setting Remove screw from anchor and screw in gain with
2
tool. tool. part being fastened attached.
1)
Drill the hole in gypsum fibreboard, chipboard and drywall panel without hammering action or use the
cordless screwdriver with a twist drill.
128
DBZ wedge anchor
Features:
- base material: concrete
- simple through-fastening
- impact expansion by hammer, without special tool
- anchor with follow-up expansion feature
- suitable for tension zone DBZ
- rigid non-buckling fastening
Material:
Wedge: - Q + St 36-3 DIN 1654
Expansion pin: - steel rod, heat treated
Concrete Cracked concrete1) Fire resistance
Surface finish: - galvanised to min. 5 microns
1)
If more than two fastening points.
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): DBZ

x concrete: fcc t 15 N/mm2
cracked concrete
Anchor DBZ 6/4.5 and DBZ 6/35

Tensile NRk 2.4
Shear VRk 3.3

Tensile NRd 1.1
Shear VRd 1.5

Tensile NRec 0.8
Shear VRec 1.1
Setting details
do
hnom h1
tfix
129
DBZ wedge anchor
Anchor size
DBZ 6/4.5 DBZ 6/35
Setting details
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 6

Max. fixture (fastenable)
tfix [mm] 4.5 35
thickness
Drill bit TE-CX-6/12 TE-CX-6/17
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2; TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M) and a hammer. 2
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill Blow out dust and Install anchor with Hammer in
bit. fragments. suspended item. anchor.
130
HA 8 ring/hook anchor
Features:
- simple setting by hand
- follow-up expansion
HA 8 R1 (ring)
- suitable for tension zone HA 8 H1 (hook)
- universal hanger programme
Material:
Expansion sleeve: - MU St 3 LG, DIN 1624
Rod (body): - steel wire / rod, heat treated if necessary
Surface finish: - galvanised to min. 5 microns Concrete Cracked concrete1) Fire resistance
1)
If more than two fastening points.
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HA 8

x concrete: fcc t 20 N/mm2
x table values are only for tensile loading
cracked concrete
Anchor HA 8 R1 HA 8 H1
Tensile, NRu,m 1.9 1.9
Tensile, NRd 1.1 1.1
Tensile, NRec 0.8 0.8
Setting details
do
h1
hnom
131
HA 8 ring/hook anchor
Anchor size
HA 8 R1 HA 8 H1
Setting details
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 50 50
hnom [mm] Min. anchorage depth 40 40
d0 [mm] Hole diameter 8 8
F [mm] Distance to ceiling 12 – 15 12 – 15
l [mm] Anchor length 66 66
d [mm] Bolt diameter 5 5
Drill bit TE-CX-8/17
2
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M) and a hammer
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill Blow out dust and Pull to expand the
Install anchor.
bit. fragments. anchor.
132
HSP / HFP drywall plug
Features:
- base material: drywall panel, gypsum panel
- self-drilling tip
- quick and convenient setting
- available with connection thread
- suitable for serial application
Material: HSP
HFP: - glass fibre reinforced polyamide
HSP: - zinc plated steel
Screw: - galvanised to 5 µm
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HSP, HFP

Design resistance, Rd [N]:
Anchor size
HSP HSP-S HSP-M6 HSP-F7 HSP-1/4” HFP HFP-S
Base material
NRd 98 98 98 98 98 98 98
Drywall Panel 12.5mm
VRd 252 252 252 252 252 252 252
NRd 140 140 140 140 140 140 140
Double Panel 2x12.5mm
VRd 378 378 378 378 378 378 378
1)
NRd 126 126 126 126 126 126 126
Gypsum Panel 100mm
VRd 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
Recommended load, Lrec [N]:
Anchor size
Base material
NRec 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Drywall Panel 12.5mm
VRec 180 180 180 180 180 180 180
NRec 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Double Panel 2x12.5mm
VRec 270 270 270 270 270 270 270
1) NRec 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
Gypsum Panel 100mm
VRec 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
1)
Drilled with 6 mm diameter twist drill.
133
HSP / HFP drywall plug
Setting details
Is
I tfix
Setting details
Anchor size, HSP
2
ls [mm] Screw length tfix + 15mm 30 - - - tfix+15mm 30
d [mm] Screw diameter 4.5 4.5 - - - 4.5 4.5
tfix [mm] Fixture thickness 0-15 0-15 - - - 0-10 0-10
Screwdriver (SF 100. SF 120, ST 18) with D-B PH2 HSP/HFP bit, D-B SQ HSP-G bit.
Setting operations
HFP:
Ø 4 – 4,5 mm
Ø #8
Drive in the plug. Fasten part and drive in screw.
HSP:
Ø 4 – 4,5 mm
Ø #8
HSP-M6/F7/1/4:
.
134
IDP insulation fastener
Features:
- for insulating material up to 15 cm thick
- perfect plastering ensured (patented plaster adhesion
surface)
- simple setting
Special
versions:
IDP
- non flammable
Material:
- contains no heavy metals
- polypropylene, not UV resistant,
- heat conductivity 0.19 kcal/m h grd. at 20° C
- in-place temperature range from –40° C to + 80° C
- temperature when setting from 0° C to + 40 ° C
When fastening woodwool panels, wood fibre panels and wood fibre expanded polystyrene panels (so-called
sandwich panels), it should always be checked whether a high degree of moisture absorption by the panels
might take place during the time they are in use due to dampness surroundings.
The reason is that dampness warps these panels. The resulting pull-out forces acting on each fastening would
be very high.
Basic loading data (for a single fastener): IDP

Ü
N
Mean ultimate resistance, VRu,m, ÜRu,m, NRu,m [N]:
Ü
Shear load, V = working load at a mean insulation displacement of 10 mm along the line of action of the force.
Ins. material thickness
20 40 60 80 100 120 150
Insulating material
Fastener size IDP 0/2 IDP 2/4 IDP 4/6 IDP 6/8 IDP 8/10 IDP 10/12 IDP 13/15
3
VRu,m 140 180 210 230 270 290 290
Polyurethane foam PUR (Roxon) 30-35 kg/m
ÜRu,m 460 500 500 500 500 500 500
3
VRu,m 90 200 320 420 520 620 620
Expanded polystyrene PS Roofmate 40 kg/m
ÜRu,m 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
3
VRu,m 50 100 160 190 220 240 240
Expanded polystyrene PS Sagex 15 kg/m
ÜRu,m 40 300 500 500 500 500 500
VRu,m 100 200 270 300 320 340 340
without plate
3
ÜRu,m 60 320 500 500 500 500 500
Cork 120-160 kg/m
VRu,m 100 200 270 300 320 340 340
with plate
ÜRu,m 160 400 500 500 500 500 500
3
VRu,m 100 200 270 300 320 340 340
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 kg/m
ÜRu,m 160 400 500 500 500 500 500
Base material
Concrete, solid brick, wood NRu,m 500
1)
Hollow brick NRu,m 200
1)
Only those pull-over values Ü are applicable which are smaller than the failure loads of the insulation fastener
in the base material (e.g. hollow brick 200 N).
135
IDP insulation fastener
Recommended number of IDP`s for wall insulation (shear loading)

2
Density Min. number of IDP`s per m for ins. thickness (mm):
Insulating material Trade name 3
Kg/m up to 40 40 – 60 60 – 80 80 – 100 100 - 120 120-150
PUR polyurethane foam Roxon 35 3 3 3 4 4 5
PS expanded polystyrene Roofmate 40 3 3 3 4 4 5
PS expanded polystyrene Sagex 15 3 3 3 3 3 4
Cork 140 4 4 4 5 6 7
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 4 4 4 4 4 5
At temperatures above 40° C, the recommended load should be reduced if the load is sustained. If the insulation
is a coating (plaster, etc.), the number of IDP`s should be increased. If the insulation is weak, e.g. mineral wool,
use of the plate is recommended.
Setting details 2
ll
∅ 60 mm
do
50mm
hnom tfix
tfix
Fastener size
IDP 0/2 IDP 2/4 IDP 4/6 IDP 6/8 IDP 8/10 IDP 10/12
Setting details
tfix [mm] Insulation thickness 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 50-30 50-30 50-30 50-30 50-30 50-30
l [mm] Fastener length 50 70 90 110 130 150

Drill bit size TE-CX-8/22
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6A, TE15-C, TE18-M or TE35), a drill bit (See table above.) and a hammer.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Tap in fastener with a hammer.
136
IZ expandable insulation fastener
Features:
- perfect plastering ensured (patented plaster adhesion
surface)
- IZ-T insulation plate as extra for soft material
- simple setting
Material:
- contains no heavy metals IZ
- polypropylene, not UV resistant,
- in-place fastener temperature range, from –40° C to + 80° C
- temperature when setting fastener, from 0° C to + 40 ° C
might take place during the time they are in use due to damp surroundings.
be very high.
Basic loading data (for a single fastener): IZ

Ü
N
Ü
V
Ins. material thickness 20 40 60 80 100 120
Fastener shank dia. / ins. material thickness IZ 8/20 IZ 8/40 IZ 8/60 IZ 8/80 IZ 8/100 IZ 8/120
Insulating material Density P M P M P M P M P M P M
3
VRu,m 90 90 140 160 160 160 190 200 150 200 150 220
Polystyrene PS 15 kg/m
ÜRu,m 180 330 350 350 400 400
3
VRu,m 230 280 250 360 250 420 300 420 250 380 250 380
Polystyrene PS 40 kg/m
ÜRu,m 630 700 700 810 810 720
3
VRu,m 100 100 180 250 180 250 280 380 280 380 280 380
Cork 100 kg/m
ÜRu,m 200 400 400 720 800 800
Base material NRu,m Nrec
Concrete, solid brick, wood 1020 300
Hollow brick 650 140
P = plastic nail M = stainless-steel nail
Note: Only those pull-over values, Ü, are applicable that are smaller than the failure loads of the insulation
fastener in the base material.
Recommended number of IZ`s for wall insulation (shear loading)

2
Density Min. number of IZ`s per m for ins. thickness (mm):
Kg/m up to 40 40 – 60 60 – 80 80 – 100 100 - 120
PUR polyurethane foam Roxon 35 3 3 3 4 4
PS expanded polystyrene Roofmate 40 3 3 3 4 4
PS expanded polystyrene Sagex 15 3 3 3 3 3
Cork 140 4 4 4 5 6
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 4 4 4 4 4
137
IZ expandable insulation fastener
is a coating (plaster, etc.), the number of IZ`s should be increased. If the insulation is weak, e.g. mineral wool,
use of the plate is recommended.
Setting details
∅ 50mm
do
h1
hnom
tfix 2
Fastener size
8/20 8/40 8/60 8/80 8/100 8/120
Setting details
tfix [mm] Insulation thickness 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 70-50 70-50 70-50 70-50 70-50 70-50
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40 60-40
l [mm] Fastener length 60 80 100 120 140 160

Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6A, TE15-C, TE18-M or TE35), a drill bit (See table above.) and a hammer.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Tap in fastener body. Hammer in expansion pin.
138
IN insulation fastener
Features:
ideal for soft insulating materials
- a compact fastener for soft insulating materials
- simple setting
Material:
- contains no heavy metals
- contains cadmium or lead
- polypropylene, not UV resistant, IN
- in-place temperature range, from –40° C to + 80° C
- temperature when setting, from 0° C to + 40 ° C
Basic loading data (for a single fastener): IN

Ü
N
Ü
40 60 80 100 120
Insulating material
Fastener size IN 3/4 IN 5/6 IN 7/8 IN 9/10 IN 11/12
3
VRu,m 180 210 230 270 290
Polyurethane foam PUR (Roxon) 30-35 kg/m
ÜRu,m 240 380 420 460 460
3
VRu,m 200 320 420 520 620
Expanded polystyrene PS Roofmate 40 kg/m
ÜRu,m 240 380 420 460 500
3
VRu,m 100 160 190 220 240
Expanded polystyrene PS Sagex 15 kg/m
ÜRu,m 240 380 420 460 500
3
VRu,m 200 270 300 320 340
Cork 120-160 kg/m
ÜRu,m 370 500 - - -
3
VRu,m 35 45 55 70 80
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 kg/m
ÜRu,m - - - - -
Base material
1)
Hollow brick NRu,m 200
1)
Only those pull-over values Ü are applicable which are smaller than the failure loads of the insulation fastener
in the base material (e.g. hollow brick 200 N).
139
IN insulation fastener
Recommended number of IN`s for wall insulation (shear loading)

2
Density min. number of IN`s per m for ins. thickness (mm):
Kg/m up to 40 40 – 60 60 – 80 80 – 100 100 - 120
PUR polyurethane foam Roxon 35 3 3 3 4 4
PS expanded polystyrene Roofmate 40 3 3 3 4 4
PS expanded polystyrene Sagex 15 3 3 3 3 3
Cork 140 4 4 4 5 6
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 4 4 4 4 4
is a coating (plaster, etc.), the number of IN`s should be increased.
Setting details
2
l
do
50mm tfix
Fastener size
IN 3/4 IN 5/6 IN 7/8 IN 9/10 IN 11/12
Setting details
tfix [mm] Insulation thickness 30-40 50-60 70-80 90-100 110-120
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 50 50 50 50 50
l [mm] Fastener length 69 89 109 129 149
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 8 8 8 8 8

Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6A, TE15-C, TE18-M), a drill bit (See table above.) and a hammer.
Setting operations
Tap in fastener with a

Drill hole with drill bit.
hammer.
140
IDMS / IDMR metal insulation fastener
Features:
- a non-flammable metal fastener
- IDMS-T / IDMR-T insulation plate for non self-supporting
insulation material
- simple setting
Material: IDMS/IDMR
IDMS: - sheet steel, sendzimir zinc plated to approx. 16 microns
IDMR: - stainless-steel sheet 1.4301 (V2A)
might take place during the time they are in use owing to damp surroundings.
then be very high.
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): IDMS, IDMR
N
Ü
V
30 60 90 120 150
Insulating material
Fastener size IDMS 0/30 IDMS 30/60 IDMS 60/90 IDMS 90/120 IDMS 120/150
3
VRu,m 430 560 640 640 640
Roofmate 40 kg/m
ÜRu,m 610 700 700 700 700
Polystyrene PS
3
VRu,m 130 210 280 310 310
Sagex 15 kg/m
ÜRu,m 170 360 460 470 540
3
VRu,m 160 330 370 370 370
Cork 120-160 kg/m without plate
ÜRu,m 150 480 700 700 700
Base material
1)
Hollow brick NRu,m 100-300
1)
Note: Only those pull-over values, Ü, are applicable which are smaller than the failure loads of the insulation
fastener in the base material (e.g. hollow brick 100-300N).
Recommended number of IDMS / IDMR for wall insulation (shear loading)
2
Density Min. number of IDM`s per m for ins. thickness (mm):
Kg/m up to 40 40 – 60 60 – 80 80 – 100 100 - 120 120-150
PUR polyurethane foam Roxon 35 3 3 4 4 5 6
PS expanded polystyrene Roofmate 40 3 3 4 4 5 6
PS expanded polystyrene Sagex 15 3 3 3 3 4 5
Cork 140 3 4 5 6 7 8
Mineral wool Flumroc 70 4 4 4 4 5 6
If the insulation has a coating (plaster, etc.), the number of IDMS/IDMRs should be increased. If the insulation is
weak, e.g. mineral wool, use of the plate is recommended.
141
IDMS / IDMR metal insulation fastener
Setting details
do
h1 min. tfix
60mm
2
Anchor size IDMS 0/3 IDMS 3/6 IDMS 6/9
IDMS 9/12 IDMS 12/15
Setting details IDMR 0/3 IDMR 3/6 IDMR 6/9
tfix [mm] Insulation thickness 0-30 30-60 60-90 90-120 120-150
h1 [mm] Min. hole depth 60 60 60 60 60
l [mm] Fastener length 80 110 140 170 200

Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6A, TE15-C, TE18-M), a drill bit (See table above.) and a hammer.
Setting operations
Drill hole with drill bit. Install the fastener.
142
143
3
Adhesive anchoring systems
Heavy duty anchors
HVZ adhesive anchor 145
HIT-TZ injection adhesive anchor 155
HVU with HAS/-R/-HCR/-E/-E-R adhesive anchor 165
HVU with HIS-N/-RN adhesive anchor 174
HVU with rebar adhesive anchor 183
HIT-RE 500 with HAS/-R/-HCR/-E/-E-R
injection adhesive anchor 190
HIT-RE 500 with HIS-N/RN injection adhesive anchor 200
3
HIT-RE 500 with rebar injection adhesive anchor 210
HVA-UW with HAS-R/-HCR adhesive anchor 219
HVA-UW with HIS-RN adhesive anchor 221
Medium duty anchors
HIT-HY 150 with HAS injection adhesive anchor 222
HIT-HY 150 with HIS-N/-RN
HIT-HY 150 with rebar injection adhesive anchor 240
HIT-ICE with HAS injection adhesive anchor 248
HIT-ICE with HIS-N/-RN
HIT-ICE with rebar injection adhesive anchor 252
Light duty anchors
HIT-HY 50 with HIT-AN/-IG 254
HIT-HY 20 with HIT-AN/-IG 258
Special anchors
HRA, HRC, HRT rail anchor 261
HWB cladding anchor 271
Combined loading design 274
144
HVZ adhesive anchor
Features:
- foil capsule vs. glass
- flexibly to fit in irregular holes HVU-TZ capsule
- marking for identification after setting

- test reports: fire, dynamic (fatigue, shock), water
HAS-TZ, HAS-RTZ and
tightness
HAS-HCR-TZ anchor rod
Material:
- urethane methacrylate resin – styrene free, hardener,
HVU-TZ:
quartz sand, foil tubes
- grade 8.8; DIN EN 20898-1; coating: DIN 50968-
HAS-TZ:
FE/Cu 3 Ni 10 Close edge
Concrete Tensile zone distance/ Fatigue Shock
HAS-RTZ: - stainless steel; A4-80; 1.4401; 14571; EN 10088 spacing
HAS-HCR-TZ: - stainless steel; 1.4529; 1.4547; EN 10088-3
A4 HCR
316 highMo
Corrosion High corrosion Hilti Anchor

Fire resistance
resistance resistance programme
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HAS-TZ

x concrete: See table below.
x steel failure
Mean ultimate resistance Ru,m [kN]: concrete # C20/25

Anchor size M10 M12 M16 M16L M20 M10 M12 M16 M16L M20
Tensile NRu,m 38.2 49.0 82.1 82.1 132.9 38.2 49.0 68.7 72.0 132.9
Shear VRu,m 20.1 29.2 54.2 54.2 84.7 20.1 29.2 54.2 54.2 84.7

Tensile NRk 35.4 45.4 76.0 76.0 123.1 35.4 45.4 58.2 60.2 123.1
Shear VRk 18.6 27.0 50.2 50.2 78.4 18.6 27.0 50.2 50.2 78.4

Tensile NRd 11.9 22.2 27.7 33.4 63.8 9.5 18.5 21.1 27.5 43.6
Shear VRd 14.9 21.6 40.2 40.2 62.7 14.9 21.6 40.2 40.2 62.7

Tensile NRec 8.5 15.9 19.8 23.8 45.6 6.8 13.2 15.1 19.6 31.1
Shear VRec 10.6 15.4 28.7 28.7 44.8 10.6 15.4 28.7 28.7 44.8
145
HVZ adhesive anchor
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HAS-RTZ

x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 38.2 49.0 82.1 82.1 132.9 38.2 49.0 68.7 72.0 132.9
Shear VRu,m 22.6 32.7 61.0 61.0 95.3 22.6 32.7 61.0 61.0 95.3

Tensile NRk 35.4 45.4 76.0 76.0 123.1 35.4 45.4 58.2 60.2 123.1
Shear VRk 20.9 30.3 56.5 56.5 88.2 20.9 30.3 56.5 56.5 88.2
Concrete Capacity Method 3

Tensile NRd 11.9 22.2 27.7 33.4 63.8 9.5 18.5 21.1 27.5 43.6
Shear VRd 15.7 22.8 42.5 42.5 66.3 15.7 22.8 42.5 42.5 66.3

Tensile NRec 8.5 15.9 19.8 23.8 45.6 6.8 13.2 15.1 19.6 31.1
Shear VRec 11.2 16.3 30.4 30.4 47.4 11.2 16.3 30.4 30.4 47.4
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HAS-HCR-TZ

x no edge distance and edge influence
x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 38.2 49.0 82.1 82.1 132.9 38.2 49.0 68.7 72.0 132.9
Shear VRu,m 25.1 36.4 61.0 61.0 105.8 25.1 36.4 61.0 61.0 105.8
146
HVZ adhesive anchor
Characteristic resistance Rk [kN]: concrete # C20/25

Tensile NRk 35.4 45.4 76.0 76.0 123.1 35.4 45.4 58.2 60.2 123.1
Shear VRk 23.2 33.7 62.8 62.8 98.0 23.2 33.7 62.8 62.8 98.0
Design resistance Rd [kN]: concrete fck,cube = 25 N/mm2

Tensile NRd 11.9 22.2 27.7 33.4 63.8 9.5 18.5 21.1 27.5 43.6
Shear VRd 17.4 25.3 47.2 47.2 73.7 17.4 25.3 47.2 47.2 73.7

Tensile NRec 7.1 13.2 16.5 19.9 38.0 5.6 11.0 12.6 16.4 25.9
Shear VRec 12.4 18.1 33.7 33.7 52.6 12.4 18.1 33.7 33.7 52.6
Setting details df
d0
hef t fix
h1
hmin

Foil capsule HVU-TZ M.. 10x90 12x110 16x125 20x190
Anchor rod HAS-TZ M.. 10x75/ tfix 12x95/ tfix 16x105/ tfix 16Lx125/tfix 20x170/ 40
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 12 14 18 25

h1 [mm] Hole depth 90 110 125 145 195
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 150 190 210 250 340
25 / 50 / 100
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 15 / 30 / 50 (and 40 for 30 / 60 / 100 40
HAS-RTZ)
Clearance hole rec. 12 14 18
df [mm] 22
(without bending verification) max. 13 15 19
Tightening HAS-TZ 40 50 90
Tinst [Nm] 100 150
Torque HAS-R/HCR-TZ 50 70
TE–CX 12/22 TE–CX 14/22 TE–C 18/32S TE–C 25/27S
Drill bit
TE-TX 12/32 TE-TX 14/32 TE-T 18/32 TE-T 25/32
147
HVZ adhesive anchor
Base material temperature Min. time to wait before Curing time:

removing SCREWED-ON tcure
setting tool (not applicable for
TE-C HEX):
trel
20°C and higher 8 min. 20 min.
10°C to 20°C 20 min. 30 min.
0°C to 10°C 30 min. 1 hour
-5°C to 0°C 1 hour 5 hours
less than -5°C Please consult your Hilti technical service.
A rotary hammer (TE5, TE6, TE15, TE-15C, TE-18M, TE35, TE55, TE76); max. setting speed of 850 r.p.m
(rotary hammering action); a drill bit, a blow out pump and a setting tool: TE-C HEX (M10-M16), TE-Y HEX
(M20);
Setting operations
1 2 3 HVU-TZ 4
TE-C HEX
® ® ®
Blow out dust and Drive in with rotary

3
Drill hole. Insert HVU-TZ capsule.
fragments. hammering action.
5 6 7 Tinst
trel
tcure
Allow rel time to pass Wait for curing Apply tightening torque.
Anchor geometry and mechanical properties
Marking of material and anchorage depth

for HAS-TZ: HVZ...
for HAS-RTZ: HVZ R...
for HAS-HCR: HVZ HCR...
dw
d
Sw
dk
dp
HVU-TZ M.. HVU-TZ M..

hef
lp l
148
HVZ adhesive anchor
Anchor size M10 M12 M16x105 M16x125 M20

HVU-TZ capsule:
lp [mm] HVU-TZ foil capsule length 110 127 140 200
dp [mm] HVU-TZ foil capsule diameter 10.7 13.1 17.1 23.2
HAS-TZ/-RTZ/-HCR-TZ:
Stressed cross-sectional area
44.2 56.7 95.0 153.9
under tensile loading:
As [mm²]
58.0 84.3 157.0 245.0
under shear loading in thread:
HAS-TZ 8.8 800
Nominal tensile
fuk [N/mm²] HAS-RTZ 800
strength (point)
HAS-HCR-TZ 800
HAS-TZ 8.8 640
Nominal yield
fyk [N/mm²] HAS-RTZ 600
strength (point)
HAS-HCR-TZ 600
W [mm³] Section modulus 62.3 109.0 277.0 541
HAS-TZ 8.8 47.8 83.7 212.7 415.5
Design bending
MRd,s [Nm] HAS-RTZ and
resistance
HAS-HCR-TZ 45.0 78.7 199.9 390.5
d [mm] Shank diameter 10 12 16 20
dk [mm] Anchor end diameter 10.8 12.8 16.8 22.7
hef [mm] Actual anchorage depth 75 95 105 125 170
l [mm] Anchor length 124/139/159 158/183/233 181/211/251 201/231/271 269
Sw [mm] Width across flats 17 19 24 30
dw [mm] Washer outside diameter 20 24 30 37
1)
The design bending resistance of the anchor rod was calculated using MRd,s = (1.2 W fuk)/JMs,b , where the partial safety factor JMs,b for
steel of grade 8.8 is 1.25, for A4-80 is 1.33 and for HCR is 1.56. Verification of safety is then given by MSk JF d MRd,s

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HVZ, it must be verified by the user that the load on the
concrete structure including the loads introduced by the anchorage do not cause failure (e.g. cracking) of the
concrete structure.
TENSION
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor Nrec,c/s
is the lower of,
NRd,c : concrete cone/pull-out resistance s
c
h
149
HVZ adhesive anchor
NRd,c: Concrete cone/pull-out resistance
o
NRd,c NRd,c fB,N f A,N fR,N
N0Rd,c : Concrete cone/pull-out design resistance

Anchor size M10 M12 M16 M16L M20
N0Rd,c1) [kN] in non-cracked concrete 11.9 22.2 27.7 33.4 63.8
N0Rd,c1) [kN] in cracked concrete 9.5 18.5 21.1 27.5 43.6
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c= N Rk,c/JMc,N, where the partial
safety factor JMc,N is 2.1 for M 10 and 1.8 for the M12 - M20 sizes.
fB,N : Influence of concrete strength

Designation of Cylinder Cube compressive
grade of compressive strength, fck,cube
concrete strength, [N/mm²] fB,N
M10 M12 M16 M20
C20/25 20 25 1 1
C25/30 25 30 1.03 1.07
C30/37
C35/45
C40/50
30
35
40
37
45
50
1.06
1.10
1.13
1.17
1.29
1.36
3
C45/55 45 55 1.15 1.43
C50/60 50 60 1.18 1.51
diameter
§f 25 ·
1 ¨¨ ck,cube Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube d 60 N/mm²
fB,N
K ¸¸
© ¹
K = 197.5 for M10 and M12
K = 68.75 for M16 and M20
fA,N: Influence of spacing

Spacing, Anchor size
s [mm] M10 M12 M16 M16L M20
60 0.63
65 0.64
70 0.66
75 0.67 0.63
80 0.68 0.64
85 0.69 0.65 0.63 0.61
90 0.70 0.66 0.64 0.62
100 0.72 0.68 0.66 0.63
120 0.77 0.71 0.69 0.66
135 0.80 0.74 0.71 0.68 0.63
140 0.81 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.64
160 0.86 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.66
180 0.90 0.82 0.79 0.74 0.68
200 0.94 0.85 0.82 0.77 0.70
220 1.00 0.89 0.85 0.79 0.72
240 0.92 0.88 0.82 0.74
150
HVZ adhesive anchor

s [mm] M10 M12 M16 M16L M20
270 0.97 0.93 0.86 0.76
300 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.79
330 1.00 0.94 0.82
360 0.98 0.85
390 1.00 0.88
420 0.91
450 0.94
480 0.97
510 1.00
s
f A,N 0 .5 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
6h ef

smin [mm] 60 75 85 135
scr,N [mm] 225 285 315 375 510
fR,N: Influence of edge distance

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M10 M12 M16 M16L M20
60 0.65
65 0.68
70 0.72
75 0.75 0.64
80 0.78 0.67
85 0.82 0.70 0.65 0.59
90 0.85 0.72 0.68 0.61
95 0.88 0.75 0.70 0.63
100 0.92 0.78 0.73 0.65
105 0.95 0.80 0.75 0.67
110 0.98 0.83 0.77 0.69
115 1.00 0.86 0.80 0.71
125 0.91 0.85 0.75
135 0.96 0.89 0.79 0.65
145 1.00 0.94 0.83 0.68
155 1.00 0.87 0.71
165 0.91 0.74
175 0.95 0.76
185 1.00 0.79
205 0.85
230 0.93
255 1.00
c
fR,N 0.25 0.50 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
h ef

cmin [mm] 60 75 85 135
ccr,N [mm] 113 143 158 188 255
Note: If more than 3 edge distances are smaller than ccr,N, please contact your Hilti technical service.
151
HVZ adhesive anchor

1)
NRd,s [kN] HAS-TZ steel grade 8.8 23.6 30.3 50.7 82.1
HAS-RTZ steel grade A4-80 22.1 28.4 47.5 77.0
HAS-HCR-TZ
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in tension is calculated using NRd,s= ASV fuk/JMs,N. The partial safety factor, JMs,N , for steel of grade
8.8 is 1.5, for A4-80 and HCR is 1.6.
NRd = lower of NRd,c and NRd,s
Combined loading: Only if tensile load and shear load applied (See page 274 and examples pages 277 – 284).

3
c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
c
SHEAR h>
1.5
c
The design shear resistance of a single
anchor is the lower of,
VRd,s : steel resistance Note: If the conditions shown for h and c2 cannot be
observed, please contact your Hilti sales representative.

the direction of shear). The direction of shear is accounted by the factor fE,V.
0
VRd,c VRd,c f B,V f E,V f AR,V

152
HVZ adhesive anchor

0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] non-cracked concrete 4.9 7.6 10.0 10.2 23.8
0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] cracked concrete 3.5 5.4 7.1 7.3 17.0
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 60 75 85 135
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in shear is calculated from the characteristic anchor shear resistance, V°Rk,c, divided by
fB,V : Influence of concrete strength

fB,V
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22 fck,cube
C35/45 35 45 1.34 fB,V
C40/50 40 50 1.41
25
C45/55 45 55 1.48 Limits: 25 N/mm2 d fck,cube d 60 N/mm2
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1
E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

Influenced only by edge
c 2,1
c c s n-1
f AR,V
c min c min s3
results
tabulated s2
Formula for a two-anchor fastening valid s1
for s < 3c below c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
General formula for n-anchor fastening (edge plus n-1 spacing)

only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c and c2 > 1.5c Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
153
HVZ adhesive anchor
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
11.0 7.28 7.67
anchors at the top of the page.
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
3

HAS-TZ steel grade 8.8 14.9 21.6 40.2 62.7
VRd,s1)[kN]
HAS-RTZ steel grade A4-80 15.7 22.8 42.5 66.3
HAS-HCR-TZ 17.4 25.3 47.2 73.7
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated using VRd,s= VRk,s/JMs,V. The values for the stressed cross section As and the nominal tensile
strength of steel, fuk, are given in the table „Anchor mechanical properties and geometry“. The partial safety factor, JMs,V is 1.25 for
HAS-TZ and 1,33 for HAS-RTZ, HAS-HCR-TZ.
VRd : System tensile design resistance
154
HIT-TZ injection adhesive anchor
Features:
- suitable for cracked concrete
- no cleaning of the hole in general
only M16 / M20 in saturated concrete: the whole must
be cleaned using a wire brush
- less embedment, less drilling, fast curing
- also useable for diamond drilled holes
Material:
HIT-HY 150 foil pack, mixer
- Hilti HIT HY 150, standard size 330ml and 500ml
Mortar
- Hilti HIT HY 150, big size 1100 ml
HIT-TZ - galvanised, coating
HIT-RTZ - stainless steel; 1.4404, 1.4401; EN 10088
HIT-TZ, HIT-RTZ
A4
316
Close edge Fire

Corrosion Hilti Anchor
Concrete Tensile zone distance/ resistance
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-TZ

x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 20.8 28.8 42,3 57.1 89.2 16.0 23.9 35.5 50.0 86.8
Shear VRu,m 11.6 17.9 26.3 49.4 76.7 11.6 17.9 26.3 49.4 76.7

Tensile NRk 16.0 20,0 33.6 43.4 58.7 11.0 16.5 30.0 35.4 60.9
Shear VRk 11.0 17.0 25.0 47.0 73.0 11.0 17.0 25.0 47.0 73.0

Tensile NRd 10.7 13.3 20.0 26.6 33.4 6.0 8.0 10.7 13.3 23.3
Shear VRd 8.8 13.6 20.0 37.6 58.4 8.8 13.6 20.0 37.6 58.4

Tensile NRec 7.6 9.5 14.3 19.0 23.9 4.3 5.7 7.6 9.5 16.6
Shear VRec 6.3 9.7 14.3 26.9 41.7 6.3 9.7 14.3 26.9 41.7
155
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RTZ

x steel failure

Tensile NRu,m 23.8 24.7 38.3 52.2 94.8 19.9 25.1 34.7 47.0 88.0
Shear VRu,m 11.6 17.9 26.3 49.4 76.7 11.6 17.9 26.3 49.4 76.7

Tensile NRk 16,0 20,0 33.6 43.4 58.7 14.0 21.9 28.2 34.5 63.7
Shear VRk 11.0 17.0 25.0 47.0 73.0 11.0 17.0 25.0 47.0 73.0
Concrete Capacity Method 3

Tensile NRd 10.7 13.3 20.0 26.6 33.4 6.0 8.0 10.7 13.3 23.3
Shear VRd 8.8 13.6 20.0 37.6 58.4 8.8 13.6 20.0 37.6 58.4

Tensile NRec 7.6 9.5 14.3 19.0 23.9 4.3 5.7 7.6 9.5 16.6
Shear VRec 6.3 9.7 14.3 26.9 41.7 6.3 9.7 14.3 26.9 41.7
Setting details
Mxx*xx/xx
HIT-TZ
df
d0
h ef t fixt
h1
h min
156
Anchor size M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

Anchor rod HIT-TZ M../ HIT-RTZ M.. 8x55/ tfix 10x65/ tfix 12x75/ tfix 16x90/tfix 20x120/ tfix

h1 [mm] Hole depth 60 70 80 95 125
tfix [mm] Min./Max. fixture thickness 15 / 40 15 / 40 15 / 50 25/60 30/60
df [mm] Clearance hole 9 12 14 18 22
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 12 23 40 70 130
ml 2 2 3 5 6
Filling Volume
Trigger pulls 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1
TE–CX 10/22 TE–CX 12/22 TE–CX 14/22 TE-C 18/32S TE–C 22/27S
Drill bit
TE-TX 10/32 TE-TX 12/32 TE-TX 14/32 TE-T 18/32 TE-T 22/32
Base material temperature Time available to Curing time:

adjust anchor tcure
)
(min (min)
30°C to 40°C 2 40
25°C to 30°C 2 45
20°C to 25°C 2.5 50
15°C to 20°C 3 60
10°C to 15°C 5 75
+5°C to 10°C 8 90
less than +5°C Please consult your Hilti technical service.
The foil pack must be at least +5°C.
A rotary hammer (TE5, TE 2, TE6A, TE15, TE-15C, TE-18M, TE35, TE55, TE76); dispenser (MD 2000,
BD 2000)
Setting operations
Drill hole. Insert rod. Control Inject adhesive. Wait for curing.
embedment depth.
Adhesive amount
for dry and wet
conditions.
157
dw
dk
d
Prägung
HIT-TZ bzw. HIT-RTZ SW
M.. x h ef /t fix, z.B. M12x75/50

HIT-TZ/-RTZ:
As [mm²]
under tensile and shear loading:
36.6 58.0 84.2 156.7 244.8
3
Nominal tensile
fuk [N/mm²] 600 600 600 600 600
strength (point)
Nominal yield
fyk [N/mm²] 480 480 480 480 480
strength (point)
W [mm³] Section modulus 31.2 62.3 109 277 541
Design bending
MRd,s [Nm] 17.6 36.0 62.4 159.2 311.2
resistance
d [mm] Shank diameter 7,0 8.81 10.71 14.5 18.24
dk [mm] Anchor end diameter 9.4 11.4 13.4 17.4 21.35
l [mm] Anchor length 82/107 93/118 106/141 136/171 174/204
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 24 30
dw[mm] Washer outside diameter 16 20 24 30 37
1)
The design bending resistance of the anchor rod was calculated using MRd,s = (1.2 W fuk)/JMs,b , where the partial safety factor JMs,b for
steel 1.25. Verification of safety is then given by MSk JF d MRd,s
158

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HIT-TZ, it must be verified by the user that the load on the
concrete structure including the loads introduced by the anchorage do not cause failure (e.g. cracking) of the
concrete structure.
TENSION
The tensile design resistance of a single anchor Nrec,c/s
is the lower of,
NRd,c : concrete cone/pull-out resistance s
c
o
NRd,p NRd,p fB

N0Rd,p1) [kN] non-cracked concrete HIT-TZ, HIT-RTZ 10.7 13.3 20.0 26.6 33.4
N0Rd,p1) [kN] cracked concrete HIT-TZ, HIT-RTZ 6.0 8.0 10.7 13.3 23.3
1) o o o
The tensile design resistance is calculated from the tensile characteristic resistance N Rk,p by N Rd,p =NRk,p /JMc,N, where the partial
safety factor JMc,N is 1.5.
NRd,c: Concrete cone resistance
o

159

N0Rd,c1) [kN] in non-cracked concrete 13.7 17.6 21.8 28.7 44.2
0 1)
N Rd,c [kN] in cracked concrete 9.8 12.6 15.6 20.5 31.6
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance N Rk,c by N Rd,c =N Rk,c /JMc,N, where the partial safety
factor JMc,N is 1.5.

fB fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0 fB
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

3
s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
50 0.61
55 0.63
60 0.64 0.62
65 0.65 0.63
70 0.66 0.63 0.62
75 0.67 0.64 0.63
80 0.68 0.65 0.63 0.61
85 0.69 0.66 0.64 0.62
90 0.70 0.67 0.65 0.63
100 0.73 0.69 0.67 0.64
s
120 0.77 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.63 fA,N 0.5
135 0.81 0.76 0.73 0.69 0.64 8 hef
140 0.82 0.77 0.73 0.69 0.65
160 0.86 0.81 0.77 0.72 0.67
180 0.91 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.69 Limits: smin d s d scr,N scr,N = 4hef
200 0.95 0.88 0.83 0.78 0.71
220 1.00 0.92 0.87 0.81 0.73
240 0.96 0.90 0.83 0.75
270 0.95 0.88 0.78
300 1.00 0.92 0.81
330 0.96 0.84
360 1.00 0.88
390 0.91
420 0.94
450 0.97
480 1.00
smin 50 60 70 80 100
for c> 65 95 105 115 150
160

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
50 0.60
55 0.63
60 0.66 0.60
65 0.70 0.63
70 0.73 0.66 0.61
75 0.76 0.69 0.63
80 0.79 0.71 0.65 0.59
85 0.83 0.74 0.68 0.61
90 0.86 0.77 0.70 0.63 c
fR,N 0.27 0.36
95 0.89 0.80 0.73 0.65 hef
100 0.92 0.82 0.75 0.67
105 0.96 0.85 0.77 0.69 0.59
110 0.99 0.88 0.80 0.71 0.60 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N ccr,N = 2hef
115 0.91 0.82 0.73 0.62
125 0.96 0.87 0.77 0.65
135 0.92 0.81 0.68
145 0.97 0.85 0.71
155 0.89 0.74
165 0.93 0.77
175 0.97 0.80
185 0.83
205 0.89
225 0.95
240 0.99
cmin 50 60 70 80 100
for s> 85 125 135 140 175

NRd,s1) [kN] HIT-TZ/HIT-RTZ 14.7 23.3 33.3 62.7 98.0
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in tension is calculated using NRd,s= ASV fuk/JMs,N.
The partial safety factor, JMs,N is 1.5.
161

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
c
SHEAR h>
1.5
c
anchor is the lower of,
VRd,s : steel resistance Note: If the conditions shown for h and c2 cannot be
observed, please contact your Hilti sales representative.

the direction of shear). The direction of shear is accounted by the factor fE,V.
VRd,c 0
VRd,c f B,V f E,V f AR,V
3

V0Rd,c1) [kN] non-cracked concrete 3.4 4.7 6.5 8.8 13.8
V0Rd,c1) [kN] cracked concrete 2.4 3.4 4.6 6.2 9.8
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 50 60 70 80 100
smin [mm] min. edge distance 85 125 135 140 175
1)
The design value of the ultimate state in shear is calculated from the characteristic anchor shear resistance, V°Rk,c, divided by
fB,V : Influence of concrete strength

fB,V
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C20/25 20 25 1.0
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22 fck,cube
C35/45 35 45 1.34 fB,V
C40/50 40 50 1.41
25
C45/55 45 55 1.48 Limits: 25 N/mm2 d fck,cube d 60 N/mm2
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter
162

0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1
E
70 1.2 fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5
fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2

Influenced only by edge
c 2,1
c c s n-1
f AR,V
c min c min s3
results
tabulated s2
Formula for a two-anchor fastening valid s1
for s < 3c below c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V

only valid where s1 to sn-1 are all < 3c Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c
f AR ,V
3nc min c min
c/cmin
fAR.V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
Anchor fastening.
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0
For fastening made with more 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
12.0 8.00
163

1) 8.8 13.6 20.0 37.6 58.4
VRd,s [kN] HIT-TZ / HIT-RTZ
1) The design shear resistance is calculated using VRd,s= VRk,s/JMs,V. The partial safety factor, JMs,V is 1.25.
NRd : System tensile design resistance
164
HVU adhesive with HAS rod
Features:
- flexible for inserting into crooked / irregular holes
- pre-setting / through-setting HVU capsule
- specials lengths available on request
- test reports: fire, dynamic (fatigue, shock, seismic),
water tightness HAS, HAS-R, HAS-HCR
Material:
- urethane methacrylate resin – styrene free, hardener,
HVU:
quartz sand or corundum, foil tube
HAS, HAS-E:
- grade 5.8 and 8.8, ISO 898 T1, galvanised to min. HAS-E, HAS-E-R
5 microns
HAS-R / -ER: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4571
HAS-HCR: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4529
Small edge
Concrete distance / Fatigue Seismic
spacing
A4 HCR
316 highMo
High
corrosion Fire resistance programme
resistance
resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HVU capsule with HAS, HAS-E
x steel failure: steel grade 5.8 for M8 – M24 sizes and steel grade 8.8 for M27 – M39

Anchor size M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
Tensile, NRu,m 17.7 28.2 41.1 77.9 121.7 175.2 320.1 305.1 498.6 534.0 621.6
Shear, VRu,m 10.7 17.0 24.7 46.7 72.9 105.0 221.4 269.1 335.3 393.5 473.3

Tensile, NRk 16.4 26.1 38.1 72.2 112.7 162.0 182.4 228.0 440.9 494.0 503.2
Shear, VRk 9.9 15.8 22.9 43.2 67.5 97.3 205.0 249.1 310.5 364.4 438.3

Concrete
Concrete Capacity
Capacity Method
Method

Tensile, NRd 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 110.9 145.6 171.0 203.3 232.9
Shear, VRd 7.9 12.6 18.3 34.6 54.0 77.8 164.0 199.3 248.4 291.5 350.6


Tensile, NRec 8.9 11.8 17.0 24.8 44.9 64.7 79.2 104.0 122.1 145.2 166.4
Shear, VRec 5.6 9.0 13.1 24.7 38.6 55.6 117.1 142.4 177.4 208.2 250.4
165
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HVU capsule with HAS-R, HAS-E-R, HAS-HCR
x steel failure: steel grade A4-70 for M8 – M24; for A4 grade, fuk changes for the sizes M27 to M39 from
700 N/mm2 to 500 N/mm2.

Tensile, NRu,m 24.8 39.6 57.8 109.1 170.3 244.4 230.7 280.2 349.4 410.1 493.0
Shear, VRu,m 14.8 23.8 34.5 65.4 102.1 146.9 138.5 168.3 209.7 246.0 295.9

Tensile, NRk 23.0 36.7 53.5 101.0 157.6 226.3 213.6 259.4 323.5 379.7 456.5
Shear, VRk 13.7 22.0 32.0 60.5 94.5 136.0 128.2 155.8 194.2 227.8 274.0

3
Tensile, NRd 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 89.0 108.1 134.8 158.2 190.2
Shear, VRd 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2 64.1 77.9 97.1 113.9 137.0

Tensile, NRec 8.9 11.8 17.0 24.8 44.9 64.7 63.6 77.2 96.3 113.0 135.9
Shear, VRec 6.3 10.1 14.6 27.7 43.3 62.3 45.8 55.6 69.4 81.3 97.9
166
Setting details
df
d0
h1 t fix
h min
Foil capsule HVU M8x80 M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210 M27x240 M30x270 M33x300 M36x330 M39x360
1) M8x110/ M10x130/ M12x160/ M16x190/ M20x240/ M24x290/ M27x340/ M30x380/ M33x420/ M36x460/ M39x510/
Anchor rod HAS /-E/-R/-ER/-HCR 14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
d0 Drill bit diameter [mm] 10 12 14 18 24 28 30 35 37 40 42
h1=hnom Hole depth [mm] 80 90 110 125 170 210 240 270 300 330 360
Min. thickness
h (min) [mm] 100 120 140 170 220 270 300 340 380 410 450
of base material
Max. fixture
tfix (max) [mm] 14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
thickness
Clearance rec. [mm] 9 12 14 18 22 26 30 33 36 39 42
df
hole max. [mm] 11 13 15 19 25 29 31 36 38 41 43
Tinst Tightening torque [Nm] 18 35 60 120 260 450 650 950 1200 1500 1800
TE-CX- 10/22 12/22 14/22 - - - - - - - -

Drill bit
TE-T- - - - 18/32 24/32 28/52 30/57 - - - -
Rec. diamond drilling machine DD EC-1 DD 100 // DD 160 E

1)
The values for the total rod length and the maximum fixture thickness are only valid for the HAS anchor rods given in this table.
If other HAS rods are used, these values will change. (Example: HAS M12x260/128; l = 260 mm and tfix = 128 mm)
Min. time to wait before

Curing time aftr which anchor
1) removing SCREWED-ON
Temperature when setting: can be fully loaded,
setting tool,
tcure
trel
20°C and above 8 min. 20 min.
10°C to 20°C 20 min. 30 min.
0°C to 10°C 30 min. 60 min.
-5°C to 0°C 60 min. 5 hours
1)
If the temperature is less than –5°C, contact your Hilti technical service.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55 or TE 76) or a diamond
drilling machine, a drill bit, a TE-C HEX, TE-C-E TE-Y-E setting tool and a blow-out pump.
167
HVU with HAS adhesive anchor
Setting operations
1 2 3 5
4 HAS
HVU
Blow out dust and

Drill hole. Insert HVU capsule. Drive in anchor.
fragments.
5 trel 6 tcure 7
Tinst
Apply tightening
Allow gel time to pass. Wait for curing.
torque.
dw
Sw
dpp
d
HVU M.. HVU M.. HVU M..
l lpp l
3
Foil capsule HVU M8x80 M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210 M27x240 M30x270 M33x300 M36x330 M39x360
lp [mm] HVU capsule length 110 110 127 140 170 200 225 260 290 320 350
dp [mm] HVU capsule diameter 9.3 10.7 13.1 17.1 22.0 25.7 26.8 31.5 31.5 32.0 35.0
Anchor rod HAS M8x110/ M10x130/ M12x160/ M16x190/ M20x240/ M24x290/ M27x340/ M30x380/ M33x420/ M36x460/ M39x510/
14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
l [mm] Anchor length 110 130 160 190 240 290 340 380 420 460 510
2
As [mm ] Stressed cross-section 32.8 52.3 76.2 144 225 324 427 519 647 759 913
HAS 5.8 500 500 500 500 500 500 - - - - -

2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 800 800 800 800 800
strength
HAS-R
700 700 700 700 700 700 500 500 500 500 500
-HCR
HAS 5.8 400 400 400 400 400 400 - - - - -
2
HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 640 640 640 640 640
HAS-R
450 450 450 450 450 450 250 250 250 250 250
-HCR
3
W [mm ] Moment of resistance 26.5 53.3 93.9 244 477 824 1245 1668 2322 2951 3860
HAS 5.8 12.7 25.6 45.1 117.1 228.8 395.3 - - - - -
Design bending HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 956.1 1280.8 1783.5 2266.5 2987.8

MRd,s [Nm] 1)
resistance
HAS-R
14.3 28.7 50.6 131.4 256.7 443.5 478.8 641.5 893.0 1134.9 1484.5
-HCR
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 24 30 36 41 46 50 55 59
dw [mm] Washer diameter 16 20 24 30 37 44 50 56 60 66 72

1)
The design bending resistance of the anchor rod is calculated from MRd,s = (1.2 · W · fuk)/JMs,b , where the partial safety factor, JMs,b , for
grade 5.8 and 8.8 rods is 1.25 and for 1.56 for A4-70 and HCR. The final safety check is then MSk · JF d MRd,s
168

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HVU, it must be verified by the user that the load acting on
the concrete structure, including the loads introduced by the anchor fastening, do not cause failure, e.g.
cracking, of the concrete structure.
N rec,c/s
TENSION c
s
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor
h
is the lower of
NRd,c : concrete cone/pull-out resistance
o
NRd,c NRd,c fB,N f T f A,N fR,N

0 1) 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 110.9 145.6 171.0 203.3 232.9
N Rd,c [kN]
hnom [mm] Nominal anchorage depth 80 90 110 125 170 210 240 270 300 330 360
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, N°Rk,c , by N°Rd,c = N°Rk,c/JMc,N, where the
partial safety, JMc,N , factor is 1.8.
Designation of Cylinder Cube compressive

grade of compressive § fck,cube 25 ·
strength, fB,N 1 ¨ ¸
concrete strength, 80
fB,N © ¹
(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²]
C16/20 16 20 0.94 for fck,cube= 20N/mm²
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.05
C30/37 30 37 1.12
C35/45 35 45 1.20 §f 25 ·
fB,N 1 ¨¨ ck,cube ¸¸
C40/50 40 50 1.25 © 100 ¹
C45/55 45 55 1.30
C50/60 50 60 1.35
Limits:
Concrete cylinder: Concrete cube: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube d 60 N/mm²
diameter
169
fT :Influence of anchorage depth

hact Limits to actual anchorage depth hact: hnom d hact d 2.0 hnom
fT
hnom
fA,N : Influence of anchor spacing

Anchor Anchor size
spacing,
s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
40 0,63
45 0,64 0,63
50 0,66 0,64
55 0,67 0,65 0,63
60 0,69 0,67 0,64
65 0,70 0,68 0,65 0,63
70 0,72 0,69 0,66 0,64
80 0,75 0,72 0,68 0,66 s
f A,N 0,5
90 0,78 0,75 0,70 0,68 0,63 4h nom
100 0,81 0,78 0,73 0,70 0,65
120 0,88 0,83 0,77 0,74 0,68 0,64 0,63
140 0,94 0,89 0,82 0,78 0,71 0,67 0,65 0,63 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
160 1,00 0,94 0,86 0,82 0,74 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,63 smin=0,5hnom
180 1,00 0,91 0,86 0,76 0,71 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,64 0,63 scr,N=2,0hnom
200 0,95 0,90 0,79 0,74 0,71 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,64
220 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,76 0,73 0,70 0,68 0,67 0,65
250
280
310
340
1,00 0,87
0,91
0,96
1,00
0,80
0,83
0,87
0,90
0,76
0,79
0,82
0,85
0,73
0,76
0,79
0,81
0,71
0,73
0,76
0,78
0,69
0,71
0,73
0,76
0,67
0,69
0,72
0,74
3
390 0,96 0,91 0,86 0,83 0,80 0,77
420 1,00 0,94 0,89 0,85 0,82 0,79
450 0,97 0,92 0,88 0,84 0,81
480 1,00 0,94 0,90 0,86 0,83
540 1,00 0,95 0,91 0,88
600 1,00 0,95 0,92
660 1,00 0,96
720 1,00

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
40 0,64
45 0,69 0,64
50 0,73 0,68
55 0,78 0,72 0,64
60 0,82 0,76 0,67
65 0,87 0,80 0,71 0,65
70 0,91 0,84 0,74 0,68
80 1,00 0,92 0,80 0,74
c
90 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,66 fR,N 0,28 0,72
100 0,93 0,86 0,70 hnom
110 1,00 0,91 0,75 0,66
120 0,97 0,79 0,69 0,64 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
140 1,00 0,87 0,76 0,70 0,65 cmin = 0,5hnom
160 0,96 0,83 0,76 0,71 0,66 ccr,N = 1,0hnom
180 1,00 0,90 0,82 0,76 0,71 0,67 0,64
210 1,00 0,91 0,84 0,78 0,74 0,70
240 1,00 0,92 0,86 0,80 0,76
Note: If more than 3 edges
270 1,00 0,93 0,87 0,82 are smaller than ccr,N , consult
300 1,00 0,93 0,88 your Hilti technical advisory
330 1,00 0,94 service.
360 1,00
170
NRd,s 1) : Steel design tensile resistance
2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 10,9 17,4 25,4 48,1 75,1 108,1 142,3 173,0 215,7 253,1 304,3
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 17,5 27,9 40,7 78,9 120,1 172,9 227,8 276,8 345,2 404,9 486,9
2)3)
HAS-R,HAS-HCR [kN] 12,3 19,6 28,6 54,0 84,3 121,0 89,0 108,1 134,8 158,2 190,2
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , using NRd,s= As · fuk/JMs,N, where the partial
safety factor, JMs,N , for grade 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5; 1.87 for grades A4-70 and HCR of the M8 to M24 sizes and 2.4 for grades A4-70 and
HCR in the sizes M27 – M39.
2)
Data given in italics applies to non-standard rods.
3)
Note: The values for the nominal tensile steel strength, fuk, for grade A4 change for the M27 to M39 sizes from 700 N/mm² to 500 N/mm²
and the yield strength, fyk, changes for the M27 to M39 sizes from 450 N/mm² to 250 N/mm². The partial safety factor, JMs,N, changes with
1)
the steel strengths as stated in note above.

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
c
SHEAR h>
1.5
c
VRd,s : steel resistance Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are not met, consult
your Hilti technical advisory service.
Vrd,c: Concrete edge design resistance

0
VRd,c VRd,c f B,N f AR,V f E,V
171

o 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 2.6 3.4 5.0 6.7 12.4 18.5 23.6 30.2 36.8 44.3 52.1
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 40 45 55 65 85 105 120 135 150 165 180
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,c , using V Rd,c =V Rk,c /JMc,V, where the partial
safety factor, JMc,V , is 1.5.
fB,V: Influence of concrete strength

fB,N
fck,cube [N/mm²]
C16/20 16 20 0.89 fck,cube
C20/25 20 25 1 fB,V
C25/30 25 30 1.1 25
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Concrete cylinder:
height 30cm, 15cm
diameter
Concrete cube:
side length 15cm 3
fAR,V: Influence of spacing and edge distance

Formula for single-anchor fastening influenced
only by edge
c c
f AR,V c 2,1
c min c min s n-1
results
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus 1 tabulated s3
spacing) only valid for s < 3c below s2
s1
3c s c c 2,2 c
f AR,V
6c min c min
h >1,5 c
only valid where s1 and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c
3c s1 s 2 ... s n 1 c
f AR ,V the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load.
3nc min c min
172

c/cmin
fAR,V
1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 2,2 2,4 2,6 2,8 3,0 3,2 3,4 3,6 3,8 4,0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1,00 1,31 1,66 2,02 2,41 2,83 3,26 3,72 4,19 4,69 5,20 5,72 6,27 6,83 7,41 8,00
s/cmin 1,0 0,67 0,84 1,03 1,22 1,43 1,65 1,88 2,12 2,36 2,62 2,89 3,16 3,44 3,73 4,03 4,33
1,5 0,75 0,93 1,12 1,33 1,54 1,77 2,00 2,25 2,50 2,76 3,03 3,31 3,60 3,89 4,19 4,50
2,0 0,83 1,02 1,22 1,43 1,65 1,89 2,13 2,38 2,63 2,90 3,18 3,46 3,75 4,05 4,35 4,67
2,5 0,92 1,11 1,32 1,54 1,77 2,00 2,25 2,50 2,77 3,04 3,32 3,61 3,90 4,21 4,52 4,83
3,0 1,00 1,20 1,42 1,64 1,88 2,12 2,37 2,63 2,90 3,18 3,46 3,76 4,06 4,36 4,68 5,00
3,5 1,30 1,52 1,75 1,99 2,24 2,50 2,76 3,04 3,32 3,61 3,91 4,21 4,52 4,84 5,17
4,0 1,62 1,86 2,10 2,36 2,62 2,89 3,17 3,46 3,75 4,05 4,36 4,68 5,00 5,33
4,5 1,96 2,21 2,47 2,74 3,02 3,31 3,60 3,90 4,20 4,52 4,84 5,17 5,50
5,0 2,33 2,59 2,87 3,15 3,44 3,74 4,04 4,35 4,67 5,00 5,33 5,67
5,5 2,71 2,99 3,28 3,57 3,88 4,19 4,50 4,82 5,15 5,49 5,83
6,0 2,83 3,11 3,41 3,71 4,02 4,33 4,65 4,98 5,31 5,65 6,00
6,5 3,24 3,54 3,84 4,16 4,47 4,80 5,13 5,47 5,82 6,17
7,0 3,67 3,98 4,29 4,62 4,95 5,29 5,63 5,98 6,33
7,5 4,11 4,43 4,76 5,10 5,44 5,79 6,14 6,50
8,0 These results are for a two- 4,57 4,91 5,25 5,59 5,95 6,30 6,67
8,5 anchor fastening. 5,05 5,40 5,75 6,10 6,47 6,83
9,0 For fastenings with more than 5,20 5,55 5,90 6,26 6,63 7,00
9,5 two anchors, use the general 5,69 6,05 6,42 6,79 7,17
10,0 6,21 6,58 6,95 7,33
formulae for n anchors at the
10,5 6,74 7,12 7,50
top of the page.
11,0 7,28 7,67
11,5 7,83
12,0 8,00
fE,V : Influence of shear loading direction

Formulae:
Angle, E [°] fE,V V ... applied shear force
0 to 55 1 fE,V 1 for 0° d E d 55°
60 1.1 1 E
fE,V for 55° < E d 90°
70 1.2 cos E 0.5 sin E
80 1.5 fE,V 2 for 90° < E d 180°
90 to 180 2
2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 7,9 12,6 18,3 34,6 54,0 77,8 102,5 124,6 155,3 182,2 219,1
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 12,6 20,1 29,3 55,3 86,4 124,4 164,0 199,3 248,4 291,5 350,6
2) 3)
HAS-R, HAS-HCR [kN] 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2 64.1 77.9 97.1 113.9 137
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated using VRd,s= (0,6 As fuk)/JMs,V. The values for the stressed cross-section, As , and the nominal
tensile strength of steel, fuk, are given in the table ”Anchor mechanical properties and geometry“. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , is 1.25 for
grades 5.8 and 8.8; 1.56 for grade sA4-70 and HCR in the sizes M8 to M24, and 2.0 for grade A4-70 in the sizes M27 to M39.
2)
3)
Note: The values for the nominal tensile strength of steel, fuk, for grade A4-70 change for the M27 to M39 sizes from 700 N/mm² to 500
2 2
N/mm² and the yield strength, fyk , changes for the M27 to M39 sizes from 450N/mm to 250N/mm . The partial safety factor, JMs,V ,
1)
changes the steel strengths as stated in note above.
173
HVU adhesive with HIS-N / HIS-RN sleeve
Features:
- anchor fastenings flush with surface
HVU capsule
- no expansion force in base material
- small edge distance and spacing
- complete system consisting of robust foil capsule,
internally threaded sleeve and setting tool
Material:
- carbon steel galvanised to 5 microns
HIS-N, HIS-RN internally threaded sleeves
HIS-N:
HIS-RN - stainless steel, A4-70: 1.4401
A4
- urethane methacrylate resin, styrene free, 316
HVU capsule:
hardener, quartz sand or corundum, foil tube Small edge
Fire Corrosion Hilti Anchor
Concrete distance/
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIS-N

x tensile values are for HIS-N (derived using grade 12.9 rods)
x shear (steel failure): rod / bolt of steel grade 5.8
3

Tensile, NRu,m 37.2 85.1 102.4 161.3 210.0
Shear, VRu,m 11.9 18.8 27.3 50.9 79.4

Tensile, NRk 35.6 81.6 66.9 150.3 174.3
Shear, VRk 11.0 17.4 25.3 47.1 73.5

Tensile, NRd 12.2 19.3 28.1 52.3 81.7
Shear, VRd 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8

Tensile, NRec 8.7 13.8 20.1 37.4 58.6
Shear, VRec 6.3 9.9 14.5 26.9 42.0
174
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIS-RN

x tensile values are for HIS-RN (derived using grade 12.9 rods)
x shear (steel failure): rod / bolt of steel grade A4-70

Tensile, NRu,m 40.5 85.1 102.4 161.3 173.1
Shear, VRu,m 16.6 26.3 38.2 71.2 111.1

Tensile, NRk 37.5 81.6 66.9 150.3 160.3
Shear, VRk 15.4 24.4 35.4 65.9 102.9

Tensile, NRd 13.7 21.7 31.6 58.8 91.7
Shear, VRd 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0

Tensile, NRec 9.8 15.5 22.5 42.0 65.5
Shear, VRec 7.1 11.1 16.2 30.2 47.1
Setting details
hs
df
d0
h nom
h1
h min
175

Foil capsule HVU... M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210
Sleeve HIS-N ..., HIS-RN ... M8x90 M10x110 M12x125 M16x170 M20x205
hnom [mm] Nominal anchorage depth 90 110 125 170 205
h1 [mm] Hole depth 95 115 130 175 210
Thread engagement min 8 10 12 16 20
hs [mm]
length max 20 25 30 40 50
df [mm] Rec. clearance hole 9 12 14 18 22
Tightening torque HIS-N 15 28 50 85 170
Tinst [Nm]
HIS-RN 12 23 40 70 130
Drill bit TE-CX- 14/22 - - - -
Drill bit TE-T- - 18/32 22/32 28/32 32/37

Curing time before anchor
removing SCREWED-ON
setting tool,
tcure
trel
3
10°C to 20°C 20 min. 30 min.
Rotary hammer (TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 55 or TE 76), a drill bit, a setting tool, a TE
adapter (TE-C-HIS, TE-F-Y-HIS) with HIS-S - M8 - M20 and a blow-out pump.
Setting operations
1 2 3 5
4 HIS-N
HVU
Blow out dust and

Drill hole. Insert HVU capsule. Drive in anchor.
fragments.
5 trel 6 tcure 7
Tinst
Allow rel time to pass. Wait for curing. Apply tightening torque.
176

dp
dp
d
lp lp l l

Capsule HVU ... M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210
lp [mm] Capsule length 110 127 140 170 200
dp [mm] Capsule diameter 10,7 13,1 17,1 22 25,7
Element HIS-N ..., HIS-RN ... M8x90 M10x110 M12x125 M16x170 M20x210
l [mm] Sleeve length 90 110 125 170 210
Sleeve outside
d [mm] 12,5 16,5 20,5 25,4 27,6
diameter
Sleeve 53,6 110 170 255 229
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section
Bolt 36,6 58,0 84,3 157 245
Nominal tensile HIS-N 510 510 460 460 460
fuk [N/mm²]
strength HIS-RN 700 700 700 700 700
HIS-N 410 410 375 375 375
fyk [N/mm²] Yield strength
HIS-RN 350 350 350 350 350
W [mm³] Moment of resistance of bolt 31,2 62,3 109 277 375
5.8 12,7 25,6 45,1 117,1 228,8
Design bending
MRd,s [Nm] 1) 8.8 20,4 41,0 75,1 187,4 366,1
resistance of bolt
A2/A4 14,3 28,7 50,6 131,4 256,7
1)
The design bending resistance of the bolt is calculated from MRd,s = (1,2 W fuk)/Jms,b, where the partial safety factor,
Jms,b , for grade 5.8 and 8.8 bolts is 1.25 and 1.56 for A4-70 and A2-70. The final safety check is then MSd JF d MRd,s.

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with the HVU, it must be verified by the user that the load
acting on the concrete structure, including the loads introduced by the anchor fastening, do not cause failure,
e.g. cracking, of the concrete structure.
N rec,c/s
TENSION
s
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor c
is the lower of
h

NRd,s : steel resistance of the bolt or sleeve
177
o
NRd,c NRd,c f B,N f A,N f R,N
N0Rd,c: Concrete cone/pull-out design resistance

o
N Rd,c [kN] 22.6 35.4 46.9 85.1 120.1
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, N Rk,c , by N Rd,c =NRk,c /JMc,N, where the partial
safety factor, JMc,N , is 1.8.
fB,N: Influence of concrete strength

Concrete strength compressive cylinder compressive cube
designation strength, strength, §f 25 ·
fB,N f 1 ¨ ck, cube ¸
B, N ¨ 100 ¸
C16/20 16 20 0.95 © ¹
C20/25 20 25 1 for fck,cube(150) =20 N/mm²
C25/30 25 30 1.04
C30/37 30 37 1.10
C35/45
C40/50
C45/55
C50/60
35
40
45
50
45
50
55
60
1.16
1.20
1.24
1.28
f
B, N
§f
1 ¨ ck, cube
¨ 125 ¸
25 ·
¸ 3
© ¹
Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm²
diameter
fA,N: Influence of anchor spacing

s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
45 0.63
50 0.64
55 0.65 0.63
60 0.67 0.64
65 0.68 0.65 0.63
70 0.69 0.66 0.64 s
80 0.72 0.68 0.66 fA,N 0.5
90 0.75 0.70 0.68 0.63 4 hnom
100 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.65
110 0.81 0.75 0.72 0.66 0.63
120 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.68 0.65 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
140 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.67 smin = 0,5hnom
160 0.94 0.86 0.82 0.74 0.70 scr,N = 2,0hnom
180 1.00 0.91 0.86 0.76 0.72
200 0.95 0.90 0.79 0.74
220 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.77
250 1.00 0.87 0.80
280 0.91 0.84
310 0.96 0.88
340 1.00 0.91
390 0.98
410 1.00
178

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
45 0.64
50 0.68 c
55 0.72 0.64 fR,N 0.28 0.72
h nom
60 0.76 0.67
65 0.80 0.71 0.65
70 0.84 0.74 0.68 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
80 0.92 0.80 0.74 cmin= 0,5 hnom
90 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.66
100 0.93 0.86 0.70
ccr,N= 1,0 hnom
110 1.00 0.91 0.75 0.67
120 0.97 0.79 0.70 Note: If more than 3 edges are smaller than
140 1.00 0.87 0.77 ccr,N , consult your Hilti technical advisory
160 0.96 0.84 service.
180 1.00 0.91
210 1.00
NRd,s1): Steel design tensile resistance

sleeve
NRd ,s [kN] Sleeve HIS-N 18,2 37,4 52,1 78,2 70,2
HIS-RN 15,6 32,1 49,6 74,4 66,8
Nbolt
Rd, s [kN] Bolt grade 5.8 12,2 19,3 28,1 52,3 81,7
grade 8.8 19,5 30,9 44,9 84,0 130,7
grade A4-70 13,7 21,7 31,6 58,8 91,7
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , by NRd,s= As fuk/JMs,N, where the partial
safety factor, JMs,N , for the sleeve / bolts of grades 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5 or 1.87 for grade A4-70 and 2.4 for the sleeve.
NRd = lower of NRd,c, NRd,ssleeve or NRd,sbolt
179

(The Hilti CC method is a simplified version of ETAG Annex C.) c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1 .5
SHEAR h>
c
1.5
c
VRd,s : steel resistance of the bolt Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are not met, consult
VRd,c: Concrete edge design resistance

The lowest concrete edge resistance must be calculated. All near edges must be checked (not only the edge in
0
VRd,c VRd,c f BV f E,V f AR,V
V0Rd,c: Concrete edge design resistance

3
0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 3.6 5.4 7.6 12.8 19.2
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 45 55 65 85 105
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,s , by V Rd,c =V Rk,s /JMs,V, where the partial safety
factor, JM,V , is 1.5.
fBV: Influence of concrete strength

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fB,V
C16/20 16 20 0.89
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.1 fck,cube
fB,V
C30/37 30 37 1.22 25
C35/45 35 45 1.34
C40/50 40 50 1.41
C45/55 45 55 1.48 Limits:
diameter
180
fE,V : Influence of loading direction

Angle, ß [°] fE,V Formulae:
0 to 55 1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
60 1.1 V ... applied shear force
1
70 1.2 fE, V
cos ß 0,5 sin ß
for 55° < ß d 90°
80 1.5 fE, V 2 E
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2
fAR,V: Influence of edge distance and spacing

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
8.5 These results are for a two- 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
9.0 anchor fastening. 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 For fastenings with more than 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 two anchors, use the general 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 formulae for n anchors at the 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 top of the page. 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
fAR,V: Formulae for edge distance and spacing influence

only by edge
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min results
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening anchors (edge below s2
plus 1 spacing) only valid for s < 3c s1
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
3 c s 1 s 2 ... s n1 c Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
f AR,V the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load.
3 n c min c min
181

1)
VRd,s [kN] Bolt steel grade 5.8 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8
steel grade 8.8 14.1 22.3 32.4 60.3 94.1
A4-70 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated from VRd,s= (0,6 As fuk)/JMs,V. The values for the stressed cross-section, As , of the bolt and
the nominal tensile steel strength, fuk , are taken from the bolt standard ISO 898. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for grades 5.8 and 8.8
is 1.25 and 1.56 for grade A4-70.
VRd = lower of VRd,c and VRd,sbolt
182
HVU adhesive with rebar
Features:
- complete ready-to-use rebar fastening
- no expansion force in base material HVU capsule
- small edge distance and spacing
Rebar section
Material:
- Type BSt 500 according to DIN 488 (See also
Rebar: Euronorm 82-79). For differing rebars, consult
your Hilti advisory service.
- urethane methacrylate resin, styrene free,

HVU Capsule:
hardener, quartz sand or corundum, foil tube
Small edge
Hilti Anchor
Concrete distance / Fire resistance
programme
spacing/
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HVU capsule with rebar section
x steel failure

Rebar diameter
10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
(mm)
Tensile, NRu,m 33.4 66.0 98.9 99.9 176.8 216.3 378.9 449.1 528.7
Shear, VRu,m 28.1 40.4 55.0 71.8 112.3 175.0 219.2 286.3 384.5

Rebar diameter
10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
(mm)
Tensile, NRk 15.9 50.1 69.7 68.4 128.1 128.0 259.1 312.1 372.3
Shear, VRk 26.0 37.4 50.9 66.5 104.0 162.0 203.0 265.1 356.0

Rebar diameter
10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
(mm)
Tensile, NRd 15.0 23.0 31.4 34.9 59.3 91.6 115.4 136.1 158.3
Shear, VRd 17.3 24.9 33.9 44.3 69.3 108.0 135.3 176.7 237.3
Rebar diameter
10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
(mm)
Tensile, NRec 10.7 16.4 22.4 24.9 42.3 65.4 82.4 97.2 113.1
Shear, VRec 12.4 17.8 24.2 31.6 49.5 77.1 96.6 126.2 169.5
183
Setting details
hnom
d0
0/ d
h1
h min

Rebar size, [mm] 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
Capsule HVU... M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210 M30x270 M33x330 M39x360
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 12 15 18 20 25 30 35 40 42
h1 [mm] Hole depth 90 110 125 125 170 210 270 300 360
Min. thickness of base
hmin [mm] 120 140 170 170 220 270 340 380 460
material
TE-CX- 12/22 15/27 - - - - - - -
Drill bit
TE-T- - - 18/32 20/32 25/52 30/57 - - -
Recommended diamond drilling machine

DD 80 E // DD 160 E
3
Curing time before anchor
removing SCREWED-ON
setting tool,
tcure
trel

10°C to 20°C 20 min. 30 min.
less than -5°C Contact your Hilti advisory service.
Rotary hammer (TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55 or TE 76) or a diamond drilling
machine, a drill bit and a blow-out pump. Pre-cut thread on rebar, nut welded on rebar and rebar adapter.
Setting operations
1 2 3 5
4 REBAR
HVU
Blow out dust and

Drill hole. Insert HVU capsule. Drive in the rebar section.
fragments.
5 trel 6 tcure
Allow gel time to

Wait for curing.
pass.
184
d
dp

anchorage depth addtional length
lp according to application
Rebar diameter [mm] 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36

HVU capsule M10x90 M12x110 M16x125 M16x125 M20x170 M24x210 M30x270 M33x330 M39x360
lp [mm] HVU capsule length 110 127 140 140 170 200 260 290 320
d [mm] Nominal rebar diameter 10,7 13,1 17,1 17,1 22 25,7 31,5 31,5 35
Rebar section
Ø d [mm] Nominal rebar diameter 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 78,5 113,1 153,9 201,1 314,2 490,9 615,8 804,2 1017,9
fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile strength 550
fyk [N/mm²] Yield strength 500

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with the HVU, it must be verified by the user that the load acting
on the concrete structure, including the loads introduced by the anchor fastening, do not cause failure, e.g.
cracking, of the concrete structure.
N rec,c/s
TENSION
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor s
c
is the lower of
h

o
NRd,c NRd,c f T f B,N f A,N f R,N

o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] 15.0 23.0 31.4 34.9 59.3 91.6 115.4 136.1 158.3
hnom [mm] Nominal anchorage depth 90 110 125 125 170 210 270 300 360
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, N Rk,c , by NRd,c =N Rk,c /JMc,N, where the partial
185
fT: Influence of anchorage depth

h act
fT Limits to actual anchorage depth hact: hnom d hact d 2.0hnom
h nom

designation strength, strength, fB,N
C20/25 20 25 1
§ f ck,cube 25 ·
fB,N 1 ¨¨ ¸
¸
C25/30 25 30 1,02 © 212.5 ¹
C30/37 30 37 1,06
C35/45 35 45 1,09
C40/50 40 50 1,12 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1,14 25 N/mm² d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm²
C50/60 50 60 1,16
Height 30cm, 15cm side length 15 cm
diameter
fA,N : Influence of rebar spacing fR,N : Influence of edge distance

Anchor Rebar diameter (mm) Edge Rebar diameter (mm)
3
spacing, distance,
s [mm] 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36 c [mm] 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36
45 0,63 45 0,64
50 0,64 50 0,68
55 0,65 0,63 55 0,72 0,64
60 0,67 0,64 60 0,76 0,67
65 0,68 0,65 0,63 0,63 65 0,80 0,71 0,65 0,65
70 0,69 0,66 0,64 0,64 70 0,84 0,74 0,68 0,68
80 0,72 0,68 0,66 0,66 80 0,92 0,80 0,74 0,74
90 0,75 0,70 0,68 0,68 0,63 90 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,80 0,66
100 0,78 0,73 0,70 0,70 0,65 100 0,93 0,86 0,86 0,70
120 0,83 0,77 0,74 0,74 0,68 0,64 110 1,00 0,91 0,91 0,75 0,66
140 0,89 0,82 0,78 0,78 0,71 0,67 0,63 120 0,97 0,97 0,79 0,69
160 0,94 0,86 0,82 0,82 0,74 0,69 0,65 0,63 140 1,00 1,00 0,87 0,76 0,65
180 1,00 0,91 0,86 0,86 0,76 0,71 0,67 0,65 0,63 160 0,96 0,83 0,71 0,66
200 0,95 0,90 0,90 0,79 0,74 0,69 0,67 0,64 180 1,00 0,90 0,76 0,71 0,64
220 1,00 0,94 0,94 0,82 0,76 0,70 0,68 0,65 210 1,00 0,84 0,78 0,70
250 1,00 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,73 0,71 0,67 240 0,92 0,86 0,76
280 0,91 0,83 0,76 0,73 0,69 270 1,00 0,93 0,82
310 0,96 0,87 0,79 0,76 0,72 300 1,00 0,88
340 1,00 0,90 0,81 0,78 0,74 330 0,94
390 0,96 0,86 0,83 0,77 360 1,00
420 1,00 0,89 0,85 0,79
450 0,92 0,88 0,81
480 0,94 0,90 0,83 c
fR,N 0,28 0,72
540 1,00 0,95 0,88 h nom
600 1,00 0,92
660 0,96 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
720 1,00 cmin = 0,5hnom
ccr,N = 1,0hnom
s
f A,N 0,5 Note: If more than 3
4h nom
edges are smaller than
Limits: smin d s d scr,N ccr,N , consult your Hilti
smin = 0,5hnom technical advisory
scr,N = 2,0hnom service.
186

1)
NRd,s [kN] rebar section 32.7 47.1 64.1 83.8 130.9 204.5 256.6 335.1 424.1
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , by
NRd,s= As fuk/JMs,N, where the partial safety factor, JMs,N , for rebar sections of type BSt 500 is 1.32.

SHEAR c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
The design shear resistance of a single c c2 >
1.5
c
anchor is the lower of h>
1 .5c

0
VRd,c VRd,c f B,V f AR,V f E,V


o 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 3.6 5.0 7.1 7.3 12.5 18.8 30.2 37.7 52.1
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 45 55 65 65 85 105 135 150 180

1) o o o
The shear design resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,c , by V Rd,c =V Rk,c /JMc,V, where the partial safety
factor, JMc,V , is 1.5.
187

designation strength, strength, fck,cube
(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fB,V fB,V
25
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22 Limits:
C40/50 40 50 1.41
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5
3.0
3.5
0.92
1.00
1.11
1.20
1.30
1.32
1.42
1.52
1.54
1.64
1.75
1.77
1.88
1.99
2.00
2.12
2.24
2.25
2.37
2.50
2.50
2.63
2.76
2.77
2.90
3.04
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.32
3.46
3.61
3.61
3.76
3.91
3.90
4.06
4.21
4.21
4.36
4.52
4.52
4.68
4.84
4.83
5.00
5.17
3
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
These results are for a two-
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
anchor fastening.
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
For fastenings with more than
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0
two anchors, use the general 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5
formulae for n anchors at the 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 top of the page. 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
188

only by edge
c 2,1
c c s n-1
f AR,V results
c min c min
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus below s2
1 spacing) only valid for s < 3c
s1
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
only valid where sn and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c
3 n c min c min

0 to 55 1
f E, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55° V ... applied shear force
60 1.1
70 1.2 1 for 55° < ß d 90°
fE, V
80 1.5 cos ß 0,5 sin ß E
90 to 180 2 fE, V 2 for 90° < ß d 180°

1)
VRd,s [kN] 17,3 24,9 33,9 44,3 69,3 108,0 135,3 176,7 224,0
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated from VRd,s= (0,6Asfuk)/JMs,V. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for rebar sections of type BSt 500 is
1.5.
189
HIT-RE 500 injection adhesive with HAS rod
Features:
- good performance in diamond drilled holes
- good performance in wet holes
- suitable for water saturated concrete
- large diameter applications
- long working time at elevated temperatures
- odourless epoxy resin
- no expansion forces in base material
- small edge distance and anchor spacing HIT-RE 500 foil pack, mixer
- clean and easy handling
- special lengths available on request
Material: HAS, HAS-R and HAS-HCR rods
HAS, HAS-E: - grade 5.8 , ISO 898 T1, galvanised to min.5 Pm
HAS-HCR: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4529 HAS-E and HAS-E-R rods
- Foil pack: 330 ml, 550 ml
Cartridge: A4 HCR
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100 ml 316 highMo
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F,
Dispenser:
P5000 HY Small edge
Corrosion
High
Hilti Anchor
Concrete distance / corrosion
spacing resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RE 500 with HAS, HAS-E
All data on this section applies to For detailed method, see pages 194– 199.
3
x steel grade 5.8 for M8 – M24 sizes and steel grade 8.8 for M27 – M39
x steel failure
Mean ultimate resistance, Ru,m [kN]: concrete = C20/25

Tensile, NRu,m 17.7 28.2 41.1 77.9 121.7 175.2 264.3 346.9 407.6 484.5 555.1
Shear, VRu,m 10.7 17.0 24.7 46.7 72.9 105.0 221.4 269.1 335.3 393.5 473.3
Characteristic resistance, Rk [kN]: concrete = C20/25

Tensile, NRk 16.4 26.1 38.1 72.2 112.7 162.0 199.6 262.0 307.8 365.9 419.3
Shear, VRk 9.9 15.8 22.9 43.2 67.5 97.3 205.0 249.1 310.5 364.4 438.3
190

Tensile, NRd 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 110.9 145.6 171.0 203.3 232.9
Shear, VRd 7.9 12.6 18.3 34.6 54.0 77.8 164.0 199.3 248.4 291.5 350.6

Tensile, NRec 8.9 11.9 17.0 24.8 44.9 64.7 79.2 104.0 122.1 145.2 166.4
Shear, VRec 5.6 9.0 13.1 24.7 38.6 55.6 117.1 142.4 177.4 208.2 250.4
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RE 500 with HAS-R, -E-R, -HCR
All data on this section applies to For detailed method, see pages 194 – 199.
x steel grade A4-70 for M8 – M24; for A4 grade, fuk changes for the sizes M27 to M39 from 700 N/mm2 to
500 N/mm2.
x steel failure

Tensile, NRu,m 24.8 39.6 57.8 109.1 170.3 244.4 230.7 280.2 349.4 410.1 493.0
Shear, VRu,m 14.8 23.8 34.5 65.4 102.1 146.9 138.5 168.3 209.7 246.0 295.9

Tensile, NRk 23.0 36.7 53.5 101.0 157.6 226.3 213.6 259.4 323.5 379.7 456.5
Shear, VRk 13.7 22.0 32.0 60.5 94.5 136.0 128.2 155.8 194.2 227.8 274.0

Tensile, NRd 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 89.0 108.1 134.8 158.2 190.2
Shear, VRd 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2 64.1 77.9 97.1 113.9 137.0

Tensile, NRec 8.9 11.9 17.0 24.8 44.9 64.7 63.6 77.2 96.3 113.0 135.9
Shear, VRec 6.3 10.1 14.6 27.7 43.3 62.3 45.8 55.6 69.4 81.3 97.9
191
Setting details
hnom
df
d0
h1 t fix
h min
1) M8x110/ M10x130/ M12x160/ M16x190/ M20x240/ M24x290/ M27x340/ M30x380/ M33x420/ M36x460/ M39x510/
Anchor rod HAS /-E/-R/-E-R/-HCR 14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
d0 Drill bit diameter [mm] 10 12 14 18 24 28 30 35 37 40 42
h1 Hole depth [mm] 85 95 115 130 175 215 250 280 310 340 370
hnom
h (min)
Nom. anch. depth
Min. thickness
of base material
[mm]
[mm]
80
100
90
120
110
140
125
170
170
220
210
270
240
300
270
340
300
380
330
410
360
450
3
Max. fixture
tfix (max) [mm] 14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
thickness
Clearance rec. 9 12 14 18 22 26 30 33 36 39 42
df [mm]
hole max. 11 13 15 19 25 29 31 36 38 41 43
Tinst Tightening torque [Nm] 18 35 60 120 260 450 650 950 1200 1500 1800
2)
Filling Volume ml 4 6 10 15 43 65 71 124 140 160 160
Trigger pulls MD/BD 2000 1 2 2 4 9 13 15 25 28 32 32
TE- 1..18M 5..18M 15..35 25..55 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76
Rec. drilling system
Diamond drill. DD EC-1 / DD 100 / DD 130 DD 100 - DD 250
1)
The values for the total rod length and the maximum fixture thickness are only valid for the HAS anchor rods given in this table.
If other HAS rods are used, these values will change. (Example: HAS M12x260/128; l = 260 mm and tfix = 128 mm)
2)
One trigger pull is approx. 5 ml mortar when using the MD 2000 or BD 2000.
Temperature of the Working time in which anchor Curing time before anchor
basematerial: can be inserted and adjusted, can be fully loaded,
40°C 12 min. 4 hours
10°C 2 hours 24 hours
-5°C 4 hours 72 hours
The foil pack temperature must be at least +10°C.
x appropriate drill bit (diamond core bit)

x dispenser (MD 2000, BD 2000, P3000 F, P5000 HY)
x blow-out pump
x set of cleaning brushes
192
Setting operations
Insert foil pack into Screw on mixer.

holder.
Drill hole. Clean hole.
Put cartridge into Throw away first three

Release dispenser. Inject adhesive. Insert anchor.
dispenser. trigger pulls.
Wait for curing. Apply tightnening torque.

dw
Sw
lp l
M8x110/ M10x130/ M12x160/ M16x190/ M20x240/ M24x290/ M27x340/ M30x380/ M33x420/ M36x460/ M39x510/
Anchor rod HAS 14 21 28 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 100
l [mm] Anchor length 110 130 160 190 240 290 340 380 420 460 510
2
As [mm ] Stressed cross-section 32.8 52.3 76.2 144 225 324 427 519 647 759 913
HAS 5.8 500 500 500 500 500 500 - - - - -
2
fuk [N/mm ] Nominal tensile HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 800 800 800 800 800
strength HAS-R
700 700 700 700 700 700 500 500 500 500 500
-HCR
HAS 5.8 400 400 400 400 400 400 - - - - -
2 HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 640 640 640 640 640
HAS-R
450 450 450 450 450 450 250 250 250 250 250
-HCR
3
W [mm ] Moment of resistance 26.5 53.3 93.9 244 477 824 1245 1668 2322 2951 3860
HAS 5.8 12.7 25.6 45.1 117.1 228.8 395.3 - - - - -
Design bending HAS 8.8 - - - - - - 956.1 1280.8 1783.5 2266.5 2987.8
MRd,s [Nm] 1)
resistance HAS-R
14.3 28.7 50.6 131.4 256.7 443.5 478.8 641.5 893.0 1134.9 1484.5
-HCR
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 24 30 36 41 46 50 55 59
dw [mm] Washer diameter 16 20 24 30 37 44 50 56 60 66 72
1)
The design bending resistance of the anchor rod is calculated from MRd,s = (1.2 · W · fuk)/JMs,b , where the partial safety factor, JMs,b , for
grade 5.8 and 8.8 rods is 1.25 and for 1.56 for A4-70 and HCR. The final safety check is then MSk · JF d MRd,s
193

(The Hilti CC method is a simplified Version of ETAG Annex C.)
Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with the HIT-RE 500, it must be verified by the user that the load
Nrec,c/s
TENSION s
c
h
is the lower of:
NRd,s : steel design tensile resistance
o
NRd,c NRd,c f T fB,N f A,N fR,N f Temp f W.sat
N0Rd,c: Concrete cone/pull-out resistance
x concrete compressive strength, fck,cube= 25 N/mm2

3
o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] concrete 12.4 16.6 23.8 34.7 62.9 90.6 110.9 145.6 171.0 203.3 232.9
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance N Rk,c by NRd,c =N Rk,c /JMc,N, where the partial safety
factor JMc,N is equal to 1.8.
h act
fT Limits to actual anchorage depth hact: hnom d hact d 2.0 hnom
h nom

fB,N § fck,cube 25 ·
f 1 ¨ ¸
C20/25 20 25 1 B,N © 100 ¹
C25/30 25 30 1.05
C30/37 30 37 1.12
C35/45 35 45 1.20 Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube d 60 N/mm²
C40/50 40 50 1.25
C45/55 45 55 1.30
C50/60 50 60 1.35
height 30cm, side length 15cm
diameter 15cm
194
fA,N : Influence of anchor spacing

Anchor Anchor size
spacing,
s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
40 0,63
45 0,64 0,63
50 0,66 0,64
55 0,67 0,65 0,63
60 0,69 0,67 0,64
65 0,70 0,68 0,65 0,63
70 0,72 0,69 0,66 0,64
80 0,75 0,72 0,68 0,66 s
f A,N 0,5
90 0,78 0,75 0,70 0,68 0,63 4h nom
100 0,81 0,78 0,73 0,70 0,65
120 0,88 0,83 0,77 0,74 0,68 0,64 0,63
140 0,94 0,89 0,82 0,78 0,71 0,67 0,65 0,63 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
160 1,00 0,94 0,86 0,82 0,74 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,63 smin=0,5hnom
180 1,00 0,91 0,86 0,76 0,71 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,64 0,63 scr,N=2,0hnom
200 0,95 0,90 0,79 0,74 0,71 0,69 0,67 0,65 0,64
220 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,76 0,73 0,70 0,68 0,67 0,65
250 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,76 0,73 0,71 0,69 0,67
280 0,91 0,83 0,79 0,76 0,73 0,71 0,69
310 0,96 0,87 0,82 0,79 0,76 0,73 0,72
340 1,00 0,90 0,85 0,81 0,78 0,76 0,74
390 0,96 0,91 0,86 0,83 0,80 0,77
420 1,00 0,94 0,89 0,85 0,82 0,79
450 0,97 0,92 0,88 0,84 0,81
480 1,00 0,94 0,90 0,86 0,83
540 1,00 0,95 0,91 0,88
600 1,00 0,95 0,92
660 1,00 0,96
720 1,00
fR,N : Influence of edge distance

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
40 0,64
45 0,69 0,64
50 0,73 0,68
55 0,78 0,72 0,64
60 0,82 0,76 0,67
65 0,87 0,80 0,71 0,65
70 0,91 0,84 0,74 0,68
80 1,00 0,92 0,80 0,74
c
90 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,66 fR,N 0,28 0,72
100 0,93 0,86 0,70 hnom
110 1,00 0,91 0,75 0,66
120 0,97 0,79 0,69 0,64 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
140 1,00 0,87 0,76 0,70 0,65 cmin = 0,5hnom
160 0,96 0,83 0,76 0,71 0,66 ccr,N = 1,0hnom
180 1,00 0,90 0,82 0,76 0,71 0,67 0,64
210 1,00 0,91 0,84 0,78 0,74 0,70
240 1,00 0,92 0,86 0,80 0,76
270 1,00 0,93 0,87 0,82 are smaller than ccr,N , consult
300 1,00 0,93 0,88 your Hilti technical advisory
330 1,00 0,94 service.
360 1,00
195
fTemp: Influence of base material temperature
Anchor setting: The Hilti HIT-RE 500 bond strength reduces when the anchor is set, cures and in service in a
base material temperature range from –5 to +5°C. Hilti HIT-RE 500 adhesive shows a post curing effect. When
the adhesive warms up to above +5°C, the bond will reach its full performance.
Service life: Base material temperatures above 50°C will lead to a decrease in Hilti HIT-RE 500 bond strength.
Base material fTemp

ftemp
temperature anchor
service life
setting
-5 °C 0.8 1.0
0 °C 0.9 1.0
5°C 1.0 1.0
50°C - 1.0
60 °C - 0.85
70 °C - 0.62
80 °C - 0.5
Note:
In case of an anchor fastening, which is made in base material at a temperature below +5°C and in service at a
temperature over 50°C, only one influencing factor of the lower value should be applied.
fW.sat: Influence of water saturated concrete
3
f W.sat 0.7
Note:
The reduction shall only be applied, if the anchor is setted into water-saturated concrete, e.g. concrete members
in water, filled water tanks, predrilled holes filled with water for more than 3 days. The reduction does not apply,
if the concrete is subjected to short term water influence, e.g. diamond-cored holes.
2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 10,9 17,4 25,4 48,1 75,1 108,1 142,3 173,0 215,7 253,1 304,3
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 17,5 27,9 40,7 78,9 120,1 172,9 227,8 276,8 345,2 404,9 486,9
2)3)
HAS-R,HAS-HCR [kN] 12,3 19,6 28,6 54,0 84,3 121,0 89,0 108,1 134,8 158,2 190,2
1)
safety factor, JMs,N , for grade 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5; 1.87 for grades A4-70 and HCR of the M8 to M24 sizes and 2.4 for grades A4-70 and
HCR in the sizes M27 – M39.
2)
3)
Note: The values for the nominal tensile steel strength, fuk, for grade A4 change for the M27 to M39 sizes from 700 N/mm² to 500 N/mm²
and the yield strength, fyk, changes for the M27 to M39 sizes from 450 N/mm² to 250 N/mm². The partial safety factor, JMs,N, changes with
1)
the steel strengths as stated in note above.
196

(The Hilti CC method is a simplified Version of ETAG Annex C.) c2 >
1 .5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
SHEAR h>
1 .5
c
1 .5
c
anchor is the lower value of
VRd,s : steel resistance Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are not met,
0
VRd,c VRd,c f BV f AR,V f E,V
x concrete compressive strength, fck,cube = 25 N/mm2

o 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 2.6 3.4 5.0 6.7 12.4 18.5 23.6 30.2 36.8 44.3 52.1
cmin [mm] min. edge distance 40 45 55 65 85 105 120 135 150 165 180
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance V Rk,s by V Rd,c =V Rk,s /JMs,V, where the partial safety
factor, JMs,V , is 1.5.

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fBV fBV
C20/25 20 25 1 25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
height 30cm, side length 15cm
diameter 15cm
197

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
9.5 For fastenings with more than 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 two anchors, use the general 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 formulae for n anchors see 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 following formulae’s. 7.28 7.67
3
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00

only by edge
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min results
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus 1 s2
below. s1
spacing) only valid for s < 3c
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
f AR,V the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
3 n c min c min

0 to 55 1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
70 1.2
1 for 55° < ß d 90°
fE, V
80 1.5 cos ß 0,5 sin ß E
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2 fE, V 2
198
2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 7,9 12,6 18,3 34,6 54,0 77,8 102,5 124,6 155,3 182,2 219,1
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 12,6 20,1 29,3 55,3 86,4 124,4 164,0 199,3 248,4 291,5 350,6
2) 3)
HAS-R, HAS-HCR [kN] 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2 64.1 77.9 97.1 113.9 137
1)
tensile strength of steel, fuk, are given in the table ”Anchor mechanical properties and geometry“. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , is 1.25
for grades 5.8 and 8.8; 1.56 for grade sA4-70 and HCR in the sizes M8 to M24, and 2.0 for grade A4-70 in the sizes M27 to M39.
2)
3)
Note: The values for the nominal tensile strength of steel, fuk, for grade A4-70 change for the M27 to M39 sizes from 700 N/mm² to 500
2 2
N/mm² and the yield strength, fyk , changes for the M27 to M39 sizes from 450N/mm to 250N/mm . The partial safety factor, JMs,V ,
1)
changes the steel strengths as stated in note above.
199
HIT-RE 500 injection adhesive with HIS-N/-RN sleeve
Features:
- injection system with high loading capacity
- small edge distance and anchor spacing
HIT-RE 500 foil pack, mixer
Material:
HIS-N: - carbon steel galvanised to 5 microns
HIS-RN - stainless steel, A4-70: 1.4401 HIS-N and HIS-RN int. threaded sleeves
- Foil pack: 330 ml, 550ml
Cartridge:
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100 ml A4
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F, 316
Dispenser:
P5000 HY
Small edge
Concrete distance /
i t
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RE 500 with HIS-N
For detailed method, see page 204 – 209.
3
x steel grade 5.8 for rod / bolt
x steel failure

Tensile, NRu,m 19.8 31.2 45.6 84.8 132.8
Shear, VRu,m 11.9 18.8 27.3 50.9 79.4

Tensile, NRk 18.3 28.9 42.2 78.5 123.0
Shear, VRk 11.0 17.4 25.3 47.1 73.5

Tensile, NRd 12.2 19.3 28.1 52.3 81.7
Shear, VRd 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8

Tensile, NRec 8.7 13.8 20.1 37.4 58.6
Shear, VRec 6.3 9.9 14.5 26.9 42.0
200
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RE 500 with HIS-RN
All data on this section applies to For detailed method, see page 204– 209.
x steel grade A4-70 for rod / bolt
x steel failure

Tensile, NRu,m 27.7 43.8 63.7 118.7 185.2
Shear, VRu,m 16.6 26.3 38.2 71.2 111.1

Tensile, NRk 25.6 40.6 59.0 109.9 171.5
Shear, VRk 15.4 24.4 35.4 65.9 102.9

Tensile, NRd 13.7 21.7 31.6 58.8 91.7
Shear, VRd 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0

Tensile, NRec 9.8 15.5 22.5 42.0 65.5
Shear, VRec 7.1 11.1 16.2 30.2 47.1
201
Setting details
hs
df
d0
h nom
h1
h min
Sleeve HIS-N..., HIS-RN... M8x90 M10x110 M12x125 M16x170 M20x205
h1
hnom
[mm]
[mm]
Hole depth
Nominal anchorage depth

95
90
115
110
130
125
175
170
210
205
3
Length of bolt engagement min. 8 10 12 16 20
hs [mm]
max. 20 25 30 40 50
Clearance rec. 9 12 14 18 22
df [mm]
hole max. 11 13 15 19 25
Tightening HIS-N 15 28 50 85 170
Tinst [Nm]
torque HIS-RN 12 23 40 70 130
Filling volume ml 6 10 16 40 74
1
Trigger pulls 1 2 3 8 15
Rec. drilling system TE- 15..35 25..55 25..55 35..55 55..76
Diamond drill. DD EC-1 / DD 100 / DD 130 / DD 160
1)
One trigger pull is approx. 5 ml mortar when using the MD 2000 or the BD 2000.
Temperature of the Working time in which anchor Curing time before anchor
basematerial: can be inserted and adjusted, can be fully loaded,

x blow-out pump
x cleaning brushes
202
Setting operations
Insert foil pack into Screw on mixer.

holder.
Put cartridge into Throw away first three

Release dispenser. Inject adhesive. Insert anchor.
Wait for curing. Apply tightnening torque.

d
L [mm] Sleeve length 90 110 125 170 205
d [mm] Sleeve outside diameter 12.5 16.5 20.5 25.4 27.6

Sleeve 53.6 110 170 255 229
Rod/bolt 36.6 58 84,3 157 245
HIS-N 510 510 460 460 460
Fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile strength
HIS-RN 700 700 700 700 700
HIS-N 410 410 375 375 375
Fyk [N/mm²] Nominal yield strength
HIS-RN 350 350 350 350 350
W [mm³] Moment of resistance (Rod / bolt) 31,2 62,3 109 277 375
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending resistance of 5.8 12.7 25.6 45.1 117.1 228.8
1)
rod / bolt 8.8 20.4 41.0 75.1 187.4 366.1
A4-70 14.3 28.7 50.6 131.4 256.7
1)
The design bending resistance of the rod / bolt is calculated using MRd,s = (1,2 W fuk)/JMs,b. The partial safety factor for steel grades 5.8
and 8.8 is JMs,b = 1.25 and JMs,b = 1.56 for the A4-70 grade. The verification of the safety level is then provided by MSk JF d MRd,s
203

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HIT-RE 500, it must be verified by the user that the load
acting on the concrete structure, including the loads introduced by the anchor fastening, do not
cause failure, e.g. cracking, of the concrete structure.
TENSION N rec,c/s

is the lower of, c
h
o
c f T f B,N f A,N f R,N f Temp f W.sat
3
NRd,c NRd,

o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] concrete 22.6 35.4 46.9 85.1 120.1
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, N Rk,c , by N Rd,c =N Rk,c /JMc,N, where the partial safety
factor, JMc,N , is 1.8.

fB,N
C20/25 20 25 1 §f 25 ·
fB, N 1 ¨ ck, cube ¸
C25/30 25 30 1.04 ¨ 125 ¸
C30/37 30 37 1.10 © ¹
C35/45 35 45 1.16
C40/50 40 50 1.20 Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube d 60 N/mm²
C45/55 45 55 1.24
C50/60 50 60 1.28
Height 30cm, side length 15 cm
Diamete 15cm
204

s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
45 0.63
50 0.64
55 0.65 0.63
60 0.67 0.64
65 0.68 0.65 0.63
70 0.69 0.66 0.64
80 0.72 0.68 0.66
s
fA,N 0.5
90 0.75 0.70 0.68 0.63 4 hnom
100 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.65
110 0.81 0.75 0.72 0.66 0.63
120 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.68 0.65 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
140 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.67 smin = 0,5hnom
160 0.94 0.86 0.82 0.74 0.70 scr,N = 2,0hnom
180 1.00 0.91 0.86 0.76 0.72
200 0.95 0.90 0.79 0.74
220 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.77
250 1.00 0.87 0.80
280 0.91 0.84
310 0.96 0.88
340 1.00 0.91
390 0.98
410 1.00

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
c
45 0.64 fR,N 0.28 0.72
50 0.68 h nom
55 0.72 0.64
60 0.76 0.67 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
65 0.80 0.71 0.65
70 0.84 0.74 0.68
cmin= 0,5 hnom
80 0.92 0.80 0.74 ccr,N= 1,0 hnom
90 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.66
100 0.93 0.86 0.70 Note: If more than 3 edges are smaller than ccr,N ,
110 1.00 0.91 0.75 0.67 consult your Hilti technical advisory service.
120 0.97 0.79 0.70
140 1.00 0.87 0.77
160 0.96 0.84
180 1.00 0.91
210 1.00
205
Base material fTemp

ftemp
temperature anchor
service life
setting
-5 °C 0.8 1.0
0 °C 0.9 1.0
5°C 1.0 1.0
50°C - 1.0
60 °C - 0.85
70 °C - 0.62
80 °C - 0.5
Note:
f W.sat 0.7
Note:
3
NRd,s: Steel design tensile resistance

1) HIS-N 18.2 37.4 52.1 78.2 70.2
NRd,s [kN] Sleeve
HIS-RN 15.6 32.1 49.6 74.4 66.8
Grade 5.8 12.2 19.3 28.1 52.3 81.7
1)
NRd,s [kN] Bolt / rod Grade 8.8 19.5 30.9 44.9 84.0 130.7
Grade A4-70 13.7 21.7 31.6 58.8 91.7
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated using the characteristic tensile resistance, NRK,s , divided by Nrec,s= As fuk/JMs,N.
The partial safety factor, JMs,N , for the steel grades 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5, for A4-70 steel 1.87 and for the sleeve 2.4.
206

SHEAR c2 >
1 .5
c
V rec,c/s
s
c c2 >
1 .5
c
The design shear resistance of a single h>
1 .5
c


0

x at a minimum edge distance, c min

0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 3.6 5.4 7.6 12.8 19.2
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,s , by V Rd,c =V Rk,s /Jms,V, where the partial
safety factor, Jms,V , is 1.5.

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fBV fck,cube
C20/25 20 25 1 fBV
25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Diameter 15cm
207

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 These results are for a two- 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
9.0 For fastenings with more 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 than two anchors, use the 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 general formulae for n 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 anchors. 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0

8.00
3
only by 1 edge
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min results
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus below. s2
1 spacing) only valid for s < 3c s1
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
General formula for n-anchor fastening (edge plus
n-1 spacing) only valid where s1 and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c.
3 n c min c min

0 to 55 1
60 1.1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55° V ... applied shear force
70 1.2 1
fE, V for 55° < ß d 90°
80 1.5 cos ß 0,5 sin ß E
90 to 180 2 fE, V 2 for 90° < ß d 180°
208

1)
VRd,s [kN] Rod / bolt Steel grade 5.8 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8
Steel grade 8.8 14.1 22.3 32.4 60.3 94.1
A4-70 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated using VRd,s = (0.6 As fuk)/JMs,V. The values for the stressed cross-section , As of the
rod / stud and the nominal tensile strength, fuk ,were taken from ISO 898. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for steel grades 5.8 and
8.8 is 1.25 and 1.56 for A4-70 steel.
209
HIT-RE 500 injection adhesive with rebar
Features: - base material: concrete

- injection system with high loading capacity
- large diameter applications
HIT-RE 500 foil pack, mixer
Material:
Rebar section
Rebar: Euronorm 82-79.). For differing rebars, consult
- Foil pack: 330 ml, 500ml
Cartridge:
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100 ml
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F, Close edge
Dispenser: Concrete distance /
Fire Hilti Anchor
P5000 HY resistance programme
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-RE 500 with rebar section
All data on this section applies to For detailed method, see page 213– 218.
3
Rebar embedment depth [mm]: concrete = C20/25
Rebar diameter [mm] 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36 40

Nominal anch. depth 80 90 110 125 125 170 210 270 300 330 360

Tensile, Concrete: NRu,m 33.4 46.9 68.8 91.3 104.3 177.3 273.8 344.4 407.2 462.2 515.7
Tensile, Steel: NRu,m 29.9 46.7 67.2 91.4 119.4 186.6 291.6 365.8 477.7 604.6 746.4
Shear, VRu,m 17.9 28.1 40.4 55.0 71.8 112.3 175.0 219.2 286.3 384.5 447.9

Tensile, Concrete: NRk 25.1 35.3 51.8 68.7 78.5 133.5 206.2 258.9 304.6 347.1 389.1
Tensile, Steel: NRk 25.1 39.3 56.5 77.0 100.5 157.1 245.4 307.9 402.1 508.9 628.3
Shear, VRk 16.7 26.0 37.4 50.9 66.5 104.0 162.0 203.0 265.1 356.0 414.6
210

Tensile, NRd 13.9 19.7 28.8 38.2 43.7 74.2 114.5 143.9 169.2 192.8 216.1
Shear, VRd 11.1 17.3 24.9 33.9 44.3 69.3 108.0 135.3 176.7 237.3 276.4

Tensile, NRec 9.9 14.1 20.6 27.3 31.2 53.0 81.8 102.8 120.9 137.7 154.4
Shear, VRec 7.9 12.4 17.8 24.2 31.6 49.5 77.1 96.6 126.2 169.5 197.4
Setting details
hnom
d0
/d
0
h1
hmin

d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 10-12 12-14 16-18 18-20 20-22 25-28 30-32 35-37 40 42 47
h1 [mm] Hole depth 82 93 115 130 130 175 215 275 305 335 365
Min. thickness of base
hmin [mm] 100 120 140 170 170 220 270 340 380 410 450
material
1)
ml 3-6 4-9 13-20 17-25 19-29 40-64 60-84 118-155 162 147 206
Filling volume
trigger pulls 1 1-2 2-4 3-5 4-6 8-13 12-17 24-31 32 30 41
Recommended drilling TE- 1..18M 5..18M 15..35 25..55 35..55 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76 55..76
system Diamond drill. DD EC-1, DD 100 DD 100, DD 130, DD 160
1)
Holes must be filled approx. 2/3 rds.
Temprature of the Working time in which rebar Curing time before rebar can
basematerial: can be inserted and adjusted be fully loaded
less than -5°C “not allowed”
x blow-out pump
x cleaning brushes
211
Setting operations
Insert foil pack into holder. Screw on the mixer. Put cartridge into dispenser.
Throw away first three

trigger pulls.
Release dispenser. Inject adhesive. 3
212
Anchor geometry and mechanical properties d

according to application
Rebar [mm] 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36 40
[mm] Nominal rebar diameter 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 28 32 36 40
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 50.3 78.5 113.1 153.9 201.1 314.2 490.9 615.8 804.2 1017.9 1256.6
Nominal tensile
fuk [N/mm²] 550
strength

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HIT-RE 500, it must be verified by the user that the load
Nrec,c/s
TENSION
The design tensile resistance of a single anchor c
s
is the lower of
h


o
NRd,c NRd,c f T f B,N f A,N f R,N f Temp f W.sat

Rebar [mm] Ø8 Ø10 Ø12 Ø14 Ø16 Ø20 Ø25 Ø28 Ø32 Ø36 Ø40
o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] Concrete 13.9 19.7 28.8 38.2 43.7 74.2 114.5 143.9 169.2 192.8 216.1
1) o o o
213
hact
fT Limits to actual anchorage, hact: hnom d hact d2.0 hnom
hnom

fB,N
C20/25 20 25 1 §f 25 ·
C25/30 25 30 1.03 ¨ 200 ¸
C30/37 30 37 1.06 © ¹
C35/45 35 45 1.10
C40/50 40 50 1.13 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.15 25 N/mm² d fck,cube d 60 N/mm²
C50/60 50 60 1.18
Concrete cylinder:
Concrete cube:
Height 30cm
side length 15 cm
Diameter 15cm

Anchor Rebar size
spacing,
3
Ø8 Ø10 Ø12 Ø14 Ø16 Ø20 Ø25 Ø28 Ø32 Ø36 Ø40
s [mm]
40 0.63
45 0.64 0.63
50 0.66 0.64
55 0.67 0.65 0.63
60 0.69 0.67 0.64
65 0.70 0.68 0.65 0.63 0.63
70 0.72 0.69 0.66 0.64 0.64 s
80 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.66 0.66
fA,N 0.5
4 hnom
90 0.78 0.75 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.63
100 0.81 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.70 0.65
120 0.88 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.74 0.68 0.64 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
140 0.94 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.78 0.71 0.67 0.63 smin = 0,5hnom
160 1.00 0.94 0.86 0.82 0.82 0.74 0.69 0.65 0.63
scr,N = 2,0hnom
180 1.00 0.91 0.86 0.86 0.76 0.71 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.63
200 0.95 0.90 0.90 0.79 0.74 0.69 0.67 0.65 0.64
220 1.00 0.94 0.94 0.82 0.76 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.65
250 1.00 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.67
280 0.91 0.83 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.69
310 0.96 0.87 0.79 0.76 0.73 0.72
340 1.00 0.90 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.74
390 0.96 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.77
420 1.00 0.89 0.85 0.82 0.79
450 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.81
480 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.83
540 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.88
600 1.00 0.95 0.92
660 1.00 0.96
720 1.00
214

Edge Rebar size
distance,
Ø8 Ø10 Ø12 Ø14 Ø16 Ø20 Ø25 Ø28 Ø32 Ø36 Ø40
c [mm]
40 0.64
45 0.69 0.64
50 0.73 0.68
55 0.78 0.72 0.64
60 0.82 0.76 0.67
c
65 0.87 0.80 0.71 0.65 0.65 fR,N 0.28 0.72
70 0.91 0.84 0.74 0.68 0.68 hnom
80 1.00 0.92 0.80 0.74 0.74
90 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.80 0.66
100 0.93 0.86 0.86 0.70
Limits cmin d c d ccr,N
110 1.00 0.91 0.91 0.75 0.66 cmin= 0,5 hnom
120 0.97 0.97 0.79 0.69 ccr,N= 1,0 hnom
140 1.00 1.00 0.87 0.76 0.65
160 0.96 0.83 0.71 0.66
180 1.00 0.90 0.76 0.71 0.67 0.64 are smaller than ccr,N , consult
210 1.00 0.84 0.78 0.74 0.70 your Hilti technical advisory
240 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.76 service.
270 1.00 0.93 0.87 0.82
300 1.00 0.93 0.88
330 1.00 0.94
360 1.00
Base material fTemp

ftemp
temperature anchor
service life
setting
-5 °C 0.8 1.0
0 °C 0.9 1.0
5°C 1.0 1.0
50°C - 1.0
60 °C - 0.85
70 °C - 0.62
80 °C - 0.5
Note:
f W.sat 0.7
Note:
215
NRd,s: Steel design tensile resistance
1)
NRd,s [kN] 20.9 32.7 47.1 64.1 83.8 130.9 204.5 256.6 335.1 424.1 523.6
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, NRk,s , by NRd,s= As fuk/JMs,N, where the partial safety
factor, JMs,N , for rebar sections, type BSt 500, is 1.32.
NRd: System design tensile resistance
Combined loading: Only if tensile load and shear load applied (See page 274 and examples 277 – 284).

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
3
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
c
SHEAR h>
1 .5c

VRd,c : concrete edge resistance Note: If the conditions for h and c2 are not met,

The lowest concrete edge design resistance must be calculated. All near edges must be checked (not only the
edge in the direction of shear). The direction of shear load is accounted for by the factor fE,V.
0

o 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 2.0 3.6 5.0 7.1 7.3 12.5 18.8 30.2 37.7 45.0 54.0
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 40 45 55 65 65 85 105 135 150 165 180
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,c , by V Rd,c =V Rk,c /JMc,V, where the partial
216

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fB,V fck,cube
fB,V
C20/25 20 25 1 25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Diameter 15cm

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single-anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 These results are for a 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
8.5 two-anchor fastening. 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
9.0 For fastenings with two or 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 more anchors, use the 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 general formulae for n 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 anchors. 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
217

only by 1 edge
c c
f AR,V
c min c min results c 2,1
tabulated s n-1
Formula for two-anchors fastening (edge plus below
s2
3c s c s1
f AR,V c 2,2 c
6 c min c min
General formula for n-anchor fastening (edge plus h >1,5 c

n-1 spacing) only valid when s1 and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c
3 c s1 s 2 ... sn 1 c
fAR, V Note: It is assumed that only the row of anchors closest to
3 n c min c min
the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load.

0 to 55 1 V ... applied shear force
fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
3
60 1.1
70 1.2 1 for 55° < ß d 90° E
fE, V
80 1.5 cos ß 0,5 sin ß
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2 f E, V 2
1)
VRd,s [kN] 11.1 17.3 24.9 33.9 44.3 69.3 108.0 135.3 176.7 237.3 276.4
1)
The steel design shear resistance is calculated from VRd,s= (0,6Asfuk)/JMs,V. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for rebar sections, type BSt
500, is 1.5.
Combined loading: Only if tensile load and shear load applied (See page 274 and examples 277 – 284).
218
HVA-UW adhesive with HAS-R/-HCR rod
Features
- underwater fastening
df
- no loss of holding power from curing under water
- for permanently damp or wet fastenings / d0
applications
- suitable for sea water
h1 t fix
- exerts very low expansion forces
h
- small edge distances and spacing
- externally tested and approved
HCR
Material highMo
HAS-R: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4571
Small edge
HAS-HCR: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4529 High corrosion
Concrete distance/
resistance
- urethane methacrylate resin, styrene free, hardener, spacing
HVU Capsule
Mortar: - Hilti HIT HY 20, standard size 330 ml
A4
316
Dispenser: - MD 2000
Corrosion
resistance
Setting details
Anchor size
M8 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24
Setting detail
Foil capsule HVU M 8 X 80 M 10 x 90 M 12 x 110 M 16 x 125 M 20 x 170 M 24 x 210
h1 [mm] Hole depth 80 90 110 125 170 210
1)
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 14 21 28 38 48 54
df [mm] Max. clearance hole 11 13 15 19 26 29
l [mm] Anchor length 110 130 160 190 240 290
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 18 35 60 120 260 450
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 24 30 36
h [mm] Base material thickness 100 120 140 170 220 270
Drill bit and drilling machine Suitable commercially available tools must be used under water
Pre-injection with Hilti HY 20
1 1 2 3 5 8
Trigger pulls with MD 2000 / P 3000 UW/F
1)
The values for the total rod length and the maximum fixture thickness are only valid for the HAS anchor rods given in this
table. If other HAS rods are used, these values will change. (Example: HAS M12 x 260/128; l = 260 mm and tfix = 128 mm)
Setting temperature:(water temperature) Curing time until full loading:

-5° C to 0° C 10 hours
0° C to 10° C 2 hours
20° C and above 30 minutes
219
HVA-UW adhesive with HAS-R/-HCR rod
Setting operations
Inject HIT-HY 20 (observe

Drill hole. Clean hole. Insert HVU capsule.
number of trigger pulls).
HIT-HY 20 adhesive mortar Insert HAS-R (HAS-HCR) Set threaded rod with part
Remove setting tool (after trel).
displaces water in hole. threaded rod. fastened.
Design: See HVA-HAS

(no additional load reduction applicable)
220
HVA-UW adhesive with HIS-RN sleeve
Features hs
- underwater fastening
- no loss of holding power from curing under water
- for permanently damp or wet fastenings /
Tinst
applications do
- suitable for sea water
- exerts very low expansion farces
hnom
- small edge distances spacing h1
h
- fastenings flush with work surface
Material
HIS-RN: - stainless steel, A4-70: 1.4401 A4
HVU Capsule
- urethane methacrylate resin, styrene free, hardener, 316
Mortar: - Hilti HIT HY 20, standard size 330 ml Corrosion Small edge
Concrete
resistance distance/ spacing
Setting details
Anchor size
M8 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20
Setting detail
Capsule HVU M 10 x 90 M 12 x 110 M 16 x 125 M 20 x 170 M 24 x 210
h1 [mm] Hole depth 90 110 125 170 205
Tinst [Nm] Tightening torque 12 23 40 70 130
h [mm] Min. base material thickness 120 150 170 230 280
hs [mm] Thread engagement min. 8 10 12 16 20
max. 20 25 30 40 50
Drill bit and drilling machine Suitable commercially available tools must be used under water
Pre-injection with Hilti HY 20
1 1 2 3 5
Trigger pulls with MD 2000
Setting temperature: -5° C to 0° C Curing time until full 10 hours
(water temperature) 0° C to 10° C loading: 2 hours
20° C and above 30 minutes
Setting operations
Inject HIT-HY 20 (observe

Drill hole. Clean hole. Insert HVU capsule.
number of trigger pulls).
HIT-HY 20 adhesive mortar Set threaded rod with part

Insert HIS-RN threaded rod. Remove setting tool (after trel).
displaces water in hole. fastened.
Design: See HVA-HIS-N (no load additional reduction applicable)
221
HIT-HY 150 injection mortar with HAS rod
Features:
- two-component hybrid mortar
- rapid curing
- small edge distance and anchor spacing possible
- clean and simple application
- fastening through in-place parts
- special lengths available on request
Material:
HAS, HAS-R and HAS-HCR rods
Mortar:
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100ml HAS-E and HAS-E-R rods
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F,
Dispenser:
P5000 HY A4 HCR
316 highMo
Small edge High
3
Concrete distance / corrosion
spacing resistance
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 150 with HAS, HAS-E
x steel failure

Tensile, NRu,m 17.7 28.2 41.1 77.9 121.7 175.2
Shear, VRu,m 10.7 17.0 24.7 46.7 72.9 105.0

Tensile, NRk 16.4 26.1 38.1 72.2 112.7 162.2
Shear, VRk 9.9 15.8 22.9 43.3 67.5 97.3

Tensile, NRd 8.4 11.2 16.8 21.4 36.4 45.4
Shear, VRd 7.9 12.6 18.3 34.6 54.0 77.8
222

Tensile, NRec 6.0 8.0 12.0 15.3 26.0 32.4
Shear, VRec 5.6 9.0 13.1 24.7 38.6 55.6
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 150 with HAS-R, HAS-E-R, HAS-HCR
x steel failure

Tensile, NRu,m 24.8 39.6 57.8 109.1 170.3 244.4
Shear, VRu,m 14.8 23.8 34.5 65.4 102.1 146.9

Tensile, NRk 23.0 36.7 53.5 101.0 157.6 226.3
Shear, VRk 13.7 22.0 32.0 60.5 94.5 136.0

Tensile, NRd 8.4 11.2 16.8 21.4 36.4 45.4
Shear, VRd 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2

Tensile, NRec 6.0 8.0 12.0 15.3 26.0 32.4
Shear, VRec 6.3 10.1 14.6 27.7 43.3 62.3
223
Setting details
hnom
df
d0
h t fix
h min

1)
(M8x110/14) (M10x130/21) (M12x160/28) (M16x190/38) (M20x240/48) (M24x290/54)
Anchor rod HAS /-E/-R/-E-R/-HCR
M8x80/14 M10x90/21 M12x110/28 M16x125/38 M20x170//48 M24x210/54
h [mm] Hole depth 82 92 115 130 175 215
hnom [mm] Nominal anchorage depth 80 90 110 125 170 210
Max. fixture (fastenable)
tfix [mm] thickness 14 21 28 38 48 54
df [mm] Clearance rec. 9 12 14 18 22 26
Tinst
hole
[Nm] Tightening HAS/-E
torque HAS-R/-E-R, HAS-HCR
2)
max. 11
15
12
13
30
25
15
50
40
19
100
90
25
160
135
29
240
200
3
Filling Volume ml 3 6 9 12 30 48
(guide) Trigger pulls~ 0.5 1 1.5 2 5 8
TE-CX- 10/22 12/22 14/22 - - -
Drill bit
TE-T- - - - 18/32 24/32 28/52
1)
The values in the first line describe the old specification for the anchor rod.
2)
The hole must be filled about 50%.
Note: To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar after opening a 330 ml foil pack of Hilti HIT-
HY 150 must be thrown away, in case of using a 500 ml foil pack the first three trigger pulls must be thrown away.
One trigger pull is approx. 8 ml mortar when using the MD 2000.
Working time in which rod Curing time before anchor

Temperature of the
can be inserted and can be fully loaded,
base material
adjusted,
°C tgel tcure
-5 90 min. 6 hours
0 45 min. 3 hours
5 25 min. 1.5 hours
20 6 min. 50 min.
30 4 min. 40 min.
40 2 min. 30 min.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE 6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55 or TE 76), a drill bit, the
MD 2000 or BD 2000 (P3000 F, MD2500, P3500F, P5000 HY) dispenser, blow-out pump, a brush and a torque
wrench.
224
Setting operations
1 2 3x 4
Insert foil pack into

holder.
5 6 7 8
00
3 2 M
D
20
MD 2000
MD 2000
2x
1
Throw away first two

Put cartridge into
Screw in mixer. trigger pulls using a Inject mortar.
dispenser.
330ml cartridge*
9 10 F C tgel 11
23 -5 90 min
MD 2000
32 0 45 min
41 5 25 min
68 20 6 min
86 30 4 min
104 40 2 min
Release dispenser. Insert rod before gel time. Wait for curing.
11 F C tcure 12
23 -5 6 h Tinst
32 0 3 h
41 5 1.5 h
68 20 50 min
86 30 40 min
104 40 30 min
tcure time Apply tightening torque.
* Throw away first three trigger pulls using a 500ml cartridge

dW
SW

As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 32.8 52.3 76.2 144 225 324
fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile HAS (5.8), HAS-E (5.8) 500 500 500 500 500 500
strength HAS-R, HAS-E-R, -HCR 700 700 700 700 700 700
fyk [N/mm²] Nominal yield strength HAS (5.8), HAS-E (5.8) 400 400 400 400 400 400
HAS-R, HAS-E-R, -HCR 450 450 450 450 450 450
W [mm³] Moment of resistance 26.5 53.3 93.9 244 477 824
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending HAS (5.8), HAS-E (5.8) 12.7 25.6 45.1 117.1 228.8 395.3
1)
resistance HAS-R, HAS-E-R, -HCR 14.3 28.7 50.6 131.4 256.7 443.5
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19 24 30 36
dw [mm] Washer diameter 16 20 24 30 37 44
1)
The design bending resistance of the anchor rod was calculated from MRd,s = (1.2 W fuk)/JMs,b, where the partial safety factor for
steel of grade 5.8 is JMs,b = 1.25, for A4-70 and HCR JMs,b = 1.56. Verification of the safety level is then MSk JF d MRd,s.
225

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with the HIT-HY 150, it must be verified by the user that the load
Nrec,c/s
TENSION s
c
h
is the lower of:
o

3
o
N Rd,c [kN] 8.4 11.2 16.8 21.4 36.4 45.4
1) o o o
h act
h nom

fB,N § fck, cube 25 ·
C20/25 20 25 1 f 1 ¨ ¸
B, N ¨ 100 ¸
C25/30 25 30 1.05 © ¹
C30/37 30 37 1.12
C35/45 35 45 1.20
C40/50 40 50 1.25
C45/55 45 55 1.30
C50/60 50 60 1.35
diameter
226

Anchor Anchor size
spacing,
M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
s [mm]
40 0.63
45 0.64 0.63
50 0.66 0.64
55 0.67 0.65 0.63
60 0.69 0.67 0.64
65 0.70 0.68 0.65 0.63
70 0.72 0.69 0.66 0.64
80 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.66 s
f A,N 0. 5
90 0.78 0.75 0.70 0.68 0.63 4h nom
100 0.81 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.65
120 0.88 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.68 0.64 Limits: smin d s d scr,N
140 0.94 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.67 smin=0.5hnom
160 1.00 0.94 0.86 0.82 0.74 0.69
scr,N=2.0 hnom
180 1.00 0.91 0.86 0.76 0.71
200 0.95 0.90 0.79 0.74
220 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.76
250 1.00 0.87 0.80
280 0.91 0.83
310 0.96 0.87
340 1.00 0.90
390 0.96
420 1.00

Edge Anchor size
distance,
M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
c [mm] c
40 0.64 fR,N 0.28 0.72
45 0.69 0.64 h nom
50 0.73 0.68
55 0.78 0.72 0.64
Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
60 0.82 0.76 0.67 cmin= 0.5 hnom
65 0.87 0.80 0.71 0.65 ccr,N= 1.0 hnom
70 0.91 0.84 0.74 0.68
80 1.00 0.92 0.80 0.74 Note: If more than 3 edges are
90 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.66 smaller than ccr,N, consult your
100 0.93 0.86 0.70
Hilti technical advisory service.
110 1.00 0.91 0.75 0.66
120 0.97 0.79 0.69
140 1.00 0.87 0.76
160 0.96 0.83
180 1.00 0.90
210 1.00

2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 10,9 17,4 25,4 48,1 75,1 108,1
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 17,5 27,9 40,7 78,9 120,1 172,9
2)
HAS-R,HAS-HCR [kN] 12,3 19,6 28,6 54,0 84,3 121,0
1)
safety factor, JMs,N , for grade 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5; 1.87 for grades A4-70 and HCR of the M8 to M24 sizes
2)
227

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
SHEAR c
h>
1.5
c
anchor is the lower value of
3
0

0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 2.6 3.4 5.0 6.7 12.4 18.5
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 40 45 55 65 85 105
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance V Rk,s by V Rd,c= V Rk,s/JMs,V, where the partial safety
factor, JMs,V , is 1.5.
228

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fBV
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 fck,cube
fBV
C40/50 40 50 1.41 25
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
Concrete cylinder: Concrete cube: Limits:
height 30cm, 15cm side length 15cm 2 N/mm2 d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm2
diameter

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
These results are for a two-
8.5 5.05 5.40 5.75 6.10 6.47 6.83
anchor fastening.
9.0 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
For fastenings with more than
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
two anchors, use the general
10.0 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
formulae for n anchors at the
10.5 6.74 7.12 7.50
top of the page.
11.0 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
229

only by edge
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min results
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus 1 below s2
spacing) only valid for s < 3c s1
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
f AR,V the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load
3 n c min c min

0 to 55 1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
60
70
80
1.1
1.2
1.5
fE, V
1
cos ß 0,5 sin ß
for 55° < ß d 90°
E
3
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2 fE, V 2

2)
HAS grade 5.8 [kN] 7,9 12,6 18,3 34,6 54,0 77,8
2)
HAS grade 8.8 [kN] 12,6 20,1 29,3 55,3 86,4 124,4
2)
HAS-R, HAS-HCR [kN] 8.8 14.1 20.5 38.8 60.6 87.2
1)
tensile strength of steel, fuk, are given in the table ”Anchor mechanical properties and geometry“. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , is 1.25
for grades 5.8 and 8.8; 1.56 for grade sA4-70 and HCR in the sizes M8 to M24
2)
230
HIT-HY 150 injection mortar with HIS-N/-RN sleeve
Features:
- rapid curing
Material:
HIS-N: - carbon steel galvanised to 5 microns
HIS-RN - stainless steel, A4-70: 1.4401
- Foil pack: 330 ml, 500 ml HIS-N and HIS-RN int. threaded sleeves
Mortar:
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100ml
Dispenser:
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F, A4
P5000 HY
316
Small edge
Concrete distance /
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 150 with HIS-N
x tensile values are for HIS-N (derived using grade 12.9 rods), shear (steel failure): rod / bolt of steel grade 5.8

Tensile, NRu,m 40.7 58.2 74.6 153.0 113.7
Shear, VRu,m 11.9 18.8 27.3 50.9 79.4

Tensile, NRk 35.2 43.6 51.5 120.9 105.3
Shear, VRk 11.0 17.4 25.3 47.1 73.5

Tensile, NRd 11.5 17.2 21.8 37.7 45.1
Shear, VRd 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8

Tensile, NRec 8.2 12.3 15.6 26.9 32.2
Shear, VRec 6.3 9.9 14.5 26.9 42.0
231
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 150 with HIS-RN
All data on this section applies to For detailed design method, see pages 235 –239.
x concrete: fck,cube = 25 N/mm2
x tensile values are for HIS-RN (derived using steel grade 12.9)
x shear (steel failure): rod / bolt of steel grade A4-70

Tensile, NRu,m 40.7 58.2 74.6 153.0 173.1
Shear, VRu,m 16.6 26.3 38.2 71.2 111.1
Characteristic resistance Rk [kN]: concrete # C20/25

Tensile, NRk 35.2 43.6 51.5 120.9 160.3
Shear, VRk 15.4 24.4 35.4 65.9 102.8
Following values according to the 3


Tensile, NRd 11.5 17.2 21.8 37.7 45.1
Shear, VRd 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0

Tensile, NRec 8.2 12.3 15.6 26.9 32.2
Shear, VRec 7.0 11.2 16.2 30.2 47.1
Setting details
hs
df
d0
h nom
h1
h min
232
h1 [mm] Hole depth 95 115 130 175 210
hs [mm]
max. 20 25 30 40 50
df [mm]
hole max. 11 13 15 19 25
Tinst [Nm]
torque HIS-RN 12 23 40 70 130
1) ml 6 9 12 30 40
Filling Volume
Trigger pulls~ 1 1.5 2 5 7
Drill bit TE-T- - 18/32 22/32 28/32 32/37
1)
The hole must be filled about 50%.
Note: To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar after opening a 330 ml foil pack of Hilti HIT-HY
150 must be thrown away, in case of using a 500 ml foil pack the first three trigger pulls must be thrown away.

Temperature of the can be inserted and can be fully loaded,
base material adjusted,
°C tgel tcure
-5 90 min. 6 hours
0 45 min. 3 hours
5 25 min. 1.5 hours
20 6 min. 50 min.
30 4 min. 40 min.
40 2 min. 30 min.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55 or TE 76), a drill bit, the MD
2000 or BD 2000 (P3000 F, MD2500, P3500F, P5000 HY) dispenser, a blow-out pump, a brush and a torque
wrench.
233
Setting operations
1 2 3x 3 4
3x
Insert foil pack into

holder.
5 6 7 8
00
3 2 M
D
20
MD 2000
MD 2000
2x
1

Put cartridge into
Screw on mixer trigger pulls using a 330ml Inject mortar.
dispenser
cartridge*
9 10 10 F C tgel 11
23 -5 90 min
MD 2000
32 0 45 min
41 5 25 min
68 20 6 min
86 30 4 min
104 40 2 min
Release dispenser.
11 F C tcure 12
Insert rod before gel time Wait for curing.
3
23 -5 6 h Tinst
32 0 3 h
41 5 1.5 h
68 20 50 min
86 30 40 min
104 40 30 min
tcure time Apply tightening torque.

d
234
l [mm] Sleeve length 90 110 125 170 205
d [mm] Sleeve outside diameter 12.5 16.5 20.5 25.4 27.6

Sleeve 53.6 110 170 255 229
Rod/bolt 36.6 58 84,3 157 245
HIS-N 510 510 460 460 460
fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile strength
HIS-RN 700 700 700 700 700
HIS-N 410 410 375 375 375
fyk [N/mm²] Nominal yield strength
HIS-RN 350 350 350 350 350
W [mm³] Moment of resistance (Rod / bolt) 31,2 62,3 109 277 375
MRd,s [Nm] Design bending resistance of 5.8 12.7 25.6 45.1 117.1 228.8
1)
rod / bolt 8.8 20.4 41.0 75.1 187.4 366.1
A4-70 14.3 28.7 50.6 131.4 256.7
1)
The design bending resistance of the rod / bolt is calculated using MRd,s = (1,2 W fuk)/JMs,b. The partial safety factor for steel grades 5.8
and 8.8 is JMs,b = 1.25 and JMs,b = 1.56 for the A4-70 grade. The verification of the safety level is then provided by MSk JF d MRd,s

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HIT-HY 150, it must be verified by the user that the load
TENSION
N rec,c/s
is the lower of,
s
c
h
NRd,s : steel resistance of the bolt or sleeve
o

o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] 11.5 17.2 21.8 37.7 45.1
1) o o o
The design tensile resistance is calculated from the characteristic tensile resistance, N Rk,c ,b y NRd,c =NRk,c /JMc,N, where the partial
235

fB,N
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.04 §f 25 ·
C30/37 30 37 1.10 ¨ 125 ¸
© ¹
C35/45 35 45 1.16
C40/50 40 50 1.20
C45/55 45 55 1.24 Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm²
C50/60 50 60 1.28
diameter

s [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
45 0.63
50 0.64
55 0.65 0.63
60 0.67 0.64
65 0.68 0.65 0.63
70 0.69 0.66 0.64 s
80 0.72 0.68 0.66 fA,N 0.5
90
100
110
0.75
0.78
0.81
0.70
0.73
0.75
0.68
0.70
0.72
0.63
0.65
0.66 0.63
4 hnom
Limits: smin d s d scr,N

3
120 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.68 0.65
140 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.67 smin = 0,5hnom
160 0.94 0.86 0.82 0.74 0.70 scr,N = 2,0hnom
180 1.00 0.91 0.86 0.76 0.72
200 0.95 0.90 0.79 0.74
220 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.77
250 1.00 0.87 0.80
280 0.91 0.84
310 0.96 0.88
340 1.00 0.91
390 0.98
410 1.00

Edge Anchor size
distance,
c [mm] M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
c
45 0.64 fR,N 0.28 0.72
50 0.68 h nom
55 0.72 0.64
60 0.76 0.67 Limits: cmin d c d ccr,N
65 0.80 0.71 0.65
70 0.84 0.74 0.68
cmin= 0,5 hnom
80 0.92 0.80 0.74 ccr,N= 1,0 hnom
90 1.00 0.87 0.80 0.66
100 0.93 0.86 0.70 Note: If more than 3 edges are smaller than ccr,N ,
110 1.00 0.91 0.75 0.67 consult your Hilti technical advisory service.
120 0.97 0.79 0.70
140 1.00 0.87 0.77
160 0.96 0.84
180 1.00 0.91
210 1.00
236

HIS-N 18.2 37.4 52.1 78.2 70.2
NRd,s [kN] Sleeve
HIS-RN 15.6 32.1 49.6 74.4 66.8
Grade 5.8 12.2 19.3 28.1 52.3 81.7
NRd,s [kN] Bolt / rod Grade 8.8 19.5 30.9 44.9 84.0 130.7
Grade A4-70 13.7 21.7 31.6 58.8 91.7
1)
The design tensile resistance is calculated using the characteristic tensile resistance, NRK,s , divided by Nrec,s= As fuk/JMs,N.
The partial safety factor, JMs,N , for the steel grades 5.8 and 8.8 is 1.5, for A4-70 steel 1.87 and for the sleeve 2.4.

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
SHEAR 1.5
c
h>
1.5
c

0

x at a minimum edge distance, c min
237

0 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 3.6 5.4 7.6 12.8 19.2
1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,s , by V Rd,c =V Rk,s /Jms,V, where the partial
safety factor, Jms,V , is 1.5.

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fBV fck,cube
fck,cube [N/mm²] fBV
C20/25 20 25 1 25
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22
C35/45 35 45 1.34 Limits:
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

fAR,V c/cmin
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
3
Single anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0 0.83 1.02 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.89 2.13 2.38 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.35 4.67
2.5 0.92 1.11 1.32 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.77 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.90 4.21 4.52 4.83
3.0 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.64 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.63 2.90 3.18 3.46 3.76 4.06 4.36 4.68 5.00
3.5 1.30 1.52 1.75 1.99 2.24 2.50 2.76 3.04 3.32 3.61 3.91 4.21 4.52 4.84 5.17
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
9.5 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 For fastenings with more than 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 two anchors, use the general 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 formulae for n anchors see 7.28 7.67
11.5 following page. 7.83
12.0 8.00
238

only by 1 edge
c 2,1
c c
f AR,V s n-1
c min c min results
tabulated s3
Formula for two-anchor fastening (edge plus below s2
c 2,2 c
3c s c
f AR,V
6 c min c min
h >1,5 c
n-1 spacing) only valid where s1 and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c.
3 n c min c min

0 to 55 1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
1
70 1.2 fE, V for 55° < ß d 90°
cos ß 0,5 sin ß
80 1.5 fE, V 2 E
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2

1)
VRd,s [kN] Rod / bolt Steel grade 5.8 8.8 13.9 20.2 37.7 58.8
Steel grade 8.8 14.1 22.3 32.4 60.3 94.1
A4-70 9.9 15.6 22.7 42.3 66.0
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated using VRd,s = (0.6 As fuk)/JMs,V,. The values for the stressed cross-section , As of the
rod / stud and the nominal tensile strength, fuk ,were taken from ISO 898. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for steel grades 5.8 and
8.8 is 1.25 and 1.56 for A4-70 steel.
239
HIT-HY 150 injection mortar with rebar
Features:
- rapid curing
Material:
- Type BSt 500 according to DIN 488 (See also HIT-HY 150 foil pack, mixer
Rebar: Euronorm 82-79.). For differing rebars, consult
Rebar section
Mortar:
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100ml
- MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, MD2500, P3500 F,
Dispenser:
P5000 HY
Close edge
Concrete distance / Fire resistance
spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 150 with rebar section
3
x steel failure

Rebar 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
Tensile, NRu,m 15.51 29.4 57.0 66.8 79.8 138.3 185.0
Shear, VRu,m 17.9 28.1 40.4 55.0 71.8 112.3 175.0

Rebar 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
Tensile, NRk 13.0 24.1 44.6 53.4 64.6 84.7 129.6
Shear, VRk 16.7 26.0 37.4 50.9 66.5 104.0 162.0

Rebar 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
NRd
Tensile, 7.2 10.1 14.3 18.5 22.7 30.2 37.8

Shear, VRd 11.1 17.3 24.9 33.9 44.3 69.3 108.0
Rebar 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
NRec
Tensile, 5.1 7.2 10.2 13.2 16.2 21.6 27.0

Shear, VRec 7.9 12.4 17.8 24.2 31.6 49.5 77.1
240
Setting details
hnom
d0
0/ d
h1
h min
Rebar diameter, [mm] 8 10 12 14 16 20 25

h1 [mm] Hole depth 82 93 115 130 150 175 215
hnom [mm] Nominal anchorage depth 80 90 110 125 145 170 210
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 120 140 160 180 180 230 270
1)
ml 4 6 11 15 22 36 48
Filling volume
Trigger pulls~ 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 8
Drill bit TE-TX- 10/22 12/22 15/27 - - - -
Drill bit TE-T- - - - 18/32 20/32 25/52 30/57
Note: To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar after opening a 330 ml foil pack of Hilti HIT-
HY 150 must be thrown away, in case of using a 500 ml foil pack the first three trigger pulls must be thrown away.

Temperature of the can be inserted and can be fully loaded,
base material adjusted,
°C tgel tcure
-5 90 min. 6 hours
0 45 min. 3 hours
5 25 min. 1.5 hours
20 6 min. 50 min.
30 4 min. 40 min.
40 2 min. 30 min.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2,TE5, TE 6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55 or TE 76), a drill bit, the MD
2000 or BD 2000 (P3000 F, MD 2500, P 3500F, P5000 HY) dispenser, a blow-out pump and a brush.
241
Setting operations
1 2 3x 3 4
3x
Drill hole. Clean hole. Insert foil pack into holder.

5 6 7 8
00
3 2 M
D
20
MD 2000
MD 2000
2x
1

Put cartridge into
Screw on mixer. trigger pulls using a 330ml Inject mortar.
dispenser.
cartridge*
9 10 10 F C tgel 11 11 F C tcure
23 -5 90 min 23 -5 6 h
MD 2000
32 0 45 min 32 0 3 h
41 5 25 min 41 5 1.5 h
68 20 6 min 68 20 50 min
86 30 4 min 86 30 40 min
104 40 2 min 104 40 30 min
3
Release dispenser. Insert rebar before gel time. Wait for curing.

d

according to application
Rebar diameter, (mm) 8 10 12 14 16 20 25

d [mm] Nominal rebar diameter 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
As [mm²] Stressed cross-section 50.2 78.5 113.1 153.9 201.1 314.2 490.9
fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile strength 550
242

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with HIT-HY 150, it must be verified by the user that the load
TENSION Nrec,c/s

c
is the lower of
h
o
NRd,c NRd,c f T fB,N f A,N fR,N

Rebar diameter, d (mm) 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
o 1)
N Rd,c [kN] 7.2 10.1 14.3 18.5 22.7 30.2 37.8
1) o o o
hact
fT Limits to actual anchorage, hact: hnom d hact d2.0 hnom
hnom

fB,N
C20/25 20 25 1 §f 25 ·
C25/30 25 30 1.02 ¨ 212.5 ¸
C30/37 30 37 1.06 © ¹
C35/45 35 45 1.09
C40/50 40 50 1.12 Limits: 25 N/mm² d fck,cube(150) d 60 N/mm²
C45/55 45 55 1.14
C50/60 50 60 1.16
diameter
243

Caution: In view of the high loads transferable with the HIT-HY 150, it must be verified by the user that the load
Nrec,c/s
TENSION s
c
h
is the lower of:
o

3
o
N Rd,c [kN] 8.4 11.2 16.8 21.4 36.4 45.4
1) o o o
h act
h nom

fB,N § fck, cube 25 ·
C20/25 20 25 1 f 1 ¨ ¸
B, N ¨ 100 ¸
C25/30 25 30 1.05 © ¹
C30/37 30 37 1.12
C35/45 35 45 1.20
C40/50 40 50 1.25
C45/55 45 55 1.30
C50/60 50 60 1.35
diameter
244
NRd: System design tensile resistance
Detailed design method – HILTI CC

c2 >
1.5 V rec,c/s
c
s
c c2 >
1.5
c
SHEAR h>
1.5
c


0

o 1)
V Rd,c [kN] 2.0 3.6 5.0 7.1 7.3 12.5 18.8
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 40 45 55 65 75 85 105

1) o o o
The design shear resistance is calculated from the characteristic shear resistance, V Rk,c , by V Rd,c =V Rk,c /JMc,V, where the partial
245

(ENV 206) fck,cyl [N/mm²] fck,cube [N/mm²] fB,V fB,V
25
C20/25 20 25 1
C25/30 25 30 1.1
C30/37 30 37 1.22 Limits:
C40/50 40 50 1.41
C45/55 45 55 1.48
C50/60 50 60 1.55
diameter

c/cmin
fAR,V
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Single-anchor with
edge influence, 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.02 2.41 2.83 3.26 3.72 4.19 4.69 5.20 5.72 6.27 6.83 7.41 8.00
s/cmin 1.0 0.67 0.84 1.03 1.22 1.43 1.65 1.88 2.12 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.16 3.44 3.73 4.03 4.33
1.5 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.54 1.77 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.76 3.03 3.31 3.60 3.89 4.19 4.50
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
0.83
0.92
1.00
1.02
1.11
1.20
1.30
1.22
1.32
1.42
1.52
1.43
1.54
1.64
1.75
1.65
1.77
1.88
1.99
1.89
2.00
2.12
2.24
2.13
2.25
2.37
2.50
2.38
2.50
2.63
2.76
2.63
2.77
2.90
3.04
2.90
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.18
3.32
3.46
3.61
3.46
3.61
3.76
3.91
3.75
3.90
4.06
4.21
4.05
4.21
4.36
4.52
4.35
4.52
4.68
4.84
4.67
4.83
5.00
5.17
3
4.0 1.62 1.86 2.10 2.36 2.62 2.89 3.17 3.46 3.75 4.05 4.36 4.68 5.00 5.33
4.5 1.96 2.21 2.47 2.74 3.02 3.31 3.60 3.90 4.20 4.52 4.84 5.17 5.50
5.0 2.33 2.59 2.87 3.15 3.44 3.74 4.04 4.35 4.67 5.00 5.33 5.67
5.5 2.71 2.99 3.28 3.57 3.88 4.19 4.50 4.82 5.15 5.49 5.83
6.0 2.83 3.11 3.41 3.71 4.02 4.33 4.65 4.98 5.31 5.65 6.00
6.5 3.24 3.54 3.84 4.16 4.47 4.80 5.13 5.47 5.82 6.17
7.0 3.67 3.98 4.29 4.62 4.95 5.29 5.63 5.98 6.33
7.5 4.11 4.43 4.76 5.10 5.44 5.79 6.14 6.50
8.0 These results are for a two- 4.57 4.91 5.25 5.59 5.95 6.30 6.67
9.0 For fastenings with two or 5.20 5.55 5.90 6.26 6.63 7.00
9.5 more anchors, use the general 5.69 6.05 6.42 6.79 7.17
10.0 formulae for n anchors at the 6.21 6.58 6.95 7.33
10.5 top of the page. 6.74 7.12 7.50
11.0 7.28 7.67
11.5 7.83
12.0 8.00
246

only by 1 edge
c c
f AR,V
c min c min results c 2,1
tabulated s n-1
Formula for two-anchors fastening (edge plus below
s2
3c s c s1
f AR,V
6 c min c min c 2,2 c
n-1 spacing) only valid when s1 and sn-1 are each < 3c and c2 > 1.5c
h >1,5 c
3 c s1 s 2 ... sn 1 c
fAR, V
3 n c min c min
the free concrete edge carries the centric shear load.

0 to 55 1 fE, V 1 for 0° d ß d 55°
70 1.2 1 for 55° < ß d 90°
fE, V
80 1.5 cos ß 0,5 sin ß E
for 90° < ß d 180°
90 to 180 2 f E, V 2

1)
VRd,s [kN] 11.1 17.3 24.9 33.9 44.3 69.3 108.0
1)
The design shear resistance is calculated from VRd,s= (0,6Asfuk)/JMs,V. The partial safety factor, JMs,V , for rebar sections, type BSt 500, is
1.5.
247
HIT-ICE with HAS rod
Features:
- two component epoxy metha acrylat mortar
- even at extremely low tempratures
applicable
- high loading capacity HIT-ICE hard cartdrige, mixer
- special rod lengths available on request
Material:
Mortar: - HIT-ICE, standard size 296 ml
dispenser MD 1000
A4 HCR HAS, HAS-R and HAS-HCR rods

316 highMo
Concrete
Small edge
distance /
spacing
Corrosion
resistance
High
corosion
resistance
Hilti An-
chor
program
HAS-E und HAS-E-R Ankerstangen 3
Setting details

1)
(M8x110/14) (M10x130/21) (M12x160/28) (M16x190/38) (M20x240/48) (M24x290/54)
Anchor rod HAS /-E/-R/-E-R/-HCR
M8x80/14 M10x90/21 M12x110/28 M16x125/38 M20x170//48 M24x210/54
h [mm] Hole depth 85 95 115 130 175 215
Max. fixture (fastenable) thick-
tfix [mm] ness 14 21 28 38 48 54
df [mm] Clearance hole rec. 9 12 14 18 22 26
max. 11 13 15 19 23 29
Tinst [Nm] Tightening HAS/-E 15 30 50 100 160 240
torque HAS-R/-E-R, HAS-HCR 12 25 40 90 135 200
2) ml 3 6 9 12 30 48
Injected volume 3)
Trigger pulls ~ min. 1 2 3 4 10 16
TE-CX- 10/22 12/22 14/22 - - -
Drill bit
TE-T- - - - 18/32 22/32 28/52
1)
The values in the first line describe the old specification for the anchor rod.
2)
To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar must be thrown away after opening the cartridge.
3)
The hole must be about half filled with mortar.
df
d0
h t fix
h min
248
HIT-ICE with HAS rod
Working time in which rod

Temprature of the base Curing time before anchor
can be inserted and ad-
material can be fully loaded
justed
°C tgel tcure
-18 to –7< 90 min. 24 hours
-7 to +4< 60 min. 6 hours
+4 to +16< 15 min. 90 min.
+16 to +21< 5 min. 60 min.
+21 to +32< 2.5 min. 45 min.
32 1min. 35 min.
The temprature of the cartridge must be between -18°C and +30°C.
Rotary hammer (TE1, TE 2, TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE 35, TE 55, TE 76), drill bit, dispenser
MD 1000, blow-out pump, a brush and a torque wrench.
Setting operations
Put cartridge into Throw away first two

Open cartridge. Screw on mixer.
Insert rod before gel time.

Inject mortar. Release dispenser.
The annular gap must be completely filled with mortar.
Wait for curing. tcure time Apply tightening torque.
Design: See HIT-HY 150 with HAS rod
249
HIT-ICE with HIS-N rod
Features:
applicable
Material:
HIS-N: - carbon steel galvanised to.5 microns
HIS-RN: - stainless steel; A4-70; 1.4401
Mortar: - HIT-ICE, standard size: 296 ml
dispenser MD 1000
A4 HCR
316 highMo HIS-N and HIS-RN int. threaded sleeves
Small edge High Hilti
Corrosion
Concrete distance / corrosion Anchor
resistance
3
spacing resistance program
Setting details
h1 [mm] Hole depth 95 115 130 175 210
hs [mm]
max. 20 25 30 40 50
df [mm]
hole max. 11 13 15 19 23
Tinst [Nm]
torque HIS-RN 12 23 40 70 130
1) ml 6 9 12 30 40
Injected volume 2)
Trigger pulls ~ min. 2 3 4 10 14
Drill bit TE-T- - 18/32 22/32 28/32 32/37
1)
2)
hs
df
d0
h nom
h1
h min
250
HIT-ICE with HIS-N rod

justed
°C tgel tcure
-18 to –7< 90 min. 24 hours
+4 to +16< 15 min. 90 min.
+16 to +21< 5 min. 60 min.
+21 to +32< 2.5 min. 45 min.
32 1min. 35 min.
Setting operations
Put cartridge into Throw away first two

Insert sleeve before gel time.

Inject mortar. Release dispenser.
The annular gap must be completely filled with mortar.
Design: See HIT-HY 150 with HIS-N rod
251
HIT-ICE with rebar
Features:
applicable
Material:
Rebar Euronorm 82-79.). For differing rebars, consult
Mortar: - HIT-ICE, standard size 296 ml
dispenser MD 1000
Concrete
Small edge
distance /
Rebar section
spacing
Setting details 3
Rebar diameter, [mm] 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
h1 [mm] Hole depth 82 93 115 130 150 175 215
Min. thickness of base mate-
hmin [mm] 120 140 160 180 180 230 270
rial
1)
ml 4 6 11 15 22 36 48
Injected volume 2)
Trigger pulls~ min. 1 2 4 6 8 12 16
Drill bit TE-TX- 10/22 12/22 15/27 - - - -
Drill bit TE-T- - - - 18/32 20/32 25/52 30/57
1)
2)
hnom
d0
0/ d
h1
h min
252
HIT-ICE with rebar

justed
°C tgel tcure
-18 to –7< 90 min. 24 hours
+4 to +16< 15 min. 90 min.
+16 to +21< 5 min. 60 min.
+21 to +32< 2.5 min. 45 min.
32 1min. 35 min.
Setting operations
Put cartridge into Throw away first two trig-

dispenser. ger puls.
Insert rebar before gel time.

Inject mortar. Release dispenser. The annular gap must be completely filled with mor-
tar.
Design: See HIT-HY 150 with rebar
253
HIT-HY 50 injection mortar with HIT-AN/HIT-IG
Features:
- base material: solid brick, sand-lime block
- clean and simple in use
- correct mixing ratio
- rapid curing
- versatile in use
- small edges distances and anchor spacing
Material HIT-HY 50 mortar foil pack, mixer
- HIT-AN: steel, grade 3.6, DIN EN 20898-1
Anchor rod:
- galvanised to 5 microns
Internally - HIT-IG: steel, DIN EN 10277-3
threaded sleeve: - galvanised to 5 microns
- foil pack: 330 ml HIT-AN rod
Mortar:
jumbo cartridge : 1100ml
Dispenser: - MD 2000, BD 2000, P3000 F, P5000 HY
HIT-IG internally threaded sleeve
Small edge
Fire resistance
distance / spacing
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 50 with HIT-AN or HIT-IG 3
x solid brick, fk= 33 N/mm2
x The load values are only valid if holes are drilled with TE rotary hammers.
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Anchor size M8 M 10 M 12 M8 M 10 M 12
Tensile, NRk 7.5 9.0 10.5 9.0 12.0 12.0
Shear, VRk 9.0 10.5 12.0 9.0 10.5 12.0
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Tensile, NRd 3.4 4.2 4.9 4.2 5.6 5.6
Shear, VRd 4.2 4.9 5.6 4.2 4.9 5.6
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Tensile, NRec 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 4.0
Shear, VRec 3.0 3.5 4.0 3.0 3.5 4.0
Tinst, [Nm] 7.5 12.5 12.5 7.5 12.5 12.5
254
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 50 with HIT-AN and HIT-IG
All data in this section applies to
x sand lime block, fk = 27 N/mm2
x The load values are only valid if the holes are drilled with TE rotary hammers.
x No edge distance and spacing influence
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Anchor M8 M 10 M 12 M8 M 10 M 12
Tensile, NRk 10.5 13.5 16.5 10.5 16.5 16.5
Shear, VRk 9.0 10.5 12.0 9.0 10.5 12.0
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Tensile, NRd 4.9 6.3 7.7 4.9 7.7 7.7
Shear, VRd 4.2 4.9 5.6 4.2 4.9 5.6
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Tensile, NRec 3.5 4.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 5.5
Shear, VRec 3.0 3.5 4.0 3.0 3.5 4.0
Tinst, [Nm] 12.0 25.0 25.0 12.0 25.0 25.0
Edge distance and spacing: edge distance, cmin = 10 cm

spacing distance, smin = 10 cm
Setting details
l
d0
d0
h nom t fix
h nom t fix
h1
h1 h
h
HIT-AN HIT-IG
255
HIT-AN
Anchor size
M8 M 10 M 12
Setting detail
h1 [mm] Hole depth 82 82 82
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 9 16 19
hnom [mm] Min. anchorage depth 80 80 80
Sw [mm] Width across flats 13 17 19
dh [mm] Max. clearance hole 11 13 15
hmin [cm] Min. base material thickness 12 14 16
Injected volume (trigger pulls) 1 2 2
Drill bit TE-CX- 10/22 12/22 14/22
HIT-IG
Anchor size
M8 M 10 M 12
Setting details
h1 [mm] Hole depth 82 82 82
hnom [mm] Max. fixture thickness 80 80 80
lG [mm] Min. anchorage depth full length
l
dh
hmin
[mm]
[mm]
[cm]
Anchor length
Max. clearance hole
Min. base material thickness
80
11
12
80
13
14
80
15
16
3
Injected volume (trigger pulls) 2 2 2
Drill bit TE-CX- 14/22 - -
Drill bit TE-T- - 18/32 18/32
Note: To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar after opening a 330 ml foil
pack of Hilti HIT-HY 50 must be thrown away. One trigger pull is approx. 8 ml mortar when using the MD 2000.
Temperature of the
basematerial Gel time Curing time
°C
5 15 min. 120 min.
10 8 min. 90 min.
20 4 min. 60 min.
30 2 min. 45 min.
40 1 min. 30 min.
The mortar cartridge must have a temperature of at least +5 °C
Rotary hammer (TE5, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE35 , TE55 or TE 76), a drill bit, a brush, the MD 2000 or
BD2000 (P3000 F, P5000 HY) dispenser and a torque wrench.
256
Setting operations
HIT-AN
Insert and adjust

Load anchor / fastener.
Drill hole Clean hole. Inject mortar anchor / fastener.
Observe tcure
Observe tgel
HIT-IG
Insert and adjust

Load anchor / fastener.
Drill hole. Clean hole. Inject mortar. anchor / fastener.
Observe tcure
Observe tgel
257
Features
- hollow base material: brick, cement brick,
sand-lime block
- clean and simple in use
- correct mixing ratio
- rapid curing
- versatile in use
- suitable for overhead fastenings
- reliable keying hold HIT-HY 20 foil pack, mixer
Material
- HIT-AN: steel, grade 3.6, DIN EN 20898-1
Anchor rod:
- galvanised to 5 microns
Internally - HIT-IG: steel, DIN EN 10277-3 HIT-AN rod
threaded sleeve: - galvanised to 5 microns
Mesh sleeve: - steel mesh, galvanised to 5 microns
- Foil pack: 330 ml
Mortar: HIT-IG int. threaded sleeve
- Jumbo cartridge: 1100 ml
Dispenser: - MD2000, BD2000, P3000 F, P5000 HY
mesh sleeve
Fire resistance
3
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HIT-HY 20 with HIT-AN or HIT-IG
x hollow brick
x The load values are only valid if holes are drilled with TE rotary hammers (without hammering action).
Design resistance, Rd [kN]: tensile load, N, and shear load, V
Country Standard Type of brick M8 M10 M12

D DIN 105 HLZW 12-08 1.1 1.1 1.1
1) 1) 1)
D DIN 105 HLZ 12 2.0(1.4) 2.0(1.4) 2.0(1.4)
D DIN 106 KSL 6 1.1 1.1 1.1
A OENORM PTH 10 GL 1.0 1.0 1.0
A OENORM DÜWA 10 0.6 0.6 0.6
A OENORM HLZ 8 N + F 1.5 1.5 1.5
F NF Brique creuse 1.0 1.0 1.0
Recommended load, Lrec [kN]: tensile load, N, and shear load, V
Country Standard Type of brick M8 M10 M12

D DIN 105 HLZW 12-08 0.8 0.8 0.8
1) 1) 1)
D DIN 105 HLZ 12 1.4(1.0) 1.4(1.0) 1.4(1.0)
D DIN 106 KSL 6 0.8 0.8 0.8
A OENORM PTH 10 GL 0.7 0.7 0.7
A OENORM DÜWA 10 0.4 0.4 0.4
A OENORM HLZ 8 N + F 1.1 1.1 1.1
F NF Brique creuse 0.75 0.75 0.75
1) 3
Brick density, U 1.0 kg/dm
258
Edge distance and spacing: edge distance, cmin = 10 cm

spacing distance, smin = 10 cm
A distance from the edge of broken brick of cmin = 20 cm is recommended, e.g. around window or door frames.
Setting details
d0
d0
hh11 hh11
HIT-AN HIT-IG
Setting details M8 M 10 M 12
HIT-AN 16 16 16
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter
HIT-IG 16 22 22
h1 [mm] Hole depth - 95 95 95
HIT-AN HIT-S16 HIT-S16 HIT-S16
Type of sleeve
HIT-IG HIT-S16 HIT-S22 HIT-S22
Max. fixture (fastenable) HIT-AN 9 16 19
tfix [mm]
thickness HIT-IG - - -
Max. tightening HIT-AN 5 8 8
Tinst [Nm]
torque HIT-IG 5 8 10
Injected volume Trigger pulls 6 6 6
Drill bit TE-CX- 16/23 16/23 -
Drill bit TE-T- - 22/32 22/32
Note: To ensure that optimal holding power is obtained, the first two trigger pulls of mortar after opening a foil pack of HILTI HIT-HY 20
must be thrown away.
Temperature, °C Gel time Curing time

-5 40 min. 6h
0 30 min. 4h
5 20 min. 2h
10 11 min. 1.5 h
20 6 min. 60 min.
30 3 min. 45 min.
40 1 min. 30 min.
The mortar cartridge must have a temperature of at least +5 °C
Rotary hammer (TE5, TE6, TE6A, TE15, TE15-C, TE18-M, TE35, TE55 or TE76), a drill bit, the MD 2000 or
BD2000 dispenser and a torque wrench.
259
Setting operations
HIT-AN
Drill hole without Insert mesh sleeve into Insert and adjust anchor Load anchor / fastener.
Inject mortar.
hammering action. hole. / fastener. Observe tgel Observe tcure
HIT-IG
Insert and adjust the

Drill hole without Insert mesh sleeve into Load anchor /fastener.
Inject mortar. anchor / fastener.
hammering action. hole. Observe tcure
Observe tgel
260
Rail Anchor
HRA HRC HRC-DB HRT HRT-WH
Track fixing with Hilti Rail Anchor
Hilti Support
Hilti
50 60 91 60 50
25 5 250 5 25
24
5
4
5 3 5 3 5 20
25
3
2 32
32
Green Track Slab Track 1
261
Rail Anchor
Selection of Hilti rail anchors for fastening rails to concrete track slab, based on
axle load (A), stiffness (c) and thickness (t) of elastic pad
Anchor Elastic pad, Tramway Metro Commuter Full Size

* t (mm)** A = 100 kN A = 135 kN A = 170 kN A = 250 kN
10
HRT
20
M22x215
30
HRT-WH 10
M22x200
20
HRC
M22x215
10
20
3
30
HRC-DB 10
M22x225 +26mm shim
10
HRA
M22x220a 20
M22x220b
M22x270
M22x310 30
Vmax 60km/h 80km/h 120km/h t 250km/h
Criteria Rmin(Vmax)*** 70m(25km/h) 200m(60km/h) 350m(80km/h) 3000m
Supportspacing 750mm 750mm 700mm 650mm
* Configuration of baseplate (support): = Anchors per support

** Stiffness of elastic pad: t = 10mm -> c = 20-30 kN/mm
t = 20mm -> c = 10-20 kN/mm
t = 30mm -> c = 5-10 kN/mm
*** Indicative value: Vmax is a function of the existing superelevation (cant) and the lateral acceleration.
Verification is contained in research reports no. 1584 ff, 1609, 1726 and 1893 of:
Technical University of Munich,
Research Laboratory for Road & Railway Construction
Univ. Prof. Dr. Ing. J. Eisenmann // Univ. Prof. Dr. Ing. G. Leykauf
262
HRA rail anchor
Features: HRA
- Certified by TU Munich up to 250 kN axle load
- Meets all requirements for modern rail
fastening components HRA
- Total insulation against stray currents
- High noise / vibration reduction
- Designed for high dynamic loads
- only small quantities of injection resin needed
- Good protection against corrosion
Concrete
Setting details
sw
tfix
l
hnom
hmin
h1
do
Anchor size HRA M 22 / 220a M 22 / 220b M 22 / 270 M 22 / 310

Injection adhesive HIT-RE 500
min. 120 120 130 130
h1 [mm] Hole depth
max. 130 130 140 140
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 110 110 125 125
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base

160
material
l [mm] Anchor length 220 220 270 310
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 50 40 65 105
Sinst [mm] Spring compression 5 8 12 12
ls [mm] Spring length 22 35 55 55
SW [mm] Width across flats 38
263
HRA rail anchor
HIT-RE 500 Working time in which Curing time before anchor can be
anchor can be inserted and fully loaded:
Temprature of the base material adjusted: tgel tcure
Anchor size HRA M 22 / 220a M 22 / 220b M 22 / 270 M 22 / 310

Recommended diamond bits DD-C 35/300 T2 // DD-BI 35/430 P2 // DD-BU 35/430 P2
Recommended diamond drilling machine DD EC-1 // DD 100 // DD 130 // DD 160 E
Recommended drill bit TE-Y 35/58
Recommended rotary hammer TE 55/ TE75/ TE 76
Setting operations
Drill hole Blow out dust and

Inject RE 500 Drive in HRA anchor After curing time The rail fastening is
(diamond drill or drill fragments
adhesive. by hand. tighten stop nut. complete.
bit). (compressed air).
264
HRC rail anchor
Features: HRC
fastening components
- High insulation values against stray currents HRC
- Only small quantities of injection resin needed
HRC-DB
Concrete
Setting details
sw
tfix
l
hnom
hmin
h1
do
Anchor size HRC M22 / 215 DB M 22 / 225

Injection adhesive HIT-HY 150 / HIT-RE500 HIT-HY 150 / HIT-RE500
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 30 30
min. 110 110
h1 [mm] Hole depth
max. 120 120
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 106 106
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 160 160
l [mm] Anchor length 215 225
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 40 50
Sinst [mm] Spring compression 8 8
ls [mm] Spring length 35 35
SW [mm] Width across flats 38 38
265
HRC rail anchor
Curing time before applying full load

Temprature of the base material
HIT-HY 150 HIT-RE 500
°C tcure
40 30 min. 4 hours
30 40 min. 8 hours
20 50 min. 12 hours
5 1.5 hours 24 hours
0 3 hours 50 hours
-5 6 hours 72 hours
Anchor size HRC M 22 / 215 -DB M 22 / 225

Recommended rotary hammer TE 55 / TE 75 / TE 76
Recommended diamond bit DD-C 30/30 T2 // DD-BI 30/320 P2 // DD-BU 30/320 P2

Recommended roughening tool (using HIT-HY150) TE-Y-RT 30/650
3
Setting operations
Drill hole Blow out dust and

Inject Drive in HRC anchor After curing time The rail fastening is
(hammer drill or fragments
adhesive. by hand. tighten stop nut. complete.
diamond drill with (compressed air).
roughening).
266
HRT rail anchor
Features: HRT
fastening components HRT
- High insulation values against stray currents
Concrete
Setting details
sw
tfix
l
hnom
hmin
h1
do
Anchor size HRT M 22 / 215

Injection adhesive HIT-HY 150 / HIT-RE500
min. 110
h1 [mm] Hole depth
max. 120
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 106
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 160
l [mm] Anchor length 215
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 40
Sinst [mm] Spring compression 8
ls [mm] Spring length 35
267
HRT rail anchor
Temprature of the base Curing time before applying full load

material HIT-HY 150 HIT-RE 500
°C tcure
40 30 min. 4 hours
30 40 min. 8 hours
20 50 min. 12 hours
5 1.5 hours 24 hours
0 3 hours 50 hours
-5 6 hours 72 hours
Anchor size HRT M 22 / 215

Recommended diamond core bit DD-C 25/300 T2// DD-BI 25/320 P4 // DD-BU 25/320 P4
Recommended roughening tool (using HIT-HY 150) TE-Y-RT 25/650
3
Setting operations
Drill hole
Blow out dust and
(hammer drill or Inject Drive in HRT anchor After curing time The rail fastening is
fragments
diamond drill with adhesive. by hand. tighten stop nut. complete.
(compressed air).
roughening).
268
HRT-WH rail anchor
Features: HRT-WH
fastening components
- High insulation values against stray currents HRT-WH
Concrete
Setting details
Anchor size HRT-WH M 22 / 200

HVU
Capsule/ Injection adhesive HIT-RE500
M20x110
d0 [mm] Drill bit diameter 25 25
min. 120 110
h1 [mm] Hole depth
max. 130
hnom [mm] Anchorage depth 110
hmin [mm] Min. thickness of base material 200
l [mm] Anchor length 200
tfix [mm] Max. fixture thickness 35
Sinst [mm] Spring compression 5
ls [mm] Spring length 22
269
HRT-WH rail anchor
Temprature of the base Curing time before applying full load

material HVU M20x110 HIT-RE 500
°C tcure
40 20 min. 4 hours
30 20 min. 8 hours
20 20 min. 12 hours
5 1 hours 24 hours
0 1 hours 50 hours
-5 5 hours 72 hours
Anchor size HRT-WH M 22 / 200
Recommended diamond core bit DD-C 25/300 T2// DD-BI 25/320 P4 // DD-BU 25/320 P4
Recommended setting tool with cone TE-Y-E M20
Setting operations using injection mortar HIT-RE 500

3
Drill hole (hammer Blow out dust and

Inject HIT-RE-500 Drive in HRT-WH After curing time The rail fastening is
drill or diamond drill fragments
adhesive. anchor by hand. tighten stop nut. complete.
with roughening). (compressed air).
Setting operations using HVU foil capsule
Drill hole(hammer Blow out dust and Insert HVU

Drive in HRT-WH After curing time The rail fastening is
drill r diamond drill fragments foil capsule
anchor by hand. tighten stop nut. complete.
with roughening). (compressed air). .
270
HWB cladding anchor
Features:
- securing and repairing industrially fabricated
structures (three-layer panels)
- also suitable for badly cracked outside cladding
/ facade panels
- the anchor takes up forces flexibly over a large
area via plastic ribs HWB
- thus, uniform distribution of the total load over
the in-place anchor
- plastic sleeve reduces stresses from forces of
constraint from temperature differences in the
outside cladding / panels
- the small-diameter anchor shank minimises
stressing of the outside cladding / panels and
helps to avoid reinforcement impacts when
setting the anchor HVU foil capsule
- high ultimate loads (holding power) per anchor
- M 12 thread connection in the anchor end-face
Material:
- glass-fibre reinforced polyamide; stud made of
A4-80 (or A4-70) stainless steel (material
1.4401) with M 12 x 20 bolt made of A4
stainless steel
Basic loading data (for a single anchor): HWB
Max. shear load and recommended bending moment for each anchor1):
HWB 28x210
HWB-H 28x190 HWB 22x190
Anchor size
HWB-H 28x210 HWB-H 22x190
HWB-H 28x230
2)
Shear VRec [kN] 6,7 4,2
HWB (A4-70) MRec [Nm] 646 314

Bending moment
HWB-H (A4-80) MRec [Nm] 924 448
min a [mm] 350 350

Spacing
max a [mm] 3000 3000
ar1 t [mm] 300 300

Edge distance
ar2 t [mm] 500 400
1)
These values are valid on condition that insulated cladding will be fastened on the panel.
2)
For calculation of the shear load, see next page.
t min a
a r2
a r1
a r1
a r1 tmin a a r1 a r1 t min a tmin a

max a max a
271
HWB cladding anchor
g
Calculation of Vrec:
Resistance to bending failure:

G = net weight
G + the additional facade
z (mm)
hw d 50 mm > 50 mm
4 4
z= d A + hD dA + hD + ( hW - x - "R ) 1)
3 3
1)
x: See table below.
Recommended VRec:
d 6,7 kN HWB 28, HWB-H 28

"R
MRec d 4,2 kN HWB 22, HWB-H 22
hW hD dA
VRec
z z MRec table, see previous page.
Number of anchors:
3
G
nt
zul VRec
The calculation of the recommended shear load must include the various values of hD and hW.
HWB 28x210 22x190

HWB-H 28x190 28x210 28x230 22x190
dA [mm] 28 28 28 22
hw + hD -110 hw + hD -130 hw + hD -150 hw + hD -120
deeper setting of the anchor, x [mm] d 1/3 hw
d hw - 40
Setting details

dB3
dB1
dB2
d B2
dB1
x hW hD hT
hW hD hv = t zyl ü
t h ges
272
HWB cladding anchor
HWB 28x210 22x190

HWB-H 28x190 28x210 28x230 22x190
Nominal hole diameter through fixture thickness dB1 [mm] 45 40
Nominal hole diameter in support structure dB2 [mm] 30 25
Nominal hole diameter for counterbore dB3 [mm] 66 60
Depth t t [mm] 90 80
Anchorage depth hv t[mm] 80 70
Total thickness of panel hges t [mm] 230 250 270 230
Fixture thickness hw t [mm] 40 40
1)
Fixture thickness with insulation d [mm] 110 130 150 120
Min. thickness of base material hT t [mm] 120 110
Coverage of hole ü t [mm] 30 30
HVU M 22 x
Capsule HVU M 28 x 90
90
1)
For a large fixture thickness, set the anchor deeper (value x in the table above).
Diamond drilling rig DD 100 / DD 130

Diamond core bit DCI-E 45/38-150 DCI-E 40/34-150
Dry-cutting diamond bit / mill DCI-T 66/59/44-95/115 DCI-T 60/53/39-95/105
Drilling template HWB-B28, red HWB-B22, blue
Rotary hammer TE 55
Carbide-tipped drill bit TE-Y 30/37 S TE-Y 25/32 S
Setting tool HWB-S
Setting operations
DCM 1
hW + hD Drilling
suidance
Drill through outside panel If outside panel and Drill anchor hole in support
Put HWB-B drilling template
with DD100/DD130 and insulation are thicker than structure. Note min.
onto connection end of drill
diamond bit. Drill dry through 120 or 110 mm, redrill with thickness of support
bit.
insulation. diamond bit. structure.
Clean hole. Insert HVU capsule into Set HWB anchor using Hilti Align plastic sleeve to have
anchor hole. TE 55 and HWB-S setting positioning mark at top.
tool.
273
Combined loading
COMBINED LOADING
FSd : Design action for combined loading
a load, commonly termed γF a load, commonly termed
• service •
partial safety factor for
• nominal load • design
x =
• actual • load factor
• working from your design code
• FSd
characteristic1) (Eurocode,
British Standard etc.)
1)
A characteristic applied load may not be compared with a characteristic resisting load as, by definition,
neither have any safety factor applied.
The design action, FSd, at an angle α is given by:

Sd Sd
2
FSd = N Sd 2
+ VSd
ªV º
α = arctan « Sd » Sd
Where
¬ N Sd ¼
3
NSd = tensile component
VSd = shear component
FRd : Design resistance for combined loading

The design resistance (loading capacity), FRd ,at an angle α is given by:
−2
§ § cos α ·1.5 § sin α ·1.5 · 3
FRd = ¨¨ ¨¨ ¸ +¨ V ¸ ¸
¸ ¨ ¸ ¸
N
© © Rd ¹ © Rd ¹ ¹
Where
NRd = design resistance for pure tension

VRd = design resistance for pure shear
as calculated previously
The design is valid if
FSd(α) ≤ FRd(α)
274
275
4
Examples
9.1 Example 1 277
9.2 Example 2 281
276
Example 1
Single-anchor fastening close to two edges of a column

Given: Hilti HVA adhesive anchor with HVU capsule and HAS-R M20 rod
grade of concrete: C20/25
inclined working load: F = 18.0 kN
thickness of concrete member: h = 300 mm
edge distance: c1 = 100 mm, c2 = 150 mm
N=9,0 kN
60°
c1 c2 V=15,6 kN F=18,0 kN
Calculation:
1. Tension
Valid design tensile load:
NRd ^
min NRd,c ; NRd,s `
1.1 Design tensile load to resist pull-out and concrete failure, NRd,c :
Concrete design resistance, NRd,c for a single anchor in a multiple-anchor fastening:
o
NRd,c NRd,c fB,N fT f A,N fR,N
277
Example 1
0
Initial value of design tensile load, NRd,c
0
NRd,c 62,9 kN
Influence of concrete strength
§f 25 ·
fB 1 ¨¨ ck,cube ¸¸ 1,0 ; for fck,cube 25 N / mm 2
© 100 ¹
Influence of anchorage depth
hact
fT 1,0; for h act h nom ; h nom d h act d 2,0 h nom
hnom
Influence of anchor spacing
s
fA,N 0,5 1,0; because of single-anchor fastening
4 hnom
Influence of edge distance
c1 100mm
fR1,N 0,28 0,72 0,28 0,72 0,70
hnom 170mm
c2 150mm
fR2,N 0,28 0,72 0,28 0,72 0,92
hnom 170mm
Design tensile load to resist pull-out of concrete cone

4
NRd, c 62,9kN 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,7 0,92 40,5 kN
Design tensile load to resist steel failure, NRd,s
NRd,s 84,3 kN
Final design tensile resistance:
NRd min ^NRd,s; NRd,c ` 40,5 kN
278
Example 1
2. Shear
Valid design shear load:
VRd ^
min VRd,c ; VRd,s `
2.1 Design shear load to resist concrete edge failure, VRd,c :
Concrete design resistance, VRd,c for a single anchor in a multiple-anchor fastening:
0
VRd,c VRd,c fB, V fE, V f AR, V
Initial value of design shear load at a concrete edge with minimum edge distance
0
VRd,c 12,4 kN
fck,cube
fB, V 1,0; for fck,cube 25 N / mm 2
25
Influence of loading direction
fE,V 1,0; 0 o d E d 55 o V
1 o o
fE,V ; 55 E d 90
cosE 0,5 sinE
E
fE,V 2,0; 90 o E d 180 o
fE,V 2,0; for E 90 o
c c 100mm 100mm
f AR,V 1,28 ; the smallest edge distance, c, must be inserted.
c min c min 85mm 85mm
VRd,c 12,4 kN 1,0 1,28 2,0 31,7 kN
2.2 Design shear load to resist steel failure, VRd,s :
VRd,s 60,6 kN
2.3 Final design shear resistance:
VRd min ^VRd,s ; VRd,c ` 31,7kN
279
Example 1
3. Combined Load:
The design resistance for a combined load is given by:
2
FRd (D)
N
ª§ cosĮ ·1,5 § sinĮ ·1,5 º 3
FRd (Į «¨¨ ¸ ¨¨ ¸¸ » D
N ¸ © VRd ¹ ¼»
¬«© Rd ¹ V
2

ª§ cos60 o ·1,5 § sin60 o ·1,5 º 3
«¨¨ ¸¸ ¨¨ ¸¸ »
«¬© 40,5 kN ¹ © 31,7kN ¹ »¼
30,7 kN
Design action load:
FSd F JF
assuming a partial safety factor for the working load, JF, of 1.4
FSd 18,0 kN 1,4 25,2 kN
Proof:
FSd 25,2 kN FRd Į 30,7 kN
This application is safe if designed according to the Hilti FTM.
280
Example 2
Six-anchor fastening close to one edge

Given: Hilti HDA-T M16 design anchor
anchoring in non-cracked concrete
grade of concrete: C30/37
inclined working load: F = 80,0 kN
angle of inclination: D = 20°
thickness of concrete member: h = 400 mm
edge distance: c = 160 mm,
spacing: s1 = 190 mm, s2 = 300 mm
D
s1
c
6
5 4
3 2
s2
h
1
s2
V
Calculation:
1. Tension
Valid design tensile load:
NRd ^
min NRd,c ; NRd,s `
1.1 Design tensile load to resist pull-out and concrete failure, NRd,c :
Concrete design resistance, NRd,c for a single anchor in a multiple-anchor fastening:
o
NRd,c NRd, c fB f A,N fR,N
281
Example 2
0
Initial value of design tensile load, NRd,c
0
NRd,c 101,4 kN
fck,cube 37 N / mm 2
fB 1,22
25 25 N / mm 2
Influence of anchor spacing
s1 190 mm
f A,N1 0,5 0,5 0,67
6 h ef 6 190 mm
s2 300 mm
f A,N2 0,5 0,5 0,76
6 h ef 6 190 mm
c 160 mm
fR,N 0,27 0.49 0,27 0,49 0,68
h ef 190 mm
2,6
NRd, c 101,4 kN 1,22 0,67 0,76 63,0 kN
4
NRd,c 101,4 kN 1,22 0,67 0,76 0,76 47,9 kN
N1,5
Rd,c 101,4 kN 1,22 0,67 0,76 0,68 42,8 kN 4
3
NRd,c 101,4 kN 1,22 0,67 0,76 0,76 0,68 32,6 kN
Design tensile load to resist concrete cone pull-out for a multiple-anchor fastening
group
NRd,c (63,0 kN 42,8 kN) 2 47,9 kN 32,6 kN 292,1 kN
1.2 Design tensile load to resist steel failure, NRd,s
NRd,s 84,0 kN
Design tensile load to resist steel failure for a multiple-anchor fastening
group
NRd ,s 84,0 kN 6 504,0 kN
1.3 Final design tensile resistance:
group
NRd min NRd, ^
group group
c ; NRd,s ` 292,1 kN
282
Example 2
2. Shear
Valid design shear load:
VRd ^
min VRd,c ; VRd,s `
2.1 Design shear load to resist concrete edge failure, VRd,c :
Concrete design resistance, VRd,c for a single anchor in a multiple-anchor fastening:
0
VRd,c VRd, c fB f AR, V fE, V
Initial value of design shear load at a concrete edge with minimum edge distance
0
VRd,c 26,1 kN
fck,cube 37 N / mm 2
fB 1,22
25 25 N / mm 2
Influence of shear loading direction
fE,V 1; E 0o
Influence of anchor spacing and edge distance
3 c s1 s2 ... sn 1 c 3 160 mm 2 300 mm 160 mm

fAR,V
3 n c min c min 3 3 150 mm 150 mm
0,83
VRd,c 26,1 kN 1,22 0,83 1,0 26,4 kN
Design shear load to resist concrete edge failure for a multiple-anchor fastening
group
VRd,c 26,4 kN 3 79,2 kN
283
Example 2
2.2 Design shear load to resist steel failure, VRd,s :
VRd,s 93,3 kN
Design shear load to resist steel failure for a multiple-anchor fastening
group
VRd,s 93,3 kN 6 560,0 kN
2.3 Final design shear resistance:
group
VRd ^
group
min VRd group
,c ; VRd,s ` 66,0 kN
3. Combined Load:
The design resistance for a combined load is given by: FRd (D)
N
2

ª§ cosĮ ·1,5 § sinĮ ·1,5 º 3
D
FRd (Į «¨¨ ¸ ¨¨ ¸¸ » V
N ¸ © VRd ¹ ¼»
¬«© Rd ¹
2

ª§ cos20 o ·1,5 § sin20 o ·1,5 º 3
«¨¨ ¸ ¨¨ ¸¸ »
292,1 kN ¸¹ © 79,2 kN ¹ ¼»
¬«©
166,3 kN
Design action:
4
FSd F JF
assuming a partial safety factor for the working load, JF, of 1.4
FSd 80,0 kN 1,4 112,0 kN
Proof:
FSd 112,0 kN FRd Į 166,3 kN
This application is safe if designed according to the Hilti FTM.
284
285
5
Appendix 1
10.1 Rebar fastening application 287
10.1.1 Post-fix system advantages 287
10.1.2 Application examples 287
10.2 Product Information Hilti HIT-HY150 Rebar 290
10.2.1 The injection system 290
10.2.2 Adhesive bond 290
10.2.3 Installation 291
10.3 Rebar Fastening Design Concept 293
10.3.1 Scope 293
10.3.2 Symbols 294
10.3.3 Fastening design 297
10.3.4 Detailing provisions 301
10.3.5 Transmissible forces 305
10.4 Examples of applications 306
10.4.1 Wall connection 306
10.4.2 Wall extension 307
10.4.3 Installation of an intermediate floor 308
10.4.4 Installation of steps between landings 310
10.5 Test reports, Supplementary information 311
10.5.1 Relevant reports 311
10.5.2 Test results: Pull-out tests on rebars
10.5.3 Test results: Full scale beam test
311
313
5
286
Rebar fastening design
10 Appendix 1
10.1 Rebar fastening application
10.1.1 Post-fix system advantages
With the use of the Hilti HIT-HY150 injection system it is

possible to connect new concrete to existing structures with maximum
confidence and flexibility.
➥ design flexibility
➥ formwork simplification
➥ reliable like cast in
➥ defined load characteristics
➥ simple, high confidence application
➥ horizontal, vertical and overhead applications
10.1.2 Application examples
Floor slab connection
• Intermediate floor slabs

• Structural alterations, renovation works
• Reinstate temporary openings, e.g. tower cranes,
debris removal
✓ simplification of wall formwork

✓ flexibility of construction methods
✓ unobstructed temporary openings
✓ reduced risk of reinforcement damage
Wall and beam connections
• Construction joints
• Structural extension
• Horizontal starter bars
✓ reinforcement continuity
✓ simplified fixing and stripping of formwork
✓ unobstructed joint preparation
✓ small drill hole dimensions
287
Vertical connections
• New columns, piers

• Structural enhancement
• Pile caps
✔ accurate location
✔ no complex reinforcement fixing
✔ unobstructed site access
Major structural repair
• Bridge parapet renovation

• Structural upgrading
• Concrete remedial works
✔ reduced concrete removal

✔ avoid reinforcement welding or similar connections
✔ overhead installation
Structural connections
• Staircases
•
•
•
Counterforts
Manholes
Corbels
5
✔ accurate location of starter bars
✔ allows for complex details
✔ simplified wall formwork and joint
preparation
✔ odour free for confined space working
288
Retaining walls
• Diaphragm walls
• Contiguous walls
• Curtain walls
✔ easy application
✔ small diameter drill holes
✔ connection of deformed bars
✔ moisture tolerant solution
Concrete overlay
• Bridge deck renovation

• Structural bonding across composite
interfaces
• Structural upgrading of slabs and beams
✔ rapid serial application

✔ small hole dimensions
✔ quick curing
Cantilever connections
• Balcony
• Access platforms
• Landings
✔ negligible displacement
✔ deformed bar fixing
✔ high confidence like cast in
✔ short rebar exposure avoids rust staining
289
10.2 Product Information Hilti HIT-HY150 Rebar
10.2.1 The injection system
The Hilti HIT-HY150 injection system is designed to be safe and simple in

application resulting in high quality reinforcement fixings.
Its components: BD 2000 for foil pack
Dispenser MD2000:
Manual dispenser.
Ergonomic design.
Consistent performance.
Dispensers MD 2000 for foil pack P 5000 HY for jumbo cartridges
Foil pack:
330ml of two-component adhesive.
Opens automatically.
Reliable mixing.
Cassette as «refillable cartridge»:

Stability in use.
Foil pack:
Storage function. Jumbo cartridge:
(330 ml) waste.
Reduces (1100 ml)
10.2.2 Adhesive bond
Hilti HIT-HY 150 adhesive is a hybrid system consisting of

organic and inorganic binding agents.
The polymerisation reaction of the resin component ensures good bon- Organic
ding and a rapid curing injection system with good handling characteri- agents
stics.
The cementitious reaction improves stiffness and bonding, especially at

+ 5
Cementitous
higher temperatures. agents
The combined action of the two components results in negligible material

➙
shrinkage.
The result is a very strong bond between rebar and concrete similar to Strong
that of cast in situ reinforcement. hybrid bond
The hybrid mortar contains no styrene and is virtually odourless.
290
10.2.3 Installation
Prepare hole 1 2 3x 3
The holes shall be drilled with a 3x

rotary percussive drill to ensure
adequate hole surface roughn-
Drill hole Brush out hole Blow out hole
ess. Diamond core drills shall
not be used without subse-
quent surface roughening. Ho-
les shall be dry at the time of
anchor installation.
Prepare HIT system Used foil packs can be stored in 4 5 6
the cassette for up to four 3 2

MD 2000
weeks. To restart, just change 1

the mixer nozzle.
Reject material from first trigger Put foil pack Screw mixer Put this
into holder onto foil pack assembly into
pull. MD 2000
dispenser.
Injecte Start injecting from the bottom 7 8 9
and insert rebar of the hole to ensure complete MD 2000
MD 2000
filling. Some mortar should

overflow upon inserting the reb-
Inject into hole Unlock Insert rebar
ar to show complete filling. dispenser
Allow to cure Allow for complete curing befo- 10 11 12
re applying any load.
Straighten rebar Allow to cure Concrete.
Roughen surface To transfer shear loads the surfa-

for shear loading ce of the existing concrete
should be roughened.
291
The curing time is dependent on temperature: Curing time
Base material Gelling time Curing time

temperature tgel tcure
-5 °C 90 min 6h
0 °C 45 min 3h
5 °C 25 min 1,5 h
20 °C 6 min 50 min
30 °C 4 min 40 min
40 °C 2 min 30 min
Foil pack temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C!
The correct drill diameter is important for the perfomance of the adhesive Drill diameter
bond as well as for the economy of the application.
Nominal Maximum
rebar diameter recommended hole
diameter
D
8 mm 12 mm
10 mm 14 mm
12 mm 16 mm
14 mm 18 mm
16 mm 22 mm
20 mm 28 mm
25 mm 32 mm
The necessary injection volume can be calculated to fill the space bet- Injection volume
ween rebar and hole wall plus enough safety measure to allow for too
deep drilling, cavities in the base material, overflow etc.
5
Rule of thumb: fill hole 2/3 full
Calculated Volume [ml]: V[ml] = lb,inst (D2-2)/1000

volume:
Volume [trigger V[MD] = lb,inst (D2-2)/8000
pulls MD2000]:
292
10.3 Rebar Fastening Design Concept
10.3.1 Scope
Design concept The design method presented here is based on Eurocode 2: ENV 1992-1-
based on Eurocode 2 1 «Design of concrete structures, Part1, General rules and rules for buil-
dings» [5]
Consequently, it only applies to reinforced concrete. In the case of non-

reinforced concrete, – or if the reinforcement is not known – the anchor
theory in the fastening technology manual must be used.
Rebar connections in reinforced and non-reinforced concrete set up a dif-

ferent flow of forces:
Anchor design In non-reinforced concrete, the tensile ZN N

Z
force, N, is transmitted to the concrete
by the connection rebar. The force
Anchorage
length
which can be transmitted depends on
the size of the cone of concrete which
would break away with the rebar and
which is influenced by the effective
anchorage length, edge distance and Spacing Edge
distance
spacing.
Rebar fastening In the case of reinforced concrete, the N

Z N
Z
design edge distance and spacing are not of
primary importance because the ten-
sile force is transmitted by the
connection rebars to the cast-in reb-
ars via the concrete bond between
them.
N
Z N
Z
General rule:
The performance characteristics of rebar fastenings with Hilti HIT-HY150

correspond to those of cast-in rebars. All construction rules set up in Eu-
rocode 2 apply; in particular, the transmission of the anchoring forces
into the connecting building components must be ensured in accor-
dance with the principles of reinforced concrete construction (e.g.
transverse reinforcement, concrete cover etc.).
293
10.3.2 Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual in accordance with Euro- designation
code 2:
[mm] Nominal diameter of D
ribbed rebar ø
D [mm] Hole diameter

lb [mm] Basic anchorage length
lb, inst
lb, inst [mm] Installed anchorage length
lb, min [mm] Minimum anchorage length e
e [mm] Distance between reinforcing

bar and connection rebar
fyk [N/mm2] Characteristic yield stress of rebar steel strength
This is the stress below which 5% of the strength rea-

dings obtained for the rebar at 2‰ permanent defor-
mation fall.
Typical stress-strain σ yield strength

diagram of reinforcing ft
steel (EC2: ENV 1992- fy
1-1, Fig. 3.2)
0.2%
εu ε
Typical distribution of characteristic value

Number of readings
strength readings with

5%-fractile as charac-
teristic value. 5
5% 95%
fyk fy
294
Other steel Rebar designations used in various countries are ba-

classifications sed on national standards:
Country Standard Designation fyk =

Europe EC2
A ÖN BSt 550 550
CH SIA S 500 500
D DIN BSt 500 500
F NFP FE 500 500
GB BS FY460 460
Safety factor steel S Partial safety factor for rebar
This takes account of the difference between the

strength of the test specimens and that of rebars in-
stalled with the usual care.
Fundamental combination S = 1.15

Accidental combination S = 1.00
(except earthquakes)
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1 Table 2.3)
Concrete strength fck [N/mm2] Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of con-

crete at 28 days.
Characteristic value fck is the cylinder compres-

Number of readings
sive strength below which

5% of all strength readings
obtained with the given
concrete fall. 5% 95%
fck fc
The classification of concrete e.g. C 20/25, refers to
the characteristic cylinder/cube compressive strength
of concrete as defined in section 7.3.1.1 of ENV 206.
Concrete classification as
per Eurocode Concrete strength fck fck,cube
classes [N/mm2] [N/mm2]
C 16/20 16 20
C 20/25 20 25
C 25/30 25 30
C 30/37 30 37
C 35/45 35 45
→
→
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1,

Table 3.1) cylinder cube
295
There are other concrete classifications according to

national standards. Some other designations for a
C20/25 concrete include:
Other concrete
Country Standard Designation
classifications
Europe EC2 C20/25
A ÖN B4200 B300
CH SIA 162 B30/20
D DIN 1045 B25
F NFP 18400 B250
GB BS1881 C25P
c Partial safety factor for concrete Safety factor concrete

strength of test cylinders and that of concrete placed
on site with the usual care.
Fundamental combination c = 1.5

Accidental combination c = 1.3
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1, Table 2.3)
b Partial safety factor for Hilti HIT-HY 150 adhesive Safety factor adhesive
bond
strength of the test specimens and that of adhesive
placed on site with the usual care.
b is taken equal to c. Additional partial safety factors

are included in the characteristic value.
Fundamental combination b = 1.5

Accidental combination b = 1.3
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1, Table 2.3)
5
Q, G Partial safety factor for actions (loads) Safety factor load
This allows for uncertainties in loads and load combi-

nations.
Permanent Variable
actions actions
Favourable effect G = 1.00 Q = 0.00
Unfavourable effect G = 1.35 Q = 1.50
ENV 1992-1-1, Table 2.2
296
10.3.3 Fastening design
Failure modes The working principle of a design is best understood by reviewing the
possible failure modes and setting down corresponding limits to
utilisation.
Design load The design load of a connection rebar is:
Rd = MIN {Ryd; Rbd; Rcd} > Sd
10.3.3.1 Limit to Rebar Utilisation Ryd

Ry
Steel failure The design tensile force, Ryd, at which the
rebar steel is fully utilised, results from the
product of the steel cross-sectional area ti-
mes the characteristic strength of the steel
divided by the partial safety factor.
Design value of rebar strength:
Ryd = 1/4 2 fyk /s

[N] [mm] [N/mm2]
This value is crucial when the installed anchorage length is greater than
the basic anchorage length. (See 3.3.4)
10.3.3.2 Limit to Adhesive Bond Utilisation Rbd
Adhesive bond failure The force which can be taken up in the sur-
face of the bond between rebar and adhesi-
ve increases linearly with the anchorage Rb
length, but only with the square root of the
rebar diameter.
Design value of adhesive strength:
Rbd = 25 lb,inst ––

/b
[N] [mm] [mm]
Doubling the diameter only results in a 40%

increase of the bond strength.
297
The equation allows for the 75

performance of the adhesive. lb = 3d
50
It was determined by Profes-
sor Marti of the Swiss Fe- τbm • d d = 12mm
deral Institute of Technology 25 d = 16mm
d = 20mm
(ETH), Zurich based on a re- d = 25mm
view of comprehensive test 0
data [1]. 0 1 2
δε [mm]
This value is crucial when the installed anchorage length is smaller than
the basic anchorage length (see 10.3.3.4) and the class of concrete is hig-
her than C 25/30.
10.3.3.3 Limit to Concrete Bond Utilisation Rcd
The force which can be taken up in the bond Concrete failure

interface between mortar and hole wall in-
Rc
creases linearly with anchorage depth, but
only with the square root of the characteri-
stic concrete strength times the hole dia-
meter.
Design value of bond between

Hilti HIT-HY 150 and concrete
Rcd = 4.5 lb,inst fck D /c

[N] [mm] [N/mm2] [mm]
Maximum hole diameter D, see Appendix 23
298
The equation allows for the performance

of the bond interface.
It was determined by Professor Marti of
the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology
(ETH), Zurich, based on a review of com-
prehensive test data [1].
On principle, the partial safety factor

would have to be b c. Since, how-
ever, b = c, the formula can be simplified.
Test arrangement
This value is crucial when the installed anchorage length is smaller than
the basic anchorage length (see 10.3.3.4) and the class of concrete does
not exceed C 25/30.
10.3.3.4 Basic anchorage length
If this length is exceeded, the steel is fully utilised.
The basic anchorage length is derived by setting
Ryd <
_ Rbd 1
/4 2 fyk/s < _ 25 lb,inst ––
/b
(rebar strength <
_ adhesive
lb,inst _> 3/2 fyk b /(100 s)
bond strength)
and
Ryd <
_ Rcd 1
/4 2 fyk/s < _ 4.5 lb,inst fck D/c
(rebar strength <
_
lb,inst _> 2 fyk c /(18 fck Ds)
concrete bond strength)
As a result, the basic anchorage length is obtained as the maximum value

of the two limiting anchorage lengths:
Basic anchorage
length
lb = MAX 3/2 fyk b /(100 s); 2 fyk c /(18 fck Ds)
[mm] [mm] [N/mm2] [mm] [N/mm2] [N/mm2] [mm]
299
Basic anchorage length for various rebar diameters, classes of concrete

and grades of steel:
Influence of
Concrete Rebar [mm]: 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
class fyk = D [mm]: 12 14 16 18 22 28 32
Influence of steel: . . . steel grade
C20/25 450 Ib [cm]: 14 20 27 34 40 56 81
C20/25 500 Ib [cm]: 15 22 30 38 45 62 90
C20/25 550 Ib [cm]: 17 24 33 42 49 68 99
Influence of concrete: . . . concrete class
C16/20 500 Ib [cm]: 17 25 33 42 50 69 101
C20/25 500 Ib [cm]: 15 22 30 38 45 62 90
C25/30 500 Ib [cm]: 15 21 28 35 42 59 82
s = 1.15; c = b = 1.5
The limit at which the grade of adhesive or grade of concrete is crucial, is

obtained from
Rbd = Rcd 25 lb /b = 4.5 lb fck D/c

fck = (25/4.5)2 /D
If it is assumed that D = 1.2

the limit results at fck = 26 N/mm2
Consequently, up to and including C 25/30, it is the grade of concrete

which is crucial, but from C 30/37 it is the grade of Hilti HIT-HY 150 adhe-
sive that is decisive.
Schematic presentation of limits to utilisation:
Concrete class Limits for fastening

fck, fck,cube Rb loads
5
C 45/55
C 40/50 Ry
C 35/45 Hilti HIT-HY 150 crucial
Rbd = 25 x π x lb, inst x ø / γb
C 30/37 [N] [mm] [mm]
C 25/30 Rc
C 20/25
C 16/20 Concrete crucial Rebar crucial

Rcd = 4.5 x π x lb, inst x fck x D / γc Ryd = 1/4 x ø 2 x π x fyk / γs
C 12/15 [N] [mm] [N/mm2] [mm] [N] [mm] [N/mm2]
lb, min Basic anchorage Anchorage

length lb length lb,inst
300
10.3.4 Detailing Provisions
Basically, a rebar set with HIT HY150 can be considered like a cast-in reb-
ar. The basic anchorage length of section 10.3.3.4 corresponds to the ba-
sic anchorage length of Eurocode 2. The detailing provisions of Euroco-
de 2, some of which are quoted in the following paragraphs, shall be ap-
plied to the basic anchorage length of section 10.3.3.4. The rebars set
with HIT HY150 shall be disposed according to the same rules as cast-in
rebars would.
10.3.4.1 Minimum Anchorage Length
Minimum anchorage To ensure that the force acting on the connection rebar is transmitted to
length the cast-in rebar, the following lengths must exceed those given in Euro-
code 2:
Anchorages in For anchorages in tension:

tension
EC2: ENV 1992-1-1 formula (5.5):
lb,min = MAX (0.3 lb[mm]; 10 [mm]; 100 [mm])

Deckenanschluss
Floor connection
Anchorages in For anchorages in compression:

compression EC2: ENV 1992-1-1 formula (5.6)
lb,min = MAX (0.6 lb[mm]; 10 [mm]; 100 [mm])
Column connection
10.3.4.2 Splice Length
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1 formula 5.7 and 5.8)
When rebars in tension or compression are lapped, increased splitting

forces occur. In order to take up these splitting forces, the anchorage
length lb,inst, defined by sections 10.3.3.1 to 10.3.3.3, must be multiplied
by a factor , which is given in the following table.
lsplice = *lb,inst
The splice length must exceed the minimum lengths given in the same ta-
ble.
301
Splices
% of spliced bars < 30 % > 30 %
bar spacing a ≥ 10 Ø ≥ 10 Ø < 10 Ø < 10 Ø
edge distance b ≥5Ø <5Ø ≥5Ø <5Ø
= 1.0 1.4 2.0
{ { {
0.3 lb 0.42lb 0.6 lb
lb,min,sp = MAX 15 Ø MAX 15 Ø MAX 15 Ø
200mm 200mm 200mm
( application:
typical
slab
typical
beam )
b
lb, min
10.3.4.3 Distance between cast-in rebars and new rebars Rebar spacing
Cast-in rebars and the nearest rebars may touch at length of overlap . . . to nearest rebar
(EC2: ENV 1992-1-1, 5.2.1.1 (5)).
If the clear space between the connection rebars and the nearest cast-in
rebar is . . .
e > 4
the overlap must be increased by an amount

e - 4 (cf. example 4.2) 5
The minimum distance between cast-in rebars and farther away connec- . . . to farther away
tion rebars should be: rebar
_ MAX (2 [mm] ; 20 [mm])

a >
302
10.3.4.4 Poor Bond Conditions
All previously given values apply to good bond conditions.
Bond conditions Poor bond conditions may for exam- Surface of concrete
ple occur because the concrete be-
neath the cast-in rebar sinks.
Rebars fastened with Hilti HIT-HY150
always have good bond conditions. Rebar
An increase in anchorage length by a Sinking
factor 1.4 can be necessary to ensure
of concrete
the transfer of the load to other (possi-
bly poorly bonded) cast in rebars.
Bond conditions according to EC2: ENV 1992-1-1, Fig. 5.1:
Direction of concreting
300mm Poor bond
Poor bond
h Good bond h/2 Good bond Good bond
h 250mm h 250mm h 600mm
Bond conditions are also considered as good if rebars are embedded ver-
tically or at an angle of max. 45° to the vertical.
10.3.4.5 Limit State of Cracking
According to EC2: ENV 1992-1-1:4.4.2.1 (6), the maximum design crack

width must be limited to 0.3 mm for exposure classes 2– 4:
Class 2: humid environment with or without frost
Crack width limits Class 3: additionally with de-icing salts
Class 4: and sea water environment.
303
According to EC2: ENV 1992-1-1: 5.2.4 P(1), the crack width must be ve-
rified at the end of the splice of the rebars. Cracks hardly occur in the spli-
ce zone itself because of the greater amount of reinforcement i.e. cast-in
rebars plus connection rebars.
Pull out tests show Rm (Short term)

Displacement clearly below
that at the level of 0.3 mm
the recommended
values (Fs) the dis-
Rk (Short term)
Tensile load [kN]
Experiment
placement is typical- Theory
ly below 0.1mm [1].
Rk (Long term)
From this observa-
tion and other ex- Rd
perimental eviden-
Fsd
ce it can be con-
cluded that crack Recommended Fs
load range
width limits are met.
0 0.4 0.8 1.2
Slip at loaded end of rebar [mm]
Displacement at loaded end of rebar [mm]
10.3.4.6 Green Concrete
If the rebar connection is to be loaded before the concrete

reaches its 28-days compressive strength, the actual strength readings
should be used with the given formulae. However, special attention
should be given to concrete creep.
3.4. Transmissible forces
According to the given formulae and good bond conditions, the following
values result depending on the load level and the installed anchorage
length
304
10.3.5 Transmissible Forces
According to the given formulae and good bond conditions, the following
values result depending on the load level and the installed anchorage
length.
10.3.5.1 Level of Design Value
Rebar dia. Hole dia. Design value of connection force Basic

D Rd length
Ib
[mm] [mm] [kN] [mm]
8 12 14.6 17.5 20.4 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 21.9 150
10 14 15.8 18.9 22.1 25.2 28.4 31.5 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 217
12 16 20.2 23.6 27.0 30.3 33.7 37.1 40.5 43.8 47.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 292
14 18 25.0 28.6 32.2 35.8 39.3 42.9 46.5 50.1 53.6 66.9 66.9 66.9 374
16 22 31.6 35.6 39.5 43.5 47.4 51.4 55.4 59.3 79.1 87.4 87.4 442
20 28 minimum 44.6 49.1 53.5 58.0 62.4 66.9 89.2 112 134 612
25 32 anchorage length 62.0 66.8 71.5 95.4 119 143 895
Anchorage length [mm]: 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 400 500 600
Concrete C20/25: fck = 20 N/mm2; minimum anchorage length for lapped rebars (see 10.3.3.5)
Steel: fyk = 500 N/mm2 minimum anchorage length for connection
10.3.5.2 Level of Recommended Loads
If the design values are divided by the partial safety factor for actions (lo-
ads), the recommended loads are obtained. For the sake of simplicity, G
= Q = 1.5 in this table.
Rebar dia. Hole dia. Recommended value of connection force Basic

D Frec length
Ib
[mm] [mm] [kN] [mm]
8 12 9.7 11.7 13.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6 150
10 14 10.5 12.6 14.7 16.8 18.9 21.0 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 217
12 16 13.5 15.7 18.0 20.2 22.5 24.7 27.0 29.2 31.5 32.8 32.8 32.8 32.8 292
14 18 16.7 19.1 21.5 23.8 26.2 28.6 31.0 33.4 35.8 44.6 44.6 44.6 374
16 22 21.1 23.7 26.4 29.0 31.6 34.3 36.9 39.5 52.7 58.3 58.3 442
20 28 minimum 29.7 32.7 35.7 38.7 41.6 44.6 59.5 74.3 89.2 612
25 32 anchorage length 41.3 44.5 47.7 63.6 79.5 95.4 895
Anchorage length [mm]: 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 400 500 600
Concrete C20/25: fck = 20 N/mm2; minimum anchorage length for lapped rebars (see 10.3.3.5)
Steel: fyk = 500 N/mm2 minimum anchorage length for connection
305
10.4 Examples of applications
The following examples show the large variety of possibilities to solve problems by making rebar connections
with Hilti HIT HY-150 adhesive.
10.4.1 Wall connection Existing wall
According to the design calculation, the verti-

cally compressed new wall is dimensioned
18cm
as follows: 2 x ø8/25cm
New wall
Concrete class C 20/25
fck = 20 N/mm2
Steel grade fyk = 500 N/mm2
Wall thickness: 18 cm
Vertical: 10/20 cm both
sides 2 x ø10/20cm
Existing floor
Horizontal: 8/25 cm both
sides
Floor connection: 10 mm/20 cm both sides

table 10.3.4.1 hole depth = lb = 217 mm
D = 14 mm
Alternative 1: 12 mm /20 cm both sides

as per 10.3.5.1 Rd = Rd ( 10) = 34.1 kN
at lb,inst = 20 cm
Rd (12) = 33.7 kN ˜ 34.1 kN
lb,inst > lb,min = MAX (0.6292; 1012; 100)
= 175 mm
Alternative 2: 14 mm/20 cm both sides

as per 10.3.5.1 Rd = Rd ( 10) = 34.1 kN
at lb,inst = 19 cm
Rd(14) = 34.0 kN ~ 34.1 kN
but lb,inst < lb,min = MAX (0.6374; 1014; 100)
= 224 mm
5
If compressive forces are being transmitted, a reduction of the hole depth when using
rebars of larger diameter can only be achieved to a moderate extent due to the limitations of the minimum an-
chorage length.
306
Side wall connection: 8mm/25 cm both sides

table 10.3.5.1 hole depth =lb = 15 cm
D = 12 mm
Alternative 1: 10 mm /25 cm both sides

table 10.3.5.1 Rd = Rd ( 8) = 21.9 kN
at lb,inst = 14 cm
Rd ( 10) = 22.1 kN > 21.9 kN
lb,inst > lb,min = MAX (0.3217; 1010;100)
= 100 mm
Alternative 2: 12 mm/25 cm both sides

as per 10.4.1 Rd = Rd ( 8) = 21.9 kN
at lb,inst = 13 cm
10.3.5.1 interpolated Rd ( 12) = 21.9 kN = 21.9 kN
lb,inst > lb,min = MAX (0.3*292; 1012; 100)
= 120
It is simple to vary the hole depth by using the tables.
10.4.2 Wall extension Existing wall
The existing wall is reinforced by New wall

8mm/25cm rebars and shall be exten-
ded by a new wall with the following
characteristics: ø8/25cm
Concrete class C 20/25

fck = 20 N/mm2
Steel grade fyk = 500 N/mm2
Wall thickness: 20 cm
Horizontal rebars: 8/25 cm
both sides
Lap connection: 8mm /25 cm both sides

table 10.5.1 hole depth = lb = 15 cm
D = 12 mm
Owing to the 8mm/25 cm rebars already cast in the wall to be connected, nothing is
gained by rebars of larger diameter because the force acting on the connection must be transmitted to the
cast-in reinforcement via the overlap.
307
If the position of the existing reinforcement is not known it is advisable to assume the worst case regarding
the proximity of the nearest cast-in rebar. If this can be e > 4 = 32mm, the anchorage length must be ac-
cordingly increased.
max e = 250/2 =125 mm

extension as per 10.3.4.3 lb,inst = 150+(125-32) = 243 mm
Instead of a hole depth of 15 cm, it must be 24 cm to ensure that the forces are transmitted from the connec-
tion rebar to the cast-in rebar. It is therefore recommended that the rebar position is measured using the Fer-
roscan instrument.
Connections to and extensions of columns etc. can also be designed in the same way as wall connections
and wall extensions.
10.4.3 Installation of an intermediate floor
Details:
Span length L = 4.3 m ø10/14cm
Slab thickness h = 16 cm d h
Concrete cover c = 2 cm
Effective depth d = 13 cm
Concrete class L
C 20/25 fck = 20 N/mm2
Grade of steel fyk = 500 N/mm2 Md M
2d d
Loading:
Live load Q = 2.00 kN/m2
Partial safety factor for variable actions Q = 1.50
Q Q = 3.00 kN/m2
Dead weight = 4.00 kN/m2

Intermediate walls = 1.00 kN/m2
Floor build-up = 1.50 kN/m2
Permanent loads
Partial safety factor for permanent actions
G
G
= 6.50 kN/m2
= 1.35
5
G G = 8.78 kN/m2
308
Bending moment M at mid-span
M = (Q Q + G G) L2/8 = 27.2 kNm/m
Required cross-sectional area of reinforcement from the design programme
As,requ = 5.31 cm2/m
→ implemented 10 mm/14 cm (As,provided = 5.61cm2/m)
This mid-span reinforcement determined by the design calculation and shown in the reinforcement drawing
is anchored in the walls using connection rebars having the same diameter and spacing.
Therefore, only the minimum anchorage depth is required according to the rules for rebars at supports.
Connection: 10mm/14 cm located below

from 10.3.4.1 lb,min = MAX {0.3217; 1010; 100}
= 100mm
hole depth = lb,min = 10 cm
D = 14 mm
The connection surfaces must be roughened to take up the shear force.
Alternative: Instead of extending the mid-span reinforcement, the minimum

required connection force in the support area is determined and
anchored. A truss model with an inclination of 45° is assumed
Loading: 3 d away from the support because the tensile force set up before
the rebar lap has to be transmitted
Md = (Q Q + G G )(L–3 d) 3 d/2

= 11.78 (4.3–0.39) 0.39 / 2
= 9.0 kNm/m
Vd = (Q Q + G G )L/2 (1–3d / (0,5 L)) = 20.7 kN
Zrequ = Md / (0.9 d) + Vd / 2 = 97.6 kN/m
selected: same rebar spacing as for large-area reinforcement

e = 14 cm
Zrequ/rebar = Zrequ e = 97.6 0.14 = 13.7 kN
as per 3.4.1: 8mm /14 cm located below

lb,inst = 10 cm
Rd,inst = 14.6 kN > Zrequ/rebar = 13.7 kN
Using detailed calculation, 8 mm rebars instead of 10mm can be used for anchoring. This demontrates
that it is worthwhile to perform a design calculation.
309
10.4.4 Installation of steps between landings
Details:
Step height h(ST) = 18 cm
Step width w(ST) = 28 cm
Gradient
= arctan (h(ST)/b(ST)) = 32.74° h(ST)
Distance between
supports L = 4.88 m ø12/13
Slab thickness h = 18 cm h = 18
Concrete cover c = 2 cm
Effective depth d = 15 cm
ø12/13 12 120 8 x 28 = 224 120 12
Concrete class
C 20/25 fck = 20 N/mm 2 L = 488
Grade of steel fyk = 500 N/mm2
Loading:
Live load Q = 3.00 kN/m2
Partial safety factor for variable actions Q = 1.50
Q Q = 4.50 kN/m2
Dead weight of steps

= 25 (h(ST)/2 + h/cos ) / 100 = 7.60 kN/m2
Dead weight of landing
= 25 h / 100 +1.5 = 6.00 kN/m2
→ The dead weight of the steps

is used throughout the entire
length, i.e. G = 7.60 kN/m2
Partial safety factor for

permanent actions G = 1.35
G G = 10.26 kN/m2
Loading at mid-span
M = (Q Q + G G) x L2/8 = 43.9 kNm/m
Required cross-sectional area of reinforcement from the design programme
As,requ = 8.20 cm2/m

5
→ implemented 12 mm/13 cm (As,provided = 8.70 cm2/m)
In the landings, rebars 12 mm/13 cm are cast in as well.

Step connection: 12mm/13 cm located below
table 10.3.5.1 Basic anchorage length lb = 29 cm
splice factor: = 1.4 (a > 10 )
Hole depth = lb, inst = 29 1.4 = 40 cm
D = 16 mm
The connection surfaces must be roughened to take up the shear force.
310
10.5 Test reports, Supplementary information
10.5.1 Relevant reports
[1] Marti, P., «Verankerung von Betonstahl mit Hilti HIT-HY150 (Anchoring Concrete Reinforcement using
Hilti HIT-HY150)», Report no. 93.327-1, December 17th., 1993, 13pp.
[2] Höhere Technische Lehr- und Versuchsanstalt Rankweil (Higher Technical Teaching and Testing Institu-
te, Rankweil, Austria), «Tragverhalten bei zentrischem Zug: Bewehrung BSt 500 mit Hilti HIT-HY150 in
Beton eingemörtelt (Loadbearing behaviour under tensile load: Rebars BSt 500 anchored in concrete
using Hilti HIT-HY150 adhesive)», Report no. 311/94, September 1994.
[3] SOCOTEC, «Cahier des charges d’emploi et de mise en œuvre du système de scellement à base de
résine; HIT HY 150 pour l’ancrage d’armatures pour béton armé»
Cahier des charges accepté par SOCOTEC sous le n°: BX 1032 (Juin 1994).
[4] Hilti AG, «Fastening Technology Manual», 1993.
[5] CEN: European Committee for Standardization, «ENV 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Struc-
tures – Part 1: General rules and rules for buildings», 1991
For national application refer to the national standard adopting the above European standard and to
the relevant National Application Document.
10.5.2 Test results: Pull-out tests on rebars
As described in the test report from HTL Rankweil [2], pull out tests have been made with the following setup
and results:
Test setup:
Concrete: fck = 35,40,20 N/mm2

Rebars: fyk = 500 N/mm2
Drilling: Hammer drill
Cleaning: Brushing and Blowing
Spacing: Sufficient spacing and edge distance
Loading: Tensile loading to failure
Sample: Diameters 8,10,12,14,16,20,25
Embedment 5, 10, 15, lb
Three samples each
311
Test results:
Rebar dia. Drill dia. Anchorage length

[mm] D [mm] 5 10 15 Ib
8 12 8.9 17.8 25.1 25.1
14.2 P 16.3 P 31.1 P 31.9 S
16.5 P 31.0 P 31.2 P 26.7 P
8.7 P 29.8 P 31.8 S 30.0 P
10 14 12.4 24.8 37.3 39.3
21.0 P 40.0 P 47.1 S 47.3 S
21.9 P 38.6 P 47.0 S 48.1 S
24.7 P 46.6 P 50.0 S 48.7 S
12 16 16.3 32.6 49.0 56.5
29.5 P 56.9 P 69.7 S 72.5 S
29.2 P 65.5 P 69.9 S 69.8 S
24.5 P 60.7 P 71.2 S 69.7 S
14 18 20.6 41.1 61.7 77.0
37.8 P 90.6 P 97.8 S 97.1 S
39.6 P 87.2 P 98.3 S 97.7 S
38.5 P 92.3 P 98.2 S 97.4 S
16 22 25.1 50.3 75.4 100.5
58.7 P 109.1 S 138.1 S 138.8 S
47.5 P 83.4 S 136.6 S 139.2 S
49.7 S 106.5 S 138.7 S 142.2 S
20 28 35.1 70.2 105.4 157.1
65.7 C 116.6 P 202.0 P 211.1 P
78.9 P 160.8 P 208.6 P 211.5 S
67.7 C 135.5 P 205.0 P 205.2 P
25 32 49.1 98.2 134.1 245.4
138.7 P 276.0 P 275.3 C 341.8 P
123.7 P 217.6 C 300.1 C 328.2 C
119.4 P 285.7 P 257.0 C 312.0 P
Rk: Theoretical ultimate load (characteristic load with = 1.0) Rk

fFult, Mode
Fult: Actual ultimate load Mode: failure mode, where P = pull out ult, Mode
fFult, Mode
S = steel failure ult, Mode
fFult, Mode
Mode
C = concrete failure ult,
225
200 }l b,inst = lb = 612mm

}
175 lb,inst=15 = 300mm
5
Tensile load [kN\
150
125
100
75 lb,inst=10 = 200mm
50
25 lb,inst= 5 = 100mm
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Displacement [mm\
Load/displacement curves for 20 mm rebars
225
312
200 }lb,inst=lb=612mm
10.5.3 Test results: Full scale beam test
In order to demonstrate that the characteristics of Hilti HIT-HY150 rebar

fastenings are similar to cast-in solutions the following test was underta-
ken [2]:
2 rebars ø 14 mm, lb = 35 cm
2 rebars ø 22 mm, lb = 68 cm
25 cm
40 cm
1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m
A concrete beam (40cmx25cmx475cm) is cut through at one third of its

length. Reinforcement bars of equivalent dimensions (twice 22 mm be-
low and twice 14 mm on top) are installed alongside the original rein-
forcement using Hilti HIT; thus the beam is rejoined.
F/ F/
2 2
The beam is then supported at the end points while a test load is applied
at the two third-points (the re-fastened and the original one). Bending of
the beam is measured below these two points to compare the performan-
ce of the reattached side to the original side.
As can be seen on the diagram the

70
reattached side bends in about the
60
same way as the original side.
50
Load F [kN]
The performance of the 40

Hilti HIT fastening indeed con- 30 original
forms to a cast-in rebar.
20 reattached
10
The measured bending moment at
0
failure of this beam (69.18 kNm) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
corresponds well to the calculated Bending [mm]
moment (68.10 kNm)
313
6
Appendix 2
11.1 Concrete overlay connection 315
11.1.1 Application range 315
11.1.2 Advantages of the method 315
11.2 Design of interface 317
11.2.1 Basic considerations 317
11.2.2 Ultimate limit state for shear transfer
at the interface 317
11.2.3 Design shear force acting longitudinally
at interface, VSd 322
11.2.4 Serviceability limit state 323
11.2.5 Additional rules and detailing provisions 323
11.3 Examples 326
11.3.1 Example: Double-span slab 326
11.3.2 Example: Double-span beam with new slab 329
11.4 Test results 331

11.4.1 Transfer of shear across a concrete crack 331
11.4.2 Laboratory tests by Hilti Corporate Research 331
11.4.3 Working principle of connectors 332
11.4.4 Comparison with international test results 333
11.5 Notations 334
11.6 Reference literature 335
12. Injection mortar Hit HY 150 and HAS rod
with nut or headplate 336
12.1 Terms 336
12.2 Data for the calculation 337
12.3 Minimum steel content for Ved 338
12.4 Product Information 342
6
314
Connections for concrete overlays
11 Appendix 2
11.1 Concrete overlay connection
11.1.1 Application range
new concrete
If a new layer of concrete is applied to existing concrete with
the aim of strengthening or repairing a structure, reference is
made to a composite concrete structure. This overlay is existing
usually cast directly or placed as shotcrete. It functions to concrete
augment the flexural compression or flexural tension zones,

depending on the placement. Prior to placement of the over-
lay, the surface of the old concrete member is prepared by Figure 1: Strengthening a bridge deck
suitable means and pre-wetted. Shrinkage of the new con-
crete overlay can be reduced by careful selection of the con- Case A:
crete mix. Forces of constraint caused by differential shrin- new concrete overlay
kage and, possibly, by differential temperature gradients
cannot be avoided, however. Initially, stresses in the bond in-
terface result from a combination of external loads and inter-
nal forces of constraint. It must be borne in mind that stres-
ses due to shrinkage and temperature gradients in the new
concrete typically reach their maximum at the perimeter
(peeling forces). The combination of external and internal
stresses often exceeds the capacity of the initial bond, thus Case B:
new concrete with
requiring the designer to allow for a de-bonded interface. additional tensile reinforcement
This is particularly true in the case of bridge overlays which
are subject to fatigue stresses resulting from traffic loads. Figure 2: Strengthening a building floor
Furthermore, these stresses are dependent on time, and bond failure can take place years after overlay
placement. When this happens, the tensile forces set up must be taken up by reinforcement or connectors
positioned across the interface. Typical examples are shown schematically in Figures 1 and 2.
11.1.2 Advantages of the method

➥ Simple and reliable application to a variety of cases
➥ Monolithic structural component behavior assured
➥ Shear forces are reliably transferred even if the interface is cracked
➥ Suitable for use with the most common methods of surface roughening
➥ Reduced requirements for anchor embedment
Repairing a bridge pavement

• Removal of damaged concrete layer using high-
pressure water jetting
• Anchoring of additional reinforcement using
HIT-HY 150
• Installation of shear connectors using HIT-HY 150
• Placement of new concrete overlay
✔ Monolithic load-bearing behavior

✔ Reliable transfer of shear
✔ Stiff connection
✔ Reduced anchor embedment
315
Strengthening the floor of an industrial building

• Removal of covering and any loose overlay
• Roughening of surface by shot-blasting
• Installation of connectors using HIT-HY 150
according to the engineer's instructions
• Inspection, if necessary, of concrete surface for
roughness and pull-away strength, and of
connectors for pull-out strength
• Placement of reinforcement and overlay concrete

✔ Reliable shear transfer; verifiable
✔ Adequate connection stiffness
✔ Small anchorage depth
Strengthening an industrial building foundation

• Exposure of foundation
• Installation of connectors using HIT-HY 150 per
design specifications (smooth surface)
✔ Reduced labor
✔ Reduced anchor embedment (6 diameters)
✔ Reliable shear transfer
✔ Ductile connection
Section
Repairing and strengthening a pier
• Roughening of concrete surface
per design specifications
Connector

Plane
✔ A stiff connection
✔ Reduced anchor embedment
Tunel
Repair and strengthening with shotcrete
• Roughening of concrete surface
Beam
Connector
Mesh
6
Additional
✔ A stiff connection
reinforcement ✔ Reduced anchor embedment
316
11.2 Design of interface
11.2.1 Basic considerations

Structures made of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete which have a concrete overlay at least
40 mm thick ([2], Section 2.5.3.5.8 (109)), or at least 60 mm thick on bridge structures, may be designed
as monolithic building components if shear forces at the interface between the new and the old concre-
te are resisted in accordance with the following rules:
11.2.2 Ultimate limit state for shear transfer at the interface

11.2.2.1 Principle and set-up of the model
Actions at the interface between new and old concrete are determined from the overall forces acting on
the entire building component.
As a rule for the design, it must be assumed that the interface is de-bonded.
Reinforcement or connectors crossing the interface surface must be placed in such a way that shear
forces at the interface are transferred in the ultimate limit state.
As a result of the separation of the interface surfa-

“Interlock” “Pull-out” “Dowel”
(friction, cohesion) (friction) (bending,
ces, connectors are subjected to a tensile force
shear and simultaneously to a bending moment depen-
force)
ding on the roughness of the interface surfaces.
If the surfaces are roughened, additional in-
terlocking effects and cohesion can take up part of
the shear force at the interface.
11.2.2.2 Design shear resistance at interface, VRd
VRd >
_ VSd (1)
Where:
VRd = Rdj · bj · Ij (2)
VRd design shear resistance at interface

VSd design shear force acting at interface as per section 11.2.3
Rdj design shear strength at interface under consideration as per Formula (3) and Diagrams 1 to 3
bj effective width of interface under consideration
lj effective length of interface under consideration
317
11.2.2.3 Design shear strength at interface, Rdj

Formula (3) is used to calculate the design shear strength at the interface, Rdj [6]. When doing so, an up-
per limit is given by the design strength in the concrete struts:
Rdj = kT • Rd + · ( •
• fyd + n) + • • fyd • fcd <_ • • fcd (3)
cohesion friction dowel action concrete struts
Where:
Rd basic design shear strength of concrete as per [1], Section 4.3.2.3 (the smaller value
of new or old concrete), refer also to Table 2.
kT cohesion factor as per Table 1
coefficient of friction as per Table 1
coefficient for effective tensile force in the connector as per Table 1

coefficient for effective dowel action as per Table 1
coefficient for effective concrete strength as per Table 1
efficiency factor as per [1], Formula (4.20); also refer to Table 2.
= As / bj lj reinforcing ratio corresponding to connectors of interface under consideration
n <_ 0,6 fcd normal stress certainly acting on interface (positive compression)
fyd design value of yield strength of connector
fcd design value of cylinder compressive strength of concrete (smaller value of new or old
concrete)
Rt mean depth of interface roughness, measured according to the sand-patch method [9]
Concrete surface treatment Mean depth of roughness Coefficients

Rt mm kT
fck> _ 20 fck>_ 35
High-pressure water jets / Scoring > 3.0 2.3 0.5 0.9 0.4 0.8*) 1.0*)
Sandblasting / Chipping hammer > 0.5 0 0.5 1.1 0.3 0.7
Smooth: wood or steel forms or no forms – 0 0 1.5 0.2 0.5
Table 1: Parameters for Formula (3) *) Intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.
Concrete strength class C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60
fck N/mm2 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
fcd N/mm2 13.3 16.7 20.0 23.3 26.7 30.0 33.3
0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.50 0.50 0.50
Rd N/mm2 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30 0.31 0.32 0.33
Table 2: Rd and (as per 1]; Table 4.8).
6
318
Diagram 1: for surfaces roughened with high-pressure water jets or scored

(mean roughness Rt > 3 mm, i.e. peaks > approx. 6 mm high)
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
Rdj N/mm2
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
Reinforcing ratio, % Reinforcing steel, fyk = 500 N/mm2
6.8
6.5
6.2
5.9
5.6
5.3
5.0
4.7
Rdj N/mm2
4.4
4.1
3.8
3.5
3.2
2.9
2.6
2.3
2.0
1.7
1.4
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
319
Diagram 2: for sand-blasted surfaces

(mean roughness Rt > 0.5 mm, i.e. peaks > approx. 1.0 mm high)
1.15
1.10
1.05 C5 0 / 60
1.00 C4 5 / 55
0.95 C4 0 / 50
0.90 C3 5 / 45
0.85 C3 0 / 37
0.80 C2 5 / 30
0.75 C2 0 / 25
0.70
Rdj N/mm2
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
5.0
4.8
4.6
4.4 C5 0 / 60
4.2 C4 5 / 55
4.0 C4 0 / 50
3.8 C3 5 / 45
3.6 C3 0 / 37
3.4 C2 5 / 30
3.2 C2 0 / 25
Rdj N/mm2
3.0
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
6
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
320
Diagram 3: for smooth cast surfaces

(wood forms, steel forms, no forms)
0.75
0.70
C5 0 / 60
0.65
C4 5 / 55
0.60 C4 0 / 50
0.55 C3 5 / 45
0.50 C3 0 / 37
C2 5 / 30
0.45 C2 0 / 25
0.40
Rdj N/mm2
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
3.4
3.2
C5 0 / 60
3.0
C4 5 / 55
2.8 C4 0 / 50
2.6 C3 5 / 45
C3 0 / 37
2.4
C2 5 / 30
2.2 C2 0 / 25
Rdj N/mm2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
321
11.2.3 Design shear force acting longitudinally at interface, VSd

Normally, VSd is calculated from the bending resistance of the cross-section. (Shear failure of the mem-
ber should not govern.)
11.2.3.1 Augmentation of compression zone

Ase, new neutral axis
x Vcd = 0,8 · x · bnew · · fcd + Ase,new · fyd (4)
tnew
overlay Vcd
0,8 Reduction factor for non-rectangular stress
distribution
= 0,85 Reduction factor for sustained compression
existing concrete
for: x > tnew as an approximation:

As
Vcd = tnew · bnew · · fcd + Ase,new · fyd (5)
11.2.3.2 Augmentation of tension zone

x
Vtd = Ase, new · fyd (6)
Existing concrete
If the reinforcement is staggered: allow for gradation
Overlay Vtd Ase, new

tnew
11.2.3.3 Shear force to be transferred at overlay perimeter

At the edges of a new concrete overlay, the design must consider a minimum tensile force Fcr. Here,
particular attention must be paid to transferring the moment arising from Fcr:
Fcr = tnew · b · k · fct,eff (7)
Fcr tensile force effective in the overlay at the time when the cracks may first be
expected to occur, as per [1], Section 4.4.2.2
k = 0,8 for tnew <
_ 30 cm coefficient to allow for non-uniform self-equilibrating stresses
fct,eff tensile strength of overlay effective at the time when the cracks may first be
expected to occur as per [1], Section 4.4.2.2 (for general cases: fct,eff = 3 N/mm2)
The following values may be used without further verification:

Ved tnew
Ned Overlay
c Ved = Fcr (8)

Ved
le
Existing concrete Ved c <
Ned = ––––– ; _ 1.5 · tnew (9)
6
As
Ved shear force at interface derived from Fcr
Ned tensile force resulting from moment of Fcr
Ved may be distributed uniformly over the length le:
a) le = 3 tnew for rough surfaces
b) le = 6 tnew for sand-blasted surfaces
6
c) le = 9 tnew for smooth surfaces
322
11.2.3.4 Regions without connectors

For low shear stresses, connectors need not be used in the field of the overlay if the load is predomi-
nantly static and if connectors are positioned around the perimeter in accordance with Section 11.2.3.3.
a) With surfaces blasted with a high-pressure water jet and scored surfaces, for
Sd <
_ kT · Rd + · n (10)
b) With clean, sand-blasted surfaces, provided that no tensile stresses set up by external forces per-
pendicular to the interface are acting (assuming a non-cracked interface), for:
Sd <
_ Rd + · n (11)
11.2.4 Serviceability limit state

As an approximation for normal cases, the additional deformation of a strengthened bending element
may be determined using the monolithic cross-section and then increased as follows:
weff = · wcalc (12)
weff additional deformation calculated for the reinforced section considering the flexibility of the
connectors
wcalc additional deformation calculated for the reinforced section assuming perfect bond
factor per Table 3
sd displacement of connectors under the mean permanent load (FP ~ 0.5 Fuk)
The displacement, sd, per Table 3, can be used for more accurate calculations.
Surface treatment Mean roughness Rt mm sd mm

High-pressure water jets / Scoring > 3.0 1.0 ≈ 0.005 dia.
Sand-blasting / Chipping hammer > 0.5 1.1 ≈ 0.015 dia.
Smooth: wood forms /steel forms/ no forms – 1.2 ≈ 0.030 dia.
Table 3: Coefficients for calculation of deformation dia. = diameter of connectors
11.2.5 Additional rules and detailing provisions

11.2.5.1 Mixed surface treatments
Variable surface treatments may only be used on the same building component if the different stiffnes-
ses of the connections are taken into account. (See also Table 3, displacement sd.) Note that a non-
cracked interface, i.e., rigid bond, is assumed for interfaces with small shear stresses not requiring field
connectors, as per Section 11.2.3.4.
11.2.5.2 Minimum amount of reinforcement at the interface

The following minimum amount of reinforcement passing through the interface must be provided if
connectors cannot be omitted as described in Section 11.2.3.4:
1) Slabs and other structures in which no shear reinforcement is necessary:
a) For rough interface surfaces (high-pressure water jet and scored): >
_ 0.08%
b) For sand-blasted interface surfaces >_ 0.12%
c) For smooth interface surfaces: >_ 0.12%
2) Beams and other structures with shear reinforcement as per [1], Section 5.4.2.2
323
11.2.5.3 Layout of connectors

(1) The connectors must be positioned in the load-bearing direction of the building component with
respect to the distribution of the acting shear force in such a way that both the shear force at the
interface can be taken up and de-bonding of the new concrete overlay is prevented.
(2) In sand-blasted and smooth surfaces, the connectors may be equidistantly positioned over the corre-
sponding length, lj, between neighboring critical sections when the load is predominantly static. Accor-
ding to [3], Section 4.1.2 (4), critical sections are points subject to maximum bending moments, support
points, points where concentrated loads are acting and points with sudden changes in cross-section.
(3) If the new concrete overlay is on the tension side of the load-bearing component, the connectors
must be distributed according to the graduation of the longitudinal reinforcement without making
any allowance for anchorage lengths.
(4) The connector spacing in the load-bearing direction may not be larger than 6 times the thickness of
the new concrete overlay, or 800 mm.
11.2.5.4 Anchorage of connectors in the old and the new concrete

(1) The connectors must be adequately embedded in the old concrete and the new overlay. The ac-
tually anchored tensile force, Nd, may be assumed to be:
_
· AS · f yd
Nd > (13)

= coefficient as per Table 1.
(2) The type of application is decisive when determining the anchorage depth in the base material:
(2a) Zones with shear reinforcement or other connecting reinforcement (Figure 7):
(Appendix 1).
The basic value of anchorage depth, lb, must be determined according to (Appendix 2). The mini-
mum anchorage depth is 10 times the diameter.
It must be borne in mind that this generally concerns an overlap of the connector and existing rein-
forcement (ls = 1 · lb, see [1], Section 5.2.4).
Furthermore, the tensile force from the trussed-frame analogy as per [1], Section 4.3.2.4 must be
verified for building components with required shear reinforcement.
(2b) Zones without shear reinforcement (VSd ≤ VRd1) or any other connecting reinforcement (Figure 8):
The anchorage depth must be determined as per (Appendix 2). The edge distances and spacing
(Appendix 1).
(c1, s) of adhesive anchors must be ascertained according to anchor design.
Cracks in concrete generally reduce the tensile loading capacity of adhesive anchors. If cracking is
anticipated, the anchorage depth must be increased, e.g., in the case of pure tensile reinforcement
or strengthening for bending with high shear force near beam supports or for concentrated loads.
c1 s
Is
Ib
6
Figure 7: Rebar fastening design Figure 8: Anchor design
324
(3) Plates, nuts or forged-on heads can be used to reduce the anchorage depth of connectors in a new
concrete overlay. If such a connector is used, the following checks must be made:
a) Concrete cone failure must be checked in accordance with [5], Section 15.1.2.4.
Sufficient reinforcement against splitting must be provided to take up splitting forces set up locally
at the top of the connectors. Calculation of the splitting forces may be based on a truss framework
model which has a line of compressive action at an angle of 45º.
Normally, the connectors should extend into the upper reinforcement of the concrete overlay and
form a truss framework node there.
b) The concrete bearing pressure under the head is limited as per [5] Section 15.1.2.3, or [1],
Section 5.4.8.1.
(4) If interface surfaces are smooth, connectors must be provided with an embedment of at least
6 diameters (9 diameters recommended).
11.2.5.5 Minimum reinforcement in overlay

The procedure in [1] must be adopted to determine the minimum amount of reinforcement in the con-
crete overlay.
Beams: [1], Section 5.4.2.1.1 and 5.4.2.4
Slabs: [1], Section 5.4.3.2.1
11.2.5.6 Recommendation for overlay placement

Pre-treatment:
A primer consisting of thick cement mortar is recommended.
The old concrete should be adequately pre-wetted (24 hours earlier the first time) before applying the
cement mortar primer. At the time of placing the primer, the concrete surface should have dried to such
an extent that it has only a dull moist appearance.
The mortar used as primer should consist of water and equal parts by weight of Portland cement and
sand of particle size 0/2 mm. This mortar is then applied to the prepared concrete surface and brushed in.
Overlay:
The concrete mix for the overlay should normally be such that a low-shrinkage concrete results
(W/C ≤ 0.40). The overlay must be placed on the still fresh primer i.e. wet on wet.
Curing:
Careful follow-up is necessary to ensure good durability of the overlay. Starting immediately after place-
ment, the concrete overlay must be protected for a sufficiently long period, but at least five days,
against drying out and excessive cooling.
11.2.5.7 Recommendation for surface treatment specification

The roughness of the interface surface has a decisive influence on the shear force that can be transfer-
red. In the case of this design process, the dimension to be measured is the mean depth of roughness,
Rt, measured according to the sand-patch method [7]. It must be borne in mind that Rt is a mean value
and thus the difference between the peaks and valleys is about 2Rt.
It is recommended that a mean depth of roughness, Rt, be stipulated when specifying the interface sur-
face treatment. Prior to approving the treatment, a sample surface must be made and this then checked
on the basis of the sand-patch method.
325
11.3 Examples
11.3.1 Example: Double-span slab qd = 27,5kN/m2

Given:
Concrete: Overlay: 70 mm: C 30/37
Old concrete 150 mm: C 25/30
Reinforcement: S500, fyk = 500 N/mm2
6000 6000
Span: Ase+ = 1’030 mm2/m
Support: Ase– = 1’420 mm2/m -105kNm/m
MRd: -
Cracking tensile force at edge (11.2.3.3):
Ved = 70 · 1 · 0.8 · 3 = 168 kN/m + +
76,5kNm/m -100kN/m
Span:
1030 · 0.5 · 1.5
Neutral axis: xd = ___________________ = 33mm Qd: - -
1.15 · 30 · 0.85 · 0.80
➥ Vcd = 0.85 · 0.80 · 33 · 30/1.5 = 449 kN/m + +
65kN/m
Support: Ase = 1420 mm2/m 2360 3640 0,58N/mm2
0,55N/mm2
Vtd = 1420 · 0,5/1.15 = 617 kN/m
d: For one span
Max. values of shear stress at interface: d d
449 · 2
cd max = ______ = 0.38 N/mm2 2360 3640
2360 6000
0,35N/mm2
(617 + 449) · 2 0,38N/mm2
td max = _____________ = 0.58 N/mm2
3640
a) Surface treatment: high-pressure water jet

Cohesion Rdj = 2.3 · 0.26 = 0.60 > 0.55 N/mm2 ➡ no reinforcement required
Cracking tensile force Ved = 168 kN/m (Section 11.2.3.3); Strip width, le = 3 · 70 = 210 mm
at edge: 168’000 = 0.8 N/mm2
➥ td = 1000 · 210
➡ From diagram req = 0.08%
➥ As = 0.0008 · 210 · 1000 = 168 mm /m ➡ selected dia. 8 s = 250 mm

2
Tensile force to be
Nd = 0.5 · 0.5 · 50.3 = 10.9 kN (Formula 13)
transferred by anchor: 1.15
➥ Anchored in old lb = 100 mm ➡ NRd = 14.6 kN (Appendix

(Appendix 1),
2, Table 10.3.5.1)
concrete:
selected: edge distance c1 = 100 mm ➡ NRd,red = 14.6 · 100 = 11.2 kN ([6] page 13)
130
➥ Anchored in head dia. = 14 mm
overlay: Transferable bearing force under head ([5], Section 15.1.2.3):
7.5
NRd,p = · · (142 – 82) · 30 = 15 kN > NRd = 11.2 kN ➡ OK
1.5 4
Concrete cone capacity: ([5], Section 15.1.2.4) 6
9
NRd,c = · 300.5 · 551.5 = 11.2 kN = NRd = 11.2 kN ➡ OK
1.8
326
Tensile force from resisted moment: 168_ = 28.0 kN/m (Formula 9)

Ned = ___
6
11.2_ = 44.8 > 28.0 kN/m; c = 100 ≤ 1.5 · 70 = 105 mm ➡ OK
NRd = ____ 1
0.25
Shear force to be anchored: 168 · 1.15

Ved = 168 kN/m: Sirrup-type reinforcement: As = ______ ___ = 386 mm2/m
0.5
Selected: Pins 8 dia. per connector (lap splice with mesh reinforcement
6.5 dia. s = 100 mm)
b) Surface treatment: sand-blasted

Cohesion: Rdj = 0.26 N/mm2
0.35 + 0.26
At edge support: mean shear stress at interface d = = 0.305 N/mm2
2
➥ From diagram: req = 0.12 % Strip width 745 mm
➥ As = 0.0012 · 1000 · 745 = 894 mm2/m
➡ selected: dia. 8 s = 200/200 mm
0.55 + 0.26
At intermediate support: mean shear stress at interface d = = 0.405 N/mm2
2
➥ As = 0.0016 · 10002 = 1600 mm2/m2
Cracking tensile force at edge: Ved = 168 kN/mm2 Strip width le = 6 · 70 = 420 mm
168’000
➥ d = 1000 · 420 = 0.4 N/mm 2
➡ From diagram: req = 0.16 %
➥ As = 0.0016 · 420 · 1000 = 672 mm /m 2
Forces to be anchored: same as a)
0,58N/mm2
Bond shear stresses at sand-blasted interface surface:
0,55N/mm2
2015
0,26N/mm2
745
d d
2360 3640
0,26N/mm2
0,35N/mm2
0,38N/mm2
327
c) Surface without treatment (smooth)
0.35
Edge support/span: Mean shear stress at interface d = = 0.175 N/mm2
2
➥ As = 0.0015 · 10002 = 1500 mm2/m2
➡ selected dia. 10 s = 200/250 mm
0.55
At intermediate support: Mean shear stress at interface d = = 0.275 N/mm2
2
➥ From diagram: req = 0.23 % half-strip width 3640 mm
➥ As = 0.0023 · 10002 = 2300 mm2/m2
➡ selected dia.10 s = 200/170 mm
Cracking tensile force at edge: Ved = 168 kN/mm2 Strip width le = 9 · 70 = 630 mm
168’000
➥ d = = 0.27 N/mm2
1000 · 630
➡ From diagram: req = 0.23 %
➥ As = 0.0023 · 630 · 1000 = 1449 mm /m 2
➡ selected dia. 10 s = 200/170 mm
Anchorage of dowel: Ib = (6 times dia.) = 60 mm in new and old concrete

Forces to be anchored: Every second connector in an edge row should be a headed
connector designed as in a)
11.2
NRd = = 32.9 > Ned = 28.0 kN
0.34
Anchoring against de-bonding: It is recommended, that a suitable number of headed

connectors also be installed in appropriate locations to
prevent the concrete overlay from de-bonding locally.
High-pressure water jet Sand-blasted Smooth

mesh 6,5 dia. s = 100 mesh 6,5 dia. s = 100 mesh 6,5 dia. s = 100
60 70
60 60
pin 8 dia. s = 250 pin 8 dia. pin 8 dia. 60
8 dia. s=150 60
100 8 dia s = 250 100 8 dia. s=150 100
10 dia.s =170
150 8 dia. s = 340
+ 10 dia. s = 340
100 100 200 100 200
Connectors only at edge Connectors at edge: Connectors at edge

8 dia. s = 250 mm headed connector 8 dia. s = 200 / 150 mm headed 1st row 10 dia. s = 340 mm shear dowel
connector + 8 dia. s = 340 headed connector
Edge support: 10 dia. s = 200 / 170 mm shear dowel
8 dia. s = 200 / 200 mm headed
connector
Strip width: btot = 745 mm
Intermediate support:
Edge strip width: b = 630 mm
10 dia. s = 200/250 mm shear dowel
Strip width: btot = 2360 mm
Intermediate support:
6
8 dia. s = 200 / 150 mm headed 10 dia. s = 200 / 170 mm shear dowel
connector Strip width: b ≥ 2 x 3640 mm
Strip width: b ≥ 2 x 2015 mm
328
11.3.2 Example: Double-span beam with new slab
qd + gd = 88,5kN/m
Cross-section:
1200
6000 6000
0,180
-383kNm
+ +
230kNm 0,600
-329kN
- -
+ +
0,200
202kN
Given:
Concrete: New slab: C 30/37, Beam C 25/30
Reinforcement: Rebar S500; Ase+ = 804 mm2; Ase- = 1340 mm2 fyk = 500 N/mm2
804 · 0.5 · 1.5
Span: Neutral axis xd = = 21.4 mm
1.15 · 0.8 · 0.85 · 1.2 · 30
30 349 · 103 · 2
Vcd = 1.20 · 0.8 · 0.85 · 21.4 · = 349 kN ➡ cd = = 1.53 N/mm2
1.5 2280 · 200
0.5 (349 + 583) · 103 · 2
Intermediate Vtd = 1340 · = 583 kN ➡ td = = 2.50 N/mm2
support: 1.15 3720 · 200
518 · 103
Edge: Cracking Ved = 1.2 · 180 · 0.8 · 3 = 518 kN; le ≈ 0.75 b = 900 mm ➡ ed = = 2.9 N/mm2
tensile force: 900 · 200
Minimum reinforcement [1], Table 5.5: min = 0.26 %, smax = 300 mm
2,50N/mm2
2,10N/mm2
2,06N/mm2
900 1,30N/mm2
e = 90 e = 300 e = 140
1,30N/mm2
1,53N/mm2 1,10N/mm2
d=650 d=650
2280 3720
6000
2 dia. 10 s = 300 mm As = 523 mm2/m = 0.26 % Rd = 1.3 N/mm2

Notes:
● The anchorage length is determined by the existing stirrup-type reinforcement (lap splice).
● The shear stresses at the interface are too high for smooth or sand-blasted surfaces.
329
11.3.3 Example: Foundation reinforcement Fd = 1120 kN/m
Given: 500
Concrete: Old C 20/25; New: C 25/30 200
Rebar steel: S500; fyk = 500 N/mm2 100
700 900
Reinforcement existing in foundation:
16 dia. s = 150 Ase = 1340 mm2 500 3000 500
4000
1340 · 500 · 1.5
Neutral axis: xd = = 51 mm
25 · 0.8 · 0.85 · 1000 · 1.15 pd = 280 kN/m2
25
➥ Vcd = 0.8 · 51 · 0.85 ·1.5 = 579 kN/m
1000 d=750 250
579’000 · 2
➥ cd,max = 1750 · 1000
= 0.66 N/mm2
0,38N/mm2
1. End-face: Shear force on end-face
0,66N/mm2
Vd = 280 · 0.5 = 140 kN/m
V 140’000
➥ d = d ·db = 750 · 1000 = 0.19 N/mm 2
a) High-pressure water jet or scored

Rdj = 2.3 · 0.24 = 0.55 > d = 0.19 N/mm2 ➡ no connectors required
b) Sand-blasted (special case: the interface has cracked due to the bending moment)
d = 0.19 N/mm2 ➡ As,req = 486 mm2/m (Formula 3) superimposed tensile force from bending
The minimum reinforcement for flexure governs: Ase,min > As,req + Ase,req
2. Bending
Md = 280 · 0.52 · 1/2 = 35 kNm/m Ase,req = 163 mm2/m
1000 · 600
Min. reinforcement ([1], Section 4.4.2.2 (3) and Table 4.11) Ase,min = 0.4 · 0.8 · 3 · = 1285 mm2/m
2 · 280
selected: dia. 16, s = 150 mm (As = 1340 mm2/m) anchorage length, Fd = 201 · 280 = 56.3 kN : Is = 1.4 · 285 = 400 mm
3. Topside
a) High-pressure water jet or scored
Cohesion: Rdj = 2.3 · 0.24 = 0.55 > d = 0.38 N/mm2 ➡ no connectors required
b) Sand-blasted
d,max = 0.38 N/mm2 ➡ req = 0.16 % ➡ As,req = 0.0016 · 10002 = 1600 mm2/m2 selected 12 dia. s = 250 mm
0.5
Tensile force per connector Nd = 0.5 · 113 · = 24.6 kN ➡ anchorage length, lb = 150 mm
1.15
(Appendix 2, Section 10.3.5.1)
High-pressure water jet: Sand-blasted: Smooth:

In this case, un-roughened
interface surfaces cannot be
used. The concrete edge at the
end face would hinder the
100
125
necessary displacement of the
connectors. 6
400 400
ø16 e = 150mm ø16 e = 150mm

4 ø12 e = 250/250
330
11.4. Test results
11.4.1 Transfer of shear across a concrete crack

Review of the literature reveals
“Dowel” “Pull-out” “Interlock”
(bending, shear force) (friction) little research into the specific
(friction, cohesion)
behavior of reinforced bond in-
terfaces between new and old
concrete. The majority of the
existing studies concentrate on
the transfer of shear forces
across cracks.
The effect on the shear loading
capacity of subsequent roug-
hening the surface of the old
concrete was first investigated
Figure 9: Transfer of shear across a concrete crack (shear-friction model)
in 1960 in the United States.
A few years later, the so-called shear-friction theory was developed. This theory attempts to explain the
phenomena with the aid of a simple saw-tooth model. According to this, the roughness of surfaces in
the case of relative displacement always leads to a widening of the interface which sets up stresses in
steel connectors passing across the interface. They, in turn, create clamping forces across the interface
and thus also frictional forces.
In 1987, Tsoukantas and Tassios [4] presented analytical investigations into the shear resistance of
connections between precast concrete components. They cover the different contributing mechanisms
of friction and dowel action (Figure 9).
11.4.2 Laboratory tests by Hilti Corporate Research

Specific shear tests were carried out in
the laboratories of Hilti Corporate Re-
search in cooperation with the Univer-
sity of Innsbruck (Supervision: Profes-
sor Dr. techn. M. Wicke), to investigate
the interrelationships of various degre-
es of roughness and transferable shear
stresses with various degrees of rein-
forcement.
Using a unique test frame design, it was
possible to avoid secondary eccentric
moments in the specimen and to achie-
ve nearly parallel separation of the inter-
face surfaces (Figure 10). The roughe-
ned surfaces were treated with a de-
Figure 10: Shear tests
bonding agent before the new concrete
was placed.
The results clearly demonstrate that a significant increase in load-bearing capacity can be achieved by
proper roughening of the surfaces. If the surfaces are very rough, the steel connectors across the bond
interface are primarily stressed in tension, whereas, if the surfaces are smooth, the shear resistance of
the connectors (dowel action) predominates.
When interface surfaces are rough and the amount of reinforcement at the interface is small (low shear
stress), cohesion makes a major contribution to transferring the shear force.
The general design concept is presented in the thesis by Randl [6].
331
11.4.3 Working principle of connectors
200
The test results confirm the strong
180 Test
V No. N18
ersuch r. (water-blasted; 2 dia.
1 8 ( HDW-gest rahlt 12)2 )
; 2 φ1 influence of roughness on shear
160
resistance and shear stiffness.
t [ [kN]
140
kN]
If the load-displacement curves

120
are regarded in conjunction with
force
Scherkraf
100
Vfriction and surface
erzahnung interlock
u nd Reibung the measured displacement, the
Shear
80
three components of cohesion,
60
friction and dowel action can be
40
dowel
D¸ b elw action
ir kung isolated and determined quantita-
20 tively. They make different contri-
0 butions to the overall resistance
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
horizont aledisplacement
Horizonal V erschiebung [mm]
[ mm] (Figures 11, 12 and 13), depen-
ding on surface roughness and
Figure 11: Test example for water-blasted surface
amount of reinforcement.
Hence, the frictional component
predominates when the surface is
200 blasted with a high-pressure wa-
ter jet and larger amounts of rein-
180 VTest No.N40
ersuch (sand-blasted;
r. 4 2 dia.
0 ( sandgest rahlt φ1 2 )
; 212)
160
forcement are provided. But small
[ kN]
shear stresses can also be trans-

forcet[kN]
140
ferred even when no reinforce-
120
Scherkraf
ment is present, due to the good

100
interlocking effect of the interface
Shear
80
friction surfaces. In the case of sand-bla-
60
sted surfaces, however, shear
40 D¸ b elwaction
ir kung
dowel stresses are transferred by a com-
20
bination of friction and dowel ac-
0 tion, but the forces that can be re-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
horizont ale displacement
V erschiebung [mm]
[ mm]
sisted are generally far smaller
Horizonal
than in the case of high-pressure
Figure 12: Test example for sand-blasted surface water blasting.
Investigations were also conduc-
ted as to whether the post-instal-
200
led rebar connectors are stressed
to yield at ultimate shear transfer.
180 Test No. 57 N
V ersuch (formed
R. 5 7 ( surface;
schalglat 2 2 φ1 12)
t ; dia. 2)
160
For this purpose, the strain in the
connectors at the level of the in-
[ kN]
forcet [kN]
140
terface was measured. To avoid
120
Scherkraf
any disturbance of the bond, and

100
in order to obtain the strain due to
Shear
80
tensile loading only, the strain
60
gauges were fitted in a central
40 D¸ b elwaction
dowel ir kung
bore along the longitudinal axis of
20
the connectors.
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
These test results clearly show
horizont ale displacement
Horizonal V erschiebung [[mm]
mm] that, when surfaces have the
Figure 13: Test example for smooth surface
above-mentioned degrees of
roughness, the tensile force in
the connectors has not reached
6
the full connector tensile yield
strength, contrary to assumpti-
332
Mattlock,
Mat t ock,Walraven,
W alrav en, Daschner,
D aschner, HHilti
ilt i ons for other design models.
1 2 ,0
Mattock: “rough” ACI Tests carried out with connectors
1 1 ,0 (r = 3 mm); fy = 350 N/mm2,
fc = 20 – 45 N/mm2 of various lengths confirm this re-
1 0 ,0 Walraven: cracked concrete;
fy = 450 N/mm2, sult, as they showed that redu-
9 ,0 fc = 25 – 32 N/mm2
Daschner: raked surface;
ced anchorage lengths are suffi-
8 ,0 fy = 540 N/mm2,
fc = 15 N/mm2
cient to carry the effective
τ [ N/ m m 2 ]
7 ,0
Hilti: water-blasted; connector tensile force at maxi-
fy = 508 N/mm2 ;
6 ,0
fc = 18 N/mm2 mum shear transfer capacity. Ad-
Hilti: water blasted;
5 ,0
fy = 508 – 653 N/mm2 ; ditional connector embedment
fc = 36 N/mm2
4 ,0
Design function (charact. values):
(e. g., as required for theoretical
3 ,0 water-blasted; fck = 30 N/mm2,
fyk = 500 N/mm2 connector tensile yield) did not
2 ,0
Design function (charact. values):
water-blasted; fck = 20 N/mm2,
result in increased shear transfer.
1 ,0 fyk = 500 N/mm2
0 ,0
0 ,0 1 ,0 2 ,0 3 ,0 4 ,0 5 ,0 6 ,0 7 ,0 8 ,0 9 ,0 1 0 ,0 1 1 ,0 1 2 ,0
The load-bearing behavior of
ρ f y [ N/ mm 2]
smooth interface surfaces with
Figure 14: Shear tests, „rough“ interface connectors was also investiga-
ted. As displacement readings
5 ,5
for the horizontal and vertical di-
Hilti tests
rections showed, there is in this
5 ,0 Hi: sand-blasted;
fy = 508 N/mm2;
fc = 18 N/mm2;
case also a separation of the in-
4 ,5
Ib = 17dia. terface under shear loading and,
4 ,0
Hi: sand-blasted;
thus, owing to the lack of roughn-
3 ,5 fy = 508 – 653 N/mm2,
fc = 35 N/mm2;
ess, a loss of contact between
τ [ N/ mm 2]
Ib > 8 dia.
3 ,0 the shear surfaces. In this case,
2 ,5 Design function (charact. the entire resistance is provided
values): sand-blasted;
2 ,0 fck = 20 N/mm2, by dowel action.
fyk = 500 N/mm2
1 ,5
Design function (charact. On the basis of these findings,

1 ,0 values): sand-blasted;
fck = 20 N/mm2,
fyk = 500 N/mm2
design approaches are develo-
0 ,5
ped which permit separate and
0 ,0
0 ,0 1 ,0 2 ,0 3 ,0 4 ,0 5 ,0 6 ,0 7 ,0 8 ,0 9 ,0 1 0 ,0 1 1 ,0 1 2 ,0 realistic analyses of the various
ρ f y [ N/ mm 2] components of shear resistance.
Figure 15: Shear tests, sand-blasted interface As a result, a standardized level
of safety is ensured with respect
to resistance, regardless of
Mattlock, Walraven,
D aschner,Mat Daschner,
t ock,Paulay ,Hanson,Hilti
H ilt i whether the normal stresses at
5 ,5
Daschner: trowel; the interface are induced by an
fy = 450 – 1200 N/mm2,
5 ,0
fcw = 15 – 22 N/mm2 externally applied normal force or
Daschner: un worked surface;
4 ,5 fy = 450 – 1200 N/mm2, by internal connectors.
fc = 10 – 17 N/mm2
Mattock: trowel;
4 ,0 fy = 350 N/mm2,
fc = 35 N/mm2 11.4.4 Comparison with inter-
3 ,5
Paulay: trowel;
national test results
τ[ N/ mm 2]
fy = 318 N/mm2,
fc = 24 N/mm2
3 ,0 Hanson: trowel;
fy = 345 N/mm2, In his thesis [6], Randl has proven
fc = 22 – 29 N/mm2
2 ,5
Hilti [8]: unworked surface; through a study of literature and
fy = 508 – 653 N/mm2,
2 ,0 fc = 33 N/mm2 with reference to world-wide re-
Hilti [8]: unworked surface;
1 ,5
fy = 508 – 653 N/mm2, search results that the determi-
fc = 40 N/mm2
Hilti [8]: unworked surface; ned design equations are conser-
fy = 508 – 653 N/mm2,
1 ,0
fc = 17 N/mm2 vative. The results are shown in
Design function (charact.
0 ,5 values) [8]: smooth
fck = 20 N/mm2,
Figures 14, 15 and 16.
fyk = 500 N/mm2
0 ,0
0 ,0 1 ,0 2 ,0 3 ,0 4 ,0 5 ,0 6 ,0 7 ,0 8 ,0 9 ,0 1 0 ,0 1 1 ,0 1 2 ,0
ρ f y [ N/ mm 2]
Figure 16: Shear tests, „smooth“ interface
333
11.5 Notations
Lengths:
bj effective width of interface in the area under consideration
c1 anchor edge distance
lb anchorage depth of connector in base material as per Appendix 1
ls splice length of reinforcement, as per [1], Section 5.2.4
le length over which tensile cracking force is introduced
lj effective length of interface under consideration
Rt mean depth of interface roughness, measured according to the san-patch method
s spacing of connectors or rebar
sd displacement of connectors under the mean of permanent load (Fp ≈ 0.5 Fuk)
tnew thickness of concrete overlay
weff additional deformation calculated for the reinforced section considering the flexibility of the
connectors
wcalc additional deformation calculated for the reinforced section assuming perfect bond
x distance of neutral axis from compressed edge (bending)
Areas:
As cross-sectional area of interface reinforcement (connectors)
Ase cross-sectional area of bending reinforcement
Forces:
Fcr tensile force, effective in the overlay at the time when the cracks may first be expected to occur, as
per [1], Section 4.4.2.2
Nd design value of tensile force in connector
Ned tensile force resulting from moment of Fcr
VRd design shear resistance at interface
Vsd design shear force acting at interface
Ved shear force at interface derived from Fcr
Vcd design shear force acting at interface in compression zone
Vtd design shear force acting at interface in tension zone
Stresses:
fcd design value of cylinder compressive strength of concrete
fyd design value of yield strength of connector
fct,eff tensile strength of overlay effective at the time when the cracks may first be
expected to occur, as per [1], Section 4.4.2.2
σn normal stress (positive compression) certainly acting at interface
τRd basic design shear strength of concrete as per [1], Section 4.3.2.3
τTdj design shear strength at interface under consideration
Factors and coefficients:

k Coefficient to allow for non-uniform self-equilibrating stresses
kT cohesion factor as per Table 1
α coefficient for effective dowel action as per Table 1
β coefficient for effective concrete strength as per Table 1
γ
µ
ν
Increasing factor for deformation as per Table 3
coefficient of friction as per Table 1
efficiency factor as per [1], Formula (4.20); also refer to Table 2
6
κ coefficient for effective tensile force in the connector as per Table 1
ρ= As/bjlj reinforcing ratio corresponding to connectors at interface under consideration
334
11.6 Reference literature
[1] EC2; Design of concrete structures: ENV 1992-1-1:1991;

Part 1. General rules and rules for buildings
[2] EC2; Design of concrete structures: ENV 1992-1-3:12/94

Part 1-3. General rules-Precast concrete elements and structures
[3] EC4; Design of composite steel and concrete structures: ENV 1994-1-1:1992;
Part 1-1. General rules and rules for buildings
[4] Tsoukantas S. G., Tassios T.P.; Shear Resistance of Connections between

Reinforced Concrete Linear Precast Elements. ACI Journal, May-June 1989.
[5] CEB-Guide; Design of Fastenings in Concrete, Part III, January 1997

Characteristic Resistance of Fastenings with Cast-in-Place Headed Anchors.
[6] Randl, N, Untersuchungen zur Kraftübertragung zwischen Neu- und Altbeton bei unterschiedli-
chen Fugenrauhigkeiten; Dissertation in Vorbereitung, Universität Innsbruck
(Investigation into the transfer of forces between new concrete and old concrete with different
interface surface roughnesses); thesis being prepared, University of Inssbruck, Austria.
[7] Kaufmann, N: Sandflächenverfahren (Sand-patch method), Strassenbautechnik 24, (1971,

Germany), no. 3, pages 131-135
335
Connection for concrete overlays
12. Injection mortar HIT HY 150

and HAS rod 5.8 with nut or headplate
Features : - Base material: concrete, concrete overlays - Adjustable anchor head
- No splitting forces in the base material - plate can be used as rebar holder
- Easy handling, injection
Material: Anchor rod: HAS: 5.8, ISO 898 T1, galvanised to 5 microns
Anchor plate: FeE 235, galvanised to 5 microns
Foil pack : Hilti HIT HY 150: standard size 330 ml
Hilti HIT HY 150: jumbo cartridge 1100 ml
Dispenser: MD 2000, P 5000 HY.
A4 HCR
s
316 highMo h c
Corrosion resistance Special Corrosion Close edge distance /

(by request) resistance spacing
(by request)
12.1 Terms:
a) with nut b) with plate
axb
cü cü
m tp
concrete tnew ho ho
hef concrete tnew hef
overlay
overlay
l
l
hu hu
existing existing
concrete concrete
d0 d0
Note: Nut and plate have to be marked after adjusting!

hu anchoring depth in existing concrete ho height in the concrete overlay hef actual anchorage depth
cü cover d0 drill bit diameter l anchor length
m height of the nut
tnew thickness of the concrete overlay
axb lenght x width of the plate tp thickness of the plate
6
336
12.2 Data for the calculation

Calculation details (cp. also [1], page 294 to 298):
1. Bond stress WSd is calculated using the available area in the connection.
2. The necessary reinforcement content U can be obtained from Diagram 1, 2 and 3, the WRd t WSd must
be satisfied.
3. Minimum steel content is given in section 12.3.
4. Anchor rod choice should be compared to the existing geometrical conditions.
HAS 5.8 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

As [mm²] Stressed cross-sectional area of the 32.8 52.3 76.2 144 225
slot
sw x m [mm] nut 13 x 6.5 17 x 8 19 x 10 24 x 13 30 x16
a x b x tp [mm] Anchor plate 35 x 28 x 33 x 23 x 40 x 40 x 6 40x40x8 -
6.5 6.5
Material properties
fuk [N/mm²] Nominal tensile strength 500 500 500 500 500
fyk [N/mm²] Nominal yield strength yield strength 400 400 400 400 400
1)
fyd [N/mm²] Design value of the 333 333 333 333 333
2)
Nd [kN] Design value of the tensile force 5.5 8.7 12.7 24.0 37.5
3)
Embedment in the in the existing concrete (HIT-HY 150)
hu,min [mm] B 30/20 C 20/25 80 95 110 185 240
t B 35/25 t C 25/30 80 90 110 180 230
smin [mm] Min. spacing 120 135 165 190 255
4)
Minimum embedment in overlay concrete using a nut type head
ho,min [mm] B 30/20 C 20/25 45 60 75 110 150
B 35/25 C 25/30 45 55 70 105 140
B 45/35 C 30/37 45 50 65 100 130
B 50/40 C 35/45 45 50 65 95 125
t B 55/45 t C 40/50 45 50 60 95 120
smin [mm] Min. spacing 110 140 180 270 370
5)
Minimum embedment in overlay concrete using a plate type head
6)
ho,min [mm] B 30/20 C 20/25 40 50 60 100
6) 6)
t B 35/25 C 25/30 35 45 55 95
cmin [mm] Min. edge distance 55 70 90 135
smin [mm] Min. spacing 110 140 180 270
U lj b j
5. Calculate number of rods n , control edge distances and spacings cmin, resp. smin
As
1)
fyd = fyk/JMsJMs = 1.2, cp. [2], equation. (6a)]
2)
Nd N A ds fyd , cp. [1], section 11.2.5.4, equation (13) for rough and sandblasted surfaces
3)
Cp. [1], page 195 - 203 (Valid for rough, clean, hammer or with compressed air drilled holes)
Cp. [1]. section 11.2.5.4 (2b): Cracks in in concrete reduce the capacity of rebar. In these cases a longer embedment lenght must be
used. (e.g. for overlays or under tensile or bending loading with high shear component in the vicinity of the beam connection or of the
acting loads).
k 1 0.5 15
fck hef. ; k1= 9.0; JMc = 1.8, cp. [2], section 15.1.2.4
4)
NRd,c
J Mc
5)
NRd,c experimental (internal report A-IF-2/98)
6)
For 16 mm and 32 mm aggregate diameter in concrete: h0,min = 50 mm
[1] Hilti Fastening Technology Manual

[2] Design of fastenings in concrete, CEB Bulltin 233, January 1997
337
12.3 Minimum steel content for Ved

A Anchoring of Ved in the overlay should contain additional safety elements, such as stirrups.
tnew thickness of the overlay concrete

Ved Fcr t new b k fctk,ef (vgl. [1], section. 11.2.3.3, (7))
tnew Ned Ved c
Ved
s2 Ned (vgl. [1], section. 11.2.3.3, (9))
c le 6
cü,max max . possible conrete cover (cp. page 304)
le length over which tensile force is introduced equation
[1], section 11.2.3.3
As,erf necessary steel area of the rebar
nerf number of bond anchors necessary per meter
NRd necessary steel area of the rebars (cp. [1] page 195)
c edge distance
s1 rebar spacing prallel to the edge
s2 spacing of rebar rows
Exampel: hd-high pressure water cleaning, B35/25 (C25/30)
tneu [mm] 60 70 80 90 100 130 150 180 200 250
Ved [kN] 144 168 192 216 240 312 360 432 480 600
Ned [kN] 24 28 32 36 40 52 60 72 80 100
le [mm] 180 210 240 270 300 390 450 540 600 750
2
Wed [N/mm ] 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
1 2
)As,erf [mm ] 180 210 240 270 300 390 450 540 600 750
Nut
nerf HAS 5.5 M8 6.4 M8 4.6M10 3.5M12 3.9M12 2.7M16 3.1M16 2.4M20 2.7M20 3.3M20
NRd kN 6.7 6.7 8.8 13.3 13.3 24.0 24.0 37.5 37.5 37.5
2 2
cü,max [mm] 15 25 25 20 30 25 45 40 )60 )110
ho,min [mm] 45 45 55 70 70 105 105 140 140 140
hu,min [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 180 180 230 230 230
cmin [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 135 135 185 185 185
s1 [mm] 180 150 210 280 250 370 320 410 370 600
s2 [mm] - - - - - - - - - 370
Anchor plate
nerf HAS 5.5M8 6.4M8 4.6M10 3.5M12 3.9M12
1
cü,max [mm] 25 35 35 35 45 ) Uerf = 0.10% (cp. diagram 1)
3 3 3 2
ho,min [mm] )35 )35 )45 55 55 ) head of shear connector and reinforcement
hu,min [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 must ensure a good load distribution.
3
cmin [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 ) concrete with max 16 mm aggregate size
s1 [mm] 180 150 210 280 250
s2 [mm] - - - - -
Example: sandblasted B35/25 (C25/30)
tneu [mm] 60 70 80 90 100 130 150 180 200 250

Ved [kN] 144 168 192 216 240 312 360 432 480 600
Ned [kN] 24 28 32 36 40 52 60 72 80 100
le [mm] 360 420 480 540 600 780 900 1080 1200 1500
2
Wed [N/mm ] 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
1 2
)As,erf [mm /m] 720 840 960 1080 1200 1740 1800 2160 2400 3000
nut
Anzahlerf HAS 22 M8 26 M8 18 M10 15 M12 16 M12 23 M12 24 M12 15 M16 17 M16 21 M16
NRd kN 6.7 6.7 8.8 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 24.0 24.0 24.0
2 2 2 2 2
cü,max [mm] 15 25 25 20 30 )60 )80 )75 )95 )145
ho,min [mm] 45 45 55 70 70 70 70 105 105 105
hu,min [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 110 110 180 180 180
cmin [mm] 80 80 90 110 110 110 110 135 135 135
s1 [mm] 140 120 160 200 190 180 200 270 300 290
s2 [mm] 2x120 2x120 2x150 2x180 2x200 3x200 4x180 3x270 4x270 5x270
Nnchor plate
6
1
nerf HAS 22 M8 16 M10 18 M10 15 M12 16 M12 ) Uerf = 0.20% (cp. diagram 2)
2
cü,max [mm] 25 25 35 35 45 ) head of shear connector and reinforcement
3 3
ho,min [mm] )35 )45 45 55 55 must ensure a good load distribution.
3
hu,min [mm] 80 90 90 110 110 ) concrete with max 16 mm aggregate size
cmin [mm] 80 90 90 110 110
s1 [mm] 140 180 160 200 190
s2 [mm] 2x120 2x140 2x150 2x180 2x200
338
Diagram 1: for surfaces roughened with high pressure water jets or scored
(mean roughness Rt > 3 mm, i.e. peaks > approx. 6 mm high)
1.8
1.7 B55/45 (C40/50)

B50/40 (C35/45)
1.6
B45/35 (C30/37)
1.5 B35/25 (C25/30)
B30/20 (C20/25)
1.4
1.3
W Rdj [N/mm ]
2
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7 recommended
reinforcement content
0.6 (minimum)
0.5
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
2 2
Reinforcing ratio U [%] H AS 5.8 f yk = 400 N/m m fyd = 333 N/m m
5.2
5.0
B55/45 (C40/50)
4.8
B50/40 (C35/45)
4.6
4.4 B45/35 (C30/37)
4.2 B35/25 (C25/30)
4.0 B30/20 (C20/20)
3.8
W Rdj [N/mm ]
3.6
2
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
2 2
Reinforcing ratio U [%] H AS 5.8 fyk = 400 N/m m fyd = 333 N/m m
339
Diagram 2: for sand-blasted surfaces

(mean roughness Rt > 0.5 mm, i.e.peaks > approx. 1.0 mm high)
0.90
0.85
B55/45 (C40/50)
0.80
B50/40 (C35/45)
0.75
B45/35 (C30/37)
0.70
B35/25 (C25/30)
2
0.65 B30/20 (C20/25)
W RdjW [N/mm ]
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
Recommended
0.40 reinforcement content
(minimum)
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
2 2
Reinforcing ratio U [%] HAS 5.8 f yk = 400 N/mm fyd = 333 N/mm
4.0
3.8 B55/45 (C40/50)
3.6 B50/40 (C35/45)
3.4 B45/35 (C30/37)
3.2 B35/25 (C25/30)
3.0 B30/20 (C20/25)
2.8
W W Rdj [N/mm ]
2
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
6
0.8
0.6 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
2 2
340
Diagram 3: for smooth cast surfaces

0.60
0.55 B55/45 (C40/50)

0.50 B50/40 (C35/45)
B45/35 (C30/37)
0.45
B35/25 (C25/30)
0.40
B30/20 (C20/25)
W Rdj [ N/mm ]
2
0.35
0.30
Recommended
0.25 reinforcement
content (minimum)
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0.00
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.38
0.40
2 2
2.6
2.5
2.4 B55/45 (C40/50)
2.3 B50/40 (C35/45)
2.2 B45/35 (C30/37)
2.1
B35/25 (C25/30)
2.0
1.9 B30/20 (C20/25)
1.8
[N/mm 2]
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
WRdj
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
Reinforcing ratio U [%] HAS 5.8 fyk = 400 N/mm2 fyd = 333 N/mm2
341
12.4 Product Information
Hilti HIT-HY 150 for concrete
Foil pack HY 150

330ml 1100ml
Setting details
Drill hole. Brush. Blow out. Inject mortar. Insert rod. Wait for curing. Pave over.
HAS rod galvanised Anchor plate galvanised

Steel, grade 5.8 Fe E 235 (St 37)
Tp
a
Ordering Designation Ordering Designation
HAS M8x110 HAS M16x190 SR-SMA SR-SMA-L

HAS M8x150 HAS M16x260
HAS M16x300 Ordering D. a b Tp Thread Size
HAS M10x130 HAS M16x350 mm mm mm
HAS M10x190 SR-SMA 8 35 28 6.5 M8
HAS M20x240 SR-SMA 10 33 23 6.5 M10
HAS M12x160 HAS M20x260 SR-SMA 12* 40 40 6 M12
HAS M12x220 HAS M20x300 SR-SMA 16* 40 40 8 M16
HAS M12x300 HAS M20x400 SR-SMA-L 12* 60 30 6 M12
Other lenghth and steel qualities are possible Other lenghth and steel qualities are possible
Text of tender offer
Providing and setting of injection anchors consisting of :

Injection mortar Hilti HIT-HY 150 with HAS rod, steel, grade 5.8, M ..... x length ..... mm with anchor plate
SR-SMA M .... x length ...... mm x width ...... mm x thickness ...... mm.
Drilling and cleaning of the borehole ..... mm, Tiefe .......mm according to the directions of the supplier
As well as the hight adjustment of the plate, cutting of the overlong rebars and marking .
6
342
The whole Hilti team is always at your
disposal.
Hilti customer service

At Hilti, we wish to make things as simple as possible for you.
It doesn’t matter what you would like to know, our friendly
Hilti customer service team is ready to provide quick and
professional assistance.
■ Professional advice and sales assistance
■ Taking orders
■ Information about deliveries and prices
■ Handling of complaints
■ Technical advisory service
■ Contact with your Hilti sales person
■ Details of the Hilti centre in your vicinity
Hilti sales representative

If you wish to receive professional advice or a product
demonstration on a jobsite, at your office or in a workshop, a
Hilti sales representative or one of our field engineers will call
on you immediately.
Each is specialised in your trade / business and thus fully
familiar with your requirements. Each will provide:
■ professional advice and sales assistance,
■ product and application demonstrations and
■ on-the-spot service.
Hilti centre
If you need a Hilti product very quickly, or want it
demonstrated immediately, the right place for you will be a
Hilti centre. It offers you:
■ professional advice and sales assistance,
■ product demonstrations and
■ a receiving point for repairs.
343
Argentina Cyprus Indonesia
Hilti Argentina S.A., Buenos Aires Cyprus Trading Corp. Ltd., Nicosia P.T. Hilti Nusantara, Jakarta
+5411 471 771 00 +5411 471 771 10 +357 227 403 40 +357 224 828 92 +6221 800 49 64 +6221 809 27 78
Aruba Czech Republic Iran
Aruba Fasteners N.V., Oranjestad Hilti CR spol.sr.o., Praha Madavi Company, Hilti Division, Tehran
+2978 284 49 +2978 325 82 +420-2-61212631 +420-2-61195333 +9821 876 24 72 +9821 876 15 23
Australia Denmark Ireland
Hilti (Aust.) Pty. Ltd., Silverwater Hilti Denmark A/S, Roedovre Hilti (Fastening Systems) Ltd.,
+612 874 810 00 +612 87 4811 90 +4544 88 80 00 +4544 88 80 84 Dublin
Austria Dominican Republic +3531 886 41 01 +3531 830 35 69
Hilti Austria Ges.m.b.H., Wien Dalsan, C Por A, Santo Domingo Italy
+431 661 01 +431 661 012 57 +1809 565 44 31 +1809 541 73 13
Bangladesh Hilti Italia S.p.A., Milano
Ecuador
Aziz & Company Ltd., Hilti Division, Dhaka +3902-212721 +3902-25902189
Sermaco S.A., Quito
+8802 881 44 61 +8802 881 23 37 Ivory Coast
+593-2-2560953 +593-2-2505013
Barbados Technibat, Abidjan
Egypt
Gittens & Company, Ltd., M.A.P. S.O. for Marine Propulsion & Supply +225 35 28 60 +225 35 96 08
St. Michael S.A.E., Cairo Jamaica
+1246 426 47 40 +1246 426 69 58 +202 296 27 77 +202 296 27 80 Evans Safety Ltd.,
Belgium El Salvador Kingston
Hilti Belgium N.V., Asse (Zellik) Electrama S.A. de C.V., San Salvador +1876 929 55 46 +1876 926 20 69
+322 467 79 11 +322 466 58 02 +503 274 97 45 +503 274 97 47 Japan
Belize Estonia Hilti (Japan) Ltd., Yokohama
Benny’s Homecenter Ltd., Belize City Hilti Eesti Oü, Tallinn +8145 943 62 11 +8145 943 62 31
+5012 721 26 +5012 743 40 +372 655 09 00 +372 655 09 01 Jordan
Benin Finland Newport Trading Agency, Amman
La Roche S.A.R.L., Cotonou
Hilti (Suomi) Oy, Vantaa +9626 465 56 80 +9626 464 54 39
+229 33 07 75 +229 33 19 20
+3589 478 700 +3589 478 701 00 Kazakstan
Bolivia
France “EATC” Ltd., Almaty
Genex S.A., Santa Cruz
Hilti France SA, +732 725 039 53 +732 725 039 57
+591-3-343-1819 +591-3-343-1819
Magny-les-Hameaux Kenya
Bosnia Herzegovina
+331 301 250 00 +331 301 250 12 Professional Tools Ltd., Nairobi
Galeb Group d.o.o., Bijeljina
Gabon +2542-553075 +2542-553091
+387 554 721 85 +387 554 726 26
Ceca-Gadis, Libreville
Botswana Korea
+241 74 07 47 +241 74 32 63
Turbo Agencies, Gaborone Hilti (Korea) Company Ltd., Seoul
Germany
+267 31 22 88 +267 31 22 88 +82-2 2007 27 00 +82-2 2007 28 90
Hilti Deutschland GmbH, Kaufering
Brazil Kuwait
+4981 919 00 +4981 919 011 22
Hilti do Brasil Comercial Ltda., Works & Building Co., Safat
São Paulo Ghana
Auto Parts Ltd., Accra +965 481 48 15 +965 481 27 63
+5511 30469200 +5511 38455175 Latvia
Bulgaria +233-21-225924 +233-21-224899
Great Britain Hilti Services Limited, Riga
Hilti (Bulgaria) GmbH, Sofia
Hilti (Gt. Britain) Ltd., Manchester +371 762 88 22 +371 762 88 21
+3592 976 00 11 +3592 974 01 23
+44161 886 10 00 +44161 872 12 40 Lebanon
Cameroon
Sho Plus, Douala Greece Chehab Brothers SAL, Hilti Division, Beirut
+237 42 38 53 +237 42 25 73 Hilti Hellas SA, Athens-Likovrisi +9611 26 15 31 +9611 26 15 17
Canada +30-10-2880600 +30-10-2880607 Liechtenstein
Hilti (Canada) Ltd. Guatemala Hilti Vertretungsanstalt, Schaan
Mississauga, Ontario Equipos y Fijaciones S.A., Guatemala City +423 232 45 30 +423 232 64 30
+1905 813 92 00 +1905 813 90 09 +502 / 339-3583 +502 / 339-3585 Lithuania
Chile Guyana Hilti Complete Systems UAB, Vilnius
Hilti Chile Limitada, Santiago Fastening & Building Systems Ltd., +370-2725149 +370-2725218
+562 655 30 00 +562 365 05 05 Georgetown Macedonia (FYROM)
China +592-2-2250467 +592-2-2239712
Famaki-ve doel, Skopje
Hilti (China) Ltd., Shanghai Honduras
+38991 46 96 00 +38991 46 99 97
+8621 648 531 58 +8621 648 503 11 Lazarus & Lazarus, S.A.,
Madagascar
Colombia San Pedro Sula, Cortes
+504 565 88 82 +504 565 86 24 Société F. Bonnet et Fils, Antananarivo
Hilti Colombia Ltda., Bogotá
+57-1-351-3261 +57-1-351-3263 Hong Kong +26120 222 03 26 +26120 222 22 53
Costa Rica Hilti (Hong Kong) Ltd., Malawi
Superba S.A., La Urca, San José, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon Brown & Clapperton, Blantyre
+506 255 10 44 +506 255 11 10 +852 822 881 18 +852 276 432 34 +265-750193 +265-265750193
Croatia Hungary Malaysia
6
Hilti Croatia d.o.o, Zagreb Hilti (Hungária) Kft., Budapest Hilti (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd., Petaling Jaya,
+3851 377 22 79 +3851 375 70 80 +361 436 63 00 +361 436 63 90 +603-56338583 +603-56337100
Curaçao India Maldives
Caribbean Fasteners N.V., Davelaar Hilti India Private Ltd., New Delhi Aima Construction Co. Pvt. Ltd., Malé
+5999 737 62 88 +5999 737 62 25 +9111 609 25 66 +9111 608 57 87 +960 31 81 81 +960 31 33 66
344
Malta Puerto Rico Trinidad
Panta Marketing & Services Limited, Msida Hilti Caribe, Inc., Hato Rey, Agostini's Fastening Systems Ltd.,
+356 21 499 476 +1787 281 61 60 +1787 281 61 55 Port-of-Spain
+356 99 427 666 +356 21 440 000 Qatar
+1868 623 22 36 +1868 624 67 51
Mauritius H.B.K. Hilti Division, Doha
+974 432 86 84 +974 441 62 76 Tunisia
Ireland Blyth Limited, Port Louis
+230 212 72 02 +230 208 48 68 Romania Permetal SA, Tunis le Belvédère
Mexico Omnitech Trading S.A., Bukarest +2161 78 15 23 +2161 78 51 86
Hilti Mexicana S.A. de C.V., +40 21 326 36 72 +40 21 326 36 79 Turkey
Mexico City Russian Federation Hilti Insaat Malzemeleri T.A.S.,
+5255-53871600 +5255-52815967 Hilti Distribution Ltd., Moscow Umraniye/Istanbul
Morocco +7502 221 52 45 +7502 221 52 46
+90216 611 17 55 +90216 611 17 33
Mafix SA, Casablanca Saudi Arabia
Saad H. Abukhadra & Co., Uganda
+2122 25 73 01 +2122 25 73 64
Mozambique Hilti Fastening Systems, Jeddah Casements (Africa) Limited, Kampala
Isolux, LDA., Maputo +9662 691 77 00 +9662 691 74 79 +25641 23 40 00 +25641 23 43 01
+2581-303816 +2581-303804 Senegal Ukraine
Namibia Sénégal-Bois, Dakar Hilti (Ukraine) Ltd., Kiev
A Hüster Machinetool Company (Pty.) Ltd., +2218 32 35 27 +2218 32 11 89 +38044 230 26 06 +38044 220 07 12
Windhoek Singapore
United Arab Emirates
+26461 23 70 83 +26461 22 76 96 Hilti Far East Private Ltd., Singapore
+65 6777 78 87 +65 6777 30 57 Mazrui Engineering Products,
Nepal
Slovakia Hilti Division, Dubai
Indco Trading Concern, Kathmandu
+9771 22 62 64 +9771 22 31 68 Hilti Slovakia spol. s r.o., Bratislava +971-4-2622924 +971-4-2624002
Netherlands +4212 682 842 11 +4212 682 842 15 Uruguay
Hilti Nederland B.V., Slovenia Seler Parrado S.A., Montevideo
Berkel en Rodenrijs Hilti Slovenija d.o.o., Trzin
+5982 902 35 15 +5982 902 08 80
+3110 519 11 00 +3110 519 11 98 +386-1-5680930 +386-1-5637112
South Africa USA
New Zealand Hilti, Inc., Tulsa
Hilti (South Africa) (Pty) Ltd., Midrand
Hilti (New Zealand) Ltd., Auckland
+2711 237 30 00 +2711 237 31 11 +1918 252 6000 +1918 254 0522
+649 571 99 44 +649 571 99 43
Spain Hilti Latin America Limited, Tulsa
Nicaragua
Hilti Española SA, Madrid +1918 252 65 95 +1918 252 69 93
Fijaciones de Nicaragua, Managua
+3491 334 22 00 +3491 358 04 46 Venezuela
+505 270 45 67 +505 278 53 31
Sri Lanka
Nigeria Inversiones Hilti de Venezuela, S.A.,
Hunter & Co. Ltd., Colombo
GMP-General Metal Products Ltd., Caracas
+941 32 81 71 +941 44 74 91
Lagos +58-212-2034200 +58-212-2034310
St. Lucia
+2341 470 26 13 +2341 61 25 19 Vietnam
Construction Tools Ltd.,
Norway
Castries Hilti AG Representative Office,
Motek A.S., Oslo
+1758 452 21 25 +1758 453 73 95 Ho Chi Minh City
+4723-052500 +4722-640063 St. Maarten
Oman +848-9304091 +848-9304090
Hodge Refricentro N.V., Cole Bay
Bin Salim Enterprises LLC, Muscat Yemen
+599-5444761 +599-5444763
+968 56 17 08 +968 56 49 05 Sudan Nasser Establishment, Sana’a
Pakistan Bittar Engineering Ltd., Khartoum +9671 27 52 38 +9671 27 28 54
HSA Engineering Products +24911 77 10 45 +24911 78 01 02 Yugoslavia
Hilti Division Office, Islamabad Sweden Galeb Group d.o.o., Cerovac (Šabac)
+9251 220 63 70-1 Hilti Svenska AB, Arlöv
+9251 227 10 27 +9251 227 79 37 +381 155 181 11 +381 155 181 16
+4640 53 93 00 +4640 43 51 96
Panama Zambia
Switzerland
Superba Panama, S.A., Ciudad de Panamá Hilti (Schweiz) AG, Adliswil Zambisa Hardware Limited, Lusaka
+507-225-6366 +41 844 84 84 85 +41 844 84 84 86 +2601 23 52 64 +2601 22 15 64
+507-225-0268 +507-225-3375 Syria Zimbabwe
Paraguay Al-Safadi Brothers Co., Damascus Glynn’s Bolts (Pvt.) Ltd., Harare
S.A.C.I. H. Petersen, Asunción +96311 613 42 11 +96311 613 42 10 +2634 754042 +2634 754049
+595 212 026 15 +595 212 138 19 Taiwan
Peru Hilti Taiwan Co., Ltd., Taipei
Hilti Peru S.A., Lima +8862 250 981 15 +8862 251 678 07
+511-4466969 +511-4070605 Tanzania
Philippines Coastal Steel Industries Ltd.,
Hilti (Philippines)Inc., Makati City Dar es Salaam
+632 843 00 66 +632 843 00 61 +25551 86 56 97 +25551 86 56 92
Poland Thailand
Hilti (Poland) Sp.zo.o., Warszawa Hilti (Thailand) Ltd., Bangkok Metropolis
+4822 320 55 00 +4822 320 55 01 +662 751 41 23 +662 751 41 16
Portugal Togo
Hilti (Portugal), Produtos e Servicos, Lda., S.G.G.G., Société Générale du Golf de
Matosinhos – Senhora da Hora Guinée, Lomé
+35122 956 81 00 +35122 956 81 90 +228 21 23 90 +228 21 51 65
345

HILTI

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HILTI

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HILTI

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Fastening Technology Manual?

What is the purpose of the Fastening Technology Manual?

What responsibilities does the manual help ensure?

What responsibilities does the manual help ensure?

Fastening Technology

Hilti = registered trademark of the Hilti Corporation, Schaan

In this new Fastening Technology Manual we have compiled all design

Through our world-wide direct sales organisations, contact is made with

International application know-how, highly specialised research and

the latest production plant and equipment as well as an optimised

The Fastening Technology Manual will be a reliable reference work for

Dr. Thomas Schweisfurth

Mechanical anchoring systems 2

Adhesive anchoring systems 3

Anchor technology and design

Mechanical anchoring systems

Medium duty anchors

Light duty anchors

Light duty anchors (Insulation fasteners)

Adhesive anchoring systems

Medium duty anchors

Light duty anchors

Combined loading design .......................................................................................................274

10.3.3.3 Limit to concrete bond utilisation.........................................................298

11.2.5.4 Anchorage of connectors in the old and the new concrete.................324

Cracking from bending

Stress and strain

σb, D........ calculated compressive stress

1.3 Other base materials

Descriptions and explanations of each of these would go beyond the

1.4 Why does an anchor hold in a base material?

R The tensile load, N, is in

Combination of working principles

In the case of movement-controlled types, expansion takes place over a

1.4.1 Failure modes

1.4.1.1 Effects of static loading

a) Non-cracked concrete b) Cracked concrete

Application General conditions Recommendations

Structural fastening: Dry inside rooms, no condensation Galvanised 5-10 microns

Frequent and long-lasting A4 (316) steels, possibly hot-dipped

Composite construction Protection due to alkalinity of Galvanised 5-10 microns

Insulating Dacromet / plastic, A4 (316) steels

Town / city Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

Industrial atmosphere: Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

Insulating A4 (316) steels

Coastal atmosphere: Inside Galvanised 5-10 microns

Application General conditions Recommendations

Road and bridge construction

Frequently heavy exposure to road Hilti HCR

Dock/harbour/port facilities/off-shore rigs

Fastenings to quaysides, dock / Secondary relevance for safety, Hot-dipped galvanised

High humidity, chlorides, often a Hilti-HCR

On the platform / rig A4 (316) steels

Industry / chemical industry

Outside applications, very heavy A4 (316) steels

Fastenings relevant to safety Dry inside rooms Galvanised 5-10 microns

Outside applications, very heavy A4 (316) steels

Application General conditions Recommendations

Smokestacks of waste incineration plants

Fastening of, for example,